Section Iv

Translated from the French.
If any misunderstanding or
misinterpretation arise herefrom, the original French text alone is valid.
In case the CD Rom content differs from the printed text,
the printed text alone is valid.
SECTION IV
Design and Construction Rules for Mechanical
Components of PWR Nuclear Islands
Z I SUBSECTIONS A - GENERAL RULES
WELDING
Z - TECHNICAL ANNEXES
2012 Edition afcen

RCC-M - 2012 Edition Section IV - S
SECTION IV
WELDING
Pages
S 1000 GENERAL............................................................................................................ S1000/1
S 1100 GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................... /1
S 1110 PRELIMINARY VERIFICATIONS, QUALIFICATIONS AND ACCEPTANCES........ /1
S 1120 WELDING DATA PACKAGE .................................................................................... /2
S 1121 Welding procedure data sheets
S 1200 WELDABILITY OF MATERIALS .................................................................... /3
S 1300 GENERAL REMARKS ON HEAT TREATMENTS ................................... /4
S 1310 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................... /4
S 1320 PREHEAT AND INTERPASS TEMPERATURE........................................................ /5
S 1321 Carbon steels

S 1322 Low alloy steels except Cr and Cr-Mo steels containing
not less than 0.5% Cr - 0.5% Mo
S 1323 Cr and Cr-Mo steels
S 1330 POSTHEATING .......................................................................................................... /6
S 1340 STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT ............................................................... /6
S 1341 Carbon steels

S 1342 Low alloy steels with the exception of Cr and Cr-Mo steels
S 1343 Low alloy Cr and Cr-Mo steels
Martensitic and ferritic stainless steels
S 1400 CONSERVATION OF TEST SPECIMENS, QUALIFICATION

ASSEMBLIES AND PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS.............. /7
S 1500 DEFINITION OF WELDING PROCEDURE OPERATIONS ................... /8
S 1600 TO S1800 (NOT USED) ................................................................................. /8
S 1900 CONTINUED VALIDITY OF QUALIFICATIONS

TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS ...................................................................... /8
 n° 137-2012 S / 1
S 2000 ACCEPTANCE OF FILLER MATERIALS ....................................... S2000/1
S 2100 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... /1
S 2110 PRINCIPLES .............................................................................................................. /1
S 2120 ACCEPTANCE SPECIFICATION .............................................................................. /1
S 2200 DESIGNATION ..................................................................................................... /2
S 2300 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS............................................................ /2
S 2310 TIG WIRES.................................................................................................................. /2
S 2320 MIG OR MAG WIRES ................................................................................................. /2
S 2330 COVERED ELECTRODES ........................................................................................ /2
S 2340 OTHER PRODUCTS................................................................................................... /2
S 2400 DEFINITION OF LOTS ....................................................................................... /2
S 2410 SOLID WIRES AND STRIP ELECTRODES ............................................................. /2
S 2420 FLUX CORED WIRES ............................................................................................... /3
S 2430 COVERED ELECTRODES ......................................................................................... /3
S 2440 SOLID FLUXES ......................................................................................................... /3
S 2500 LOT TESTS ............................................................................................................ /3
S 2510 TESTS ON FILLER MATERIALS .............................................................................. /4
S 2511 Cobalt content of filler materials
S 2520 TESTS PERFORMED ON DEPOSITED METAL OF PRODUCTS

TO BE USED FOR AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS STEEL
OR NICKEL-BASE ALLOY CLADDING ................................................................... /4
S 2521 Covered electrodes and gas shielded wires

S 2522 Strip electrodes and fluxes
S 2530 TEST ON WELD METAL FOR STRENGTH WELDS AND BUTTERING ................. /5
S 2531 Dimensions of test plates

S 2532 Preparation of test plates
S 2533 Operating conditions
S 2534 Heat treatment
S 2535 Sampling and test methods
S 2536 Number and type of tests
S 2540 RESULTS.................................................................................................................... /8
S 2541 Results of tests

S 2542 Products defined by reference data sheets
S 2543 Retests
S / 2  n° 137-2012
S 2550 ACCEPTANCE VALIDITY PERIOD, REPORT ......................................................... /9
S 2600 LABELLING ........................................................................................................... /14
S 2700 TECHNICAL REFERENCE DATA SHEETS .............................................. /14
S 2800 DATA SHEETS FOR CARBON AND LOW-ALLOY STEEL

FILLER MATERIALS ......................................................................................... /15
S 2900 DATA SHEETS FOR STAINLESS STEEL AND

NICKEL-BASE ALLOY FILLER MATERIALS ............................................ /26
S 3000 WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION.................................. S3000/1
S 3100 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. /1
S 3110 SCOPE........................................................................................................................ /1
S 3120 REPAIR BY WELDING OF

PRODUCTION WELDS.............................................................................................. /1
S 3130 DOCUMENTS TO BE ESTABLISHED ..................................................................... /2
S 3140 QUALIFICATION TESTS ........................................................................................... /2
S 3141 Number and type of test pieces

S 3142 Dimensions
S 3143 Acceptance of base metals and filler materials
S 3144 Position and direction of welding
S 3150 REPORTS................................................................................................................... /3
S 3160 VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION ....................................................................... /3
S 3200 GENERAL CASES .............................................................................................. /4
S 3300 SIMULATED REPAIRS BY WELDING ........................................................ /18
S 3400 STEEL CAST PARTS REPAIRS

BY WELDING ....................................................................................................... /18
S 3410 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION ................................................................................... /18
S 3411 Workshop
S 3412 Base metal: grade
 n° 137-2012 S / 3
S 3413 Base metal: shape - dimensions

S 3414 Welding process
S 3415 Filler materials and shielding gas
S 3416 Type of joint
S 3417 Welding position
S 3418 Welding technique and parameters
S 3419 Heat treatments
S 3420 EXECUTION OF THE TEST PIECE ........................................................................... /22
S 3421 Base metal and filler materials

S 3422 Welding of the test pieces
S 3430 TESTING OF THE TEST PIECE ............................................................................... /22
S 3431 Non-destructive examinations

S 3432 Destructive tests
S 3440 RESULTS ................................................................................................................... /24
S 3450 SIMULATED REPAIR BY WELDING ........................................................................ /24
S 3500 SPECIAL WELDS ................................................................................................ /25
S 3510 BUTT WELDING OF DISSIMILAR METAL JOINTS ................................................. /25
S 3511 General
S 3512 Execution and testing of the test piece
S 3513 Simulated repair by welding
S 3520 CANOPY AND OMEGA TYPE WELDS ..................................................................... /27
S 3521 Range of qualification

S 3522 Execution of the test piece
S 3523 Testing the test piece
S 3524 Simulated repair by welding
S 3530 FILLET WELDS NOT SUBJECTED TO MECHANICAL STRESSES....................... /29
S 3531 Attachment welds

S 3532 Seal welds
S 3540 PIPE SOCKET WELDS .............................................................................................. /29
S 3541 Range of qualification of the representing socket weld test piece

S 3542 Execution of the test pieces
S 3543 Examination of the test piece
S 3550 FRICTION WELDING ................................................................................................. /33
S 3551 Range of qualification

S 3552 Execution of the test piece
S 3553 Testing of the test piece
S / 4  n° 137-2012
S 3560 ELECTRON BEAM WELDING .................................................................................. /36
S 3570 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR METAL-PLATED PLATE JOINTS ............................ /41
S 3571 Rules applicable to the substrate steel

S 3572 Range of qualification for the metal-plating
S 3573 Test conditions
S 3580 PROVISIONS FOR JOINTS CONNECTING

PREVIOUSLY WELDED CLAD PARTS.................................................................... /42
S 3590 HOMOGENEOUS BUILD-UP .................................................................................... /42
S 3600 WELD OVERLAY CLADDING OF AUSTENITIC-

FERRITIC STAINLESS STEEL ON UNALLOYED
AND LOW-ALLOY STEELS ............................................................................ /42
S 3610 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION ................................................................................... /42
S 3611 Workshop
S 3613 Base metal: shape, dimensions
S 3616 Number and sequence of layers
S 3617 Welding position and direction
S 3620 EXECUTION OF THE TEST PIECE .......................................................................... /46

S 3622 Welding of the test piece
S 3623 Simulated stress relieving heat treatment
S 3630 EXAMINATION OF THE TEST PIECE ...................................................................... /48
S 3631 General
S 3634 Results
S 3640 SIMULATED REPAIR BY WELDING ....................................................................... /50
S 3650 COMBINATION OF WELDING PROCEDURES FOR CLADDINGS ........................ /51
 n° 137-2012 S / 5
S 3700 WELD OVERLAY CLADDING OF NICKEL-BASE

ALLOY ON CARBON AND LOW-ALLOY STEELS .................................. /51
S 3710 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION .................................................................................... /51
S 3711 Workshop
S 3714 Welding processes
S 3716 Number and sequence of layers
S 3730 EXAMINATION AND TESTING OF THE TEST PIECE ............................................. /52
S 3731 General
S 3734 Results
S 3750 SIMULATED TUBE TO TUBE PLATE WELDS ........................................................ /55
S 3760 COMBINATION OF WELDING PROCEDURES FOR CLADDING ........................... /56
S 3800 TUBE TO HEAT EXCHANGER TUBE PLATE WELDS ........................... /56
S 3810 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION .................................................................................... /56
S 3811 Workshop
S 3816 Type of preparation

S 3822 Type of preparation
S 3823 Welding of the test piece
S 3824 Simulated stress relieving heat treatment
S / 6  n° 137-2012
S 3830 EXAMINATION OF THE QUALIFICATION TEST PIECE ......................................... /60
S 3831 General
S 3834 Results
S 3841 Range of qualification and execution of test pieces

S 3842 Examination of the qualification test piece
S 4000 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

AND OPERATORS ........................................................................................ S4000/1
S 4100 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... /1
S 4110 PURPOSE .................................................................................................................. /1
S 4120 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE MANUFACTURER........................................................ /1
S 4130 DOCUMENTS TO BE PREPARED............................................................................ /1
S 4140 RENEWAL OF QUALIFICATIONS ............................................................................ /2
S 4200 GENERAL CASE ................................................................................................. /2
S 4210 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ /2
S 4220 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. /2
S 4221 General
S 4222 Scope of application
S 4223 Groups of materials
S 4230 RANGE OF APPROVAL ............................................................................................ /3
S 4231 General
S 4232 Groups of materials
S 4233 Dimensions
S 4234 Types of weld
S 4235 Examination and test methods
S 4236 Period of validity of the qualification
S 4240 ADDITIONAL TEST PIECE........................................................................................ /5
S 4241 General
S 4242 Representative test piece of nozzles
S 4243 Testing of the representative test piece
S 4244 Range of approval for representative test piece of nozzles
 n° 137-2012 S / 7
S 4300 SPECIAL CASES .................................................................................................. /6
S 4310 CLADDING AND BUTTERING BY FUSION OF AUSTENITIC FERRITIC

STAINLESS STEEL AND NICKEL-BASE ALLOY.................................................... /7
S 4311 Execution of the qualification test piece

S 4312 Non destructive examinations
S 4320 WELDING OF HEAT EXCHANGER OR STEAM GENERATOR TUBES

TO TUBE PLATES ..................................................................................................... /8
S 4321 Range of approval

S 4322 Execution of the qualification test piece
S 4330 SPECIFIC SEAL WELDS (CANOPY, OMEGA JOINTS, ETC.) ................................ /10
S 4340 PIPE SOCKET WELDS .............................................................................................. /10
S 4350 FRICTION WELDING ................................................................................................. /10
S 5000 QUALIFICATION OF FILLER MATERIALS................................... S5000/1
S 5100 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... /1
S 5110 SCOPE ....................................................................................................................... /1
S 5120 DEFINITION OF LOTS .............................................................................................. /1
S 5130 QUALIFICATION TESTS............................................................................................ /2
S 5131 Description of tests

S 5132 Method
S 5140 QUALIFICATION RECORD AND REPORT .............................................................. /3
S 5141 Qualification record

S 5142 Qualification data sheet
S 5143 Qualification certificate
S 5200 LIMITS OF VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION ...................................... /4
S 5210 GRADE AND THICKNESS OF BASE METAL .......................................................... /4
S 5220 GEOMETRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF WELDING MATERIALS ....................... /5
S 5230 WELDING PROCESS AND TYPE OF CURRENT..................................................... /5
S 5240 TYPE OF WELD ......................................................................................................... /5
S 5250 WELDING POSITION AND DIRECTION ................................................................... /5
S 5260 WELDING PARAMETERS ......................................................................................... /6
S 5270 ASSOCIATED HEAT TREATMENTS ....................................................................... /6
S / 8  n° 137-2012
S 5300 QUALIFICATION TESTS FOR CARBON AND

LOW-ALLOY STEEL FILLER MATERIALS ................................................ /6
S 5311 Tests on product

S 5312 Tests on the weld metal outside the dilution zone
S 5313 Tests on the test coupon
S 5320 RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED .................................................................................. /7
S 5400 QUALIFICATION TESTS FOR AUSTENITIC

OR AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS STEEL
FILLER MATERIALS .......................................................................................... /8
S 5411 Tests on products

S 5420 RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED ................................................................................... /9
S 5500 WELDING MATERIAL FOR AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC

STAINLESS STEEL CLADDING..................................................................... /9

S 5600 WELDING MATERIALS FOR NICKEL-BASE

ALLOY STRENGTH WELDS............................................................................ /10

S 5612 Tests on the deposited metal outside the dilution zone
S 5620 RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED .................................................................................. /11
S 5700 QUALIFICATION TEST FOR FILLER MATERIALS

FOR NICKEL BASE ALLOY CLADDING ................................................... /11

 n° 137-2012 S / 9
S 6000 TECHNICAL QUALIFICATION OF

PRODUCTION WORKSHOPS................................................................ S6000/1
S 6100 SCOPE ..................................................................................................................... /1
S 6200 QUALIFICATION CONDITIONS ...................................................................... /1
S 6210 INSTALLATIONS........................................................................................................ /1
S 6220 PERSONNEL AND SUPERVISION ........................................................................... /1
S 6230 EXPERIENCE ............................................................................................................. /2
S 6231 General case

S 6232 Demonstration that the level of skill has been maintained
S 6300 QUALIFICATION REPORT ............................................................................... /3
S 6310 GENERAL CASE........................................................................................................ /3
S 6320 DEMONSTRATION THAT THE LEVEL OF SKILL

HAS BEEN MAINTAINED .......................................................................................... /3
S 6400 WORKSHOP QUALIFICATION PERIOD ..................................................... /5
S 6410 QUALIFICATION PERIOD ......................................................................................... /5
S 6420 INVALIDATION OF THE QUALIFICATION ............................................................... /5
S 6500 TRANSFER OF WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION ................ /5
S 7000 PRODUCTIONS WELDS............................................................................ S7000/1
S 7100 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... /1
S 7110 SCOPE ....................................................................................................................... /1
S 7120 STORAGE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... /1
S 7200 STORAGE AND USE OF THE WELDING MATERIALS ......................... /2
S 7210 STORAGE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... /2

S 7211 Entry into store
S 7212 Storage period
S 7213 Stock control
S 7214 Release from store
S / 10  n° 137-2012
S 7220 USE OF THE WELDING MATERIALS ...................................................................... /3
S 7221 Drying and conservation

S 7222 Recycling of fluxes
S 7230 IDENTIFICATION OF THE PRODUCTS DURING WELDING .................................. /4
S 7300 PREPARATION AND EXAMINATION OF EDGES

AND SURFACES WELDING ............................................................................ /5
S 7310 BEVELS...................................................................................................................... /5
S 7320 BEVELLING METHODS ............................................................................................ /5
S 7330 AIR CARBON ARC GOUGING.................................................................................. /5
S 7340 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES AND EDGES TO BE WELDED

AND OF ADJACENT AREAS.................................................................................... /6
S 7350 REPAIRS TO SURFACES AND EDGES TO BE WELDED...................................... /6
S 7360 INSPECTION BEFORE ALIGNMENT ....................................................................... /7
S 7361 Dimensional check

S 7362 Visual examination
S 7363 Magnetic particle examination and liquid penetrant examination
S 7370 ALIGNMENT OF WELD EDGES ............................................................................... /10
S 7380 INSPECTION BEFORE ALIGNMENT ....................................................................... /11
S 7381 Dimensional checks of ready-to-weld test coupon

S 7382 Visual examination of the ready-to-weld test coupon
S 7400 EXECUTION ON PRODUCTION WELDS .................................................... /12
S 7410 TACK WELD REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ /12
S 7420 WELDING OF PERMANENT AND TEMPORARY ATTACHMENTS ....................... /13
S 7421 General
S 7422 Welding requirements
S 7423 Qualification for the welding attachments
S 7424 Bridges and clamps
S 7425 Removal of temporary attachments
S 7426 Inspection after removal of temporary attachments
S 7430 EXECUTION OF WELDS ........................................................................................... /15
S 7431 General requirements

S 7432 Special requirements
S 7433 Checking of instruments used for measuring welding parameters
S 7434 Verification of welding parameters
S 7435 Backing strips and consumable inserts
S 7436 Weld pool protection
S 7437 Various surface alterations of the base metal
S 7438 Welds with removal of root passes-welds with backing runs
S 7439 Cleanliness
 n° 137-2012 S / 11
S 7440 PEENING .................................................................................................................... /19
S 7450 WELD SURFACE FINISHING .................................................................................... /19
S 7451 Strength welds

S 7452 Finishing weld cladding
S 7460 VISUAL AND DIMENSIONAL EXAMINATIONS ....................................................... /20
S 7461 Class 1 and 2 welds

S 7462 Class 3 welds
S 7463 Special case of welded socket joints
S 7470 PRODUCTION WELD DATA SHEET ........................................................................ /23
S 7500 WELD RELATED HEAT TREATMENTS ..................................................... /23
S 7510 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... /23
S 7520 PREHEATING............................................................................................................. /23
S 7521 General
S 7522 Methods and precautions
S 7523 Temperature
S 7524 Measurement of preheat temperatures and interpass temperatures
S 7530 POST-HEATING ......................................................................................................... /25
S 7540 STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENTS ............................................................. /25
S 7541 General
S 7542 Operating conditions
S 7543 Requirements for production weld test coupons
S 7544 Temperatures and holding times
S 7545 Temperature monitoring and recording
S 7600 REPAIR BY WELDING ...................................................................................... /28
S 7610 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... /28
S 7620 SPECIAL CASE OF REPAIRS BY WELDING EXEMPTED

FROM SUBSEQUENT HEAT TREATMENT ........................................................... /28
S 7630 SPECIAL CASE OF TUBE SEALING BY WELDING

HOLLOW PLUGS AT THE JUNCTION OF HEAT
EXCHANGER TUBES AND TUBE PLATES ............................................................ /31
S / 12  n° 137-2012
S 7700 NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATIONS

OF PRODUCTION WELDS .............................................................................. /32
S 7710 CLASS 1 WELDS....................................................................................................... /32
S 7711 Method
S 7712 Extent of examination
S 7713 Time of examination
S 7714 Acceptance criteria
S 7715 Repairs
S 7716 Report
S 7720 CLASS 2 WELDS....................................................................................................... /57
S 7721 Method
S 7722 Extent of the examination
S 7725 Repairs
S 7726 Report
S 7730 CLASS 3 WELDS ...................................................................................................... /82
S 7731 Method
S 7732 Extent of the examination
S 7740 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF SOCKET WELDED JOINTS ........................ /85
S 7741 Radiographic examination criteria

S 7742 Degree of examination
S 7800 DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF PRODUCTION WELDS:

PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS...................................................... /86
S 7810 PRINCIPLES .............................................................................................................. /86
S 7820 NUMBER OF PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS ........................................... /87
S 7821 General
S 7822 Special cases
S 7830 WELDING OF PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS .......................................... /89
S 7840 EXAMINATION........................................................................................................... /89
S 7850 TESTS......................................................................................................................... /90
S 7860 SPECIAL CASES OF CHEMICAL ANALYSES

OF DISSIMILAR-METAL JOINTS ............................................................................ /92
S 7861 Stainless steel cladding on carbon or low-alloy steels

S 7862 Nickel base alloy cladding on carbon or low-alloy steels
S 7863 Stainless steel to carbon or low alloy steel buttering performed by
manual, semi-automatic or automatic welding
 n° 137-2012 S / 13
S 7870 PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPON REPORTS................................................... /94
S 8000 WELD-DEPOSITED HARDFACINGS

ON CARBON, LOW ALLOY
OR ALLOY STEELS ..................................................................................... S8000/1
S 8100 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... /1
S 8110 HARDFACING PROCEDURES.................................................................................. /1
S 8120 PROCESSES .............................................................................................................. /1
S 8130 DESIGN DRAWINGS.................................................................................................. /2
S 8140 DOCUMENTS TO BE PREPARED ............................................................................ /2
S 8200 ACCEPTANCE OF FILLER MATERIALS .................................................... /3
S 8210 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... /3
S 8220 DEFINITION OF FILLER MATERIALS ...................................................................... /3
S 8230 LOT OF FILLER MATERIAL ...................................................................................... /3
S 8231 Rods
S 8232 Covered electrodes
S 8233 Metal powder
S 8240 TESTS PER LOT ........................................................................................................ /4
S 8241 Tests on filler material

S 8242 Tests on the deposited metal
S 8250 ACCEPTANCE REPORT ........................................................................................... /5
S 8300 HARDFACING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION ....................................... /5
S 8310 AREA OF VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION ....................................................... /5
S 8311 Workshop
S 8312 Base metal : grade
S 8213 Base metal : shape, dimensions
S 8315 Filler materials
S 8316 Number of layers

S 8318 Welding techniques and parameters
S 8321 Base metal and filler material

S 8322 Hardfacing of the test piece
S 8223 Repair simulation
S / 14  n° 137-2012
S 8330 EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS ON THE TEST PIECE .............................................. /9

S 8340 VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION ........................................................................ /12
S 8400 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS AND WELDING

OPERATORS ......................................................................................................... /12
S 8410 AREA OF VALIDITY .................................................................................................. /12
S 8411 Workshop
S 8415 Filler materials and shielding gases
S 8416 Number of layers
S 8418 Welding techniques and parameters
S 8420 WELDING OF THE TEST PIECE............................................................................... /13
S 8421 Base metal and filler material

S 8422 Hardfacing of the qualification test coupon
S 8430 EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS ON THE QUALIFICATION TEST COUPON ........... /13

S 8440 VALIDITY OF QUALIFICATION - QUALIFICATION RENEWAL ............................. /13
S 8500 MANUFACTURE .................................................................................................. /14
S 8510 STORAGE AND UTILIZATION OF FILLER MATERIALS........................................ /14
S 8511 Use of materials

S 8512 Identification of products during hardfacing
S 8520 PREPARATION OF THE SURFACE TO BE HARDFACED..................................... /15
S 8530 HARDFACING TECHNIQUES ................................................................................... /16
S 8531 Welding positions

S 8532 Cleanliness
S 8540 REPAIRS TO WELD DEPOSIT ................................................................................. /16
S 8550 HEAT CYCLES........................................................................................................... /16
S 8551 Preheating, postheating

 n° 137-2012 S / 15
S 8560 HARDFACING TESTS, BEFORE AND AFTER MACHINING .................................. /17
S 8561 Surface aspect examination

S 8562 Liquid penetrant examination - visual examination
S 8563 Dimensional check
S 8570 OTHER PRODUCTION EXAMINATIONS.................................................................. /18
S 8571 Analysis of machining chips

S 8572 Surface hardness
S 8573 Ultrasonic or radiographic examinations
S 8574 Ferromagnetic examination
S 8575 Production weld test coupons
ANNEX S I MECHANICAL TESTS ..................................................................... Ann.SI /1
S I 100 TENSILE TESTS ................................................................................................... /1
S I 110 TRANSVERSE-WELD TENSILE TESTS ................................................................... /1
S I 111 Types of test specimens and sampling methods

S I 112 Test procedure
S I 120 TENSILE TESTS OF THE DEPOSITED METAL ....................................................... /1
S I 121 Types of test specimens and sampling method

S I 122 Test procedure
S I 200 BEND TESTS ........................................................................................................ /2
S I 210 TYPES OF TEST SPECIMENS AND SAMPLING METHOD ................................... /2
S I 211 Transverse face and root bend test specimens

S I 212 Longitudinal bend test specimens
S I 213 Side bend test specimens
S I 220 TEST PROCEDURE ................................................................................................... /3
S I 230 BEND TESTS ON CLADDINGS................................................................................. /3
S I 300 IMPACT TESTS ..................................................................................................... /3
S I 310 TESTING OF DEPOSITED METAL ........................................................................... /3
S I 311 KU impact tests

S I 312 KV impact tests
S I 320 TESTS ON THE HEAT AFFECTED ZONE (HAZ) ..................................................... /4
S I 321 KU impact tests

S I 322 KV impact tests
S / 16  n° 137-2012
S I 330 ADDITIONAL IMPACT TESTS ................................................................................. /5
S I 331 KV transition curves

S I 332 Determination of the RTNDT of the deposited metal
S I 333 Impact tests on the heat affected zone (HAZ)
S I 400 METALLOGRAPHIC EXAMINATIONS ......................................................... /8
S I 500 HARDNESS MEASUREMENTS ...................................................................... /9
S I 600 ACCELERATED INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST .................... /11
S I 610 THE INTERGRANULAR CORROSION TEST........................................................... /11
S I 620 NUMBER OF TEST SPECIMENS AND SAMPLING METHODS ............................. /11
S I 630 DIMENSIONS OF TEST SPECIMENS....................................................................... /12
Annexe S II CLASSIFICATION OF DEFECTS IN METALLIC

FUSION WELDS WITH EXPLANATIONS
Annexe S III TYPES OF BRANCHES

RECOMMENDED WELDED ASSEMBLIES
FOR PIPES
 n° 137-2012 S / 17
S / 18  n° 137-2012
S 1000
GENERAL
S 1100 GENERAL PROVISIONS
S 1110 PRELIMINARY VERIFICATIONS,

QUALIFICATIONS AND ACCEPTANCES
The use of any welding procedures shall be preceded by the following verifications, qualifications
and acceptance tests:
- preliminary verification of the weldability of the materials (see S 1200),
- acceptance testing of lots of filler materials (see S 2000),
- qualification of the welding procedure (see S 3000),
- qualification of welders and operators for that welding procedure (see S 4000),
- qualification of filler materials covered by the terms of S 5000 (see S 5000),
- qualification of the workshop (see S 6000).
The main points at which the qualifications specified in the various chapters of this section overlap
are summarized below.
- No lot of filler material may be accepted until a technical qualification data sheet has been issued
for the material in question if it is covered by the terms of S 5000. This technical qualification
data sheet defines the scope of a lot and also defines the conditions for use of the material.
- Any lot of filler material used when a welding procedure is qualified shall have been accepted in
accordance with the terms of S 3143.
- Welders or operators who have passed the qualification tests welding procedure shall be
qualified to use that procedure within the limits set by the terms of chapter S 4000.
Another welder or operator may apply the welding procedure if he has passed the qualification tests
in accordance with the terms of S 4000.
- The qualification of a welding procedure exempts the filler material used from the standard
assembly test stipulated in S 5131.3. The procedure qualification report shall take the place of the
welding procedure qualification record stipulated in S 5143.
 n° 137-2012 S 1000 / 1
A change in brand or manufacturing process of a filler material need not invalidate the qualification
of the welding procedure if the conditions of the paragraph dealing with the area of validity of the
qualification of filler materials, are satisfied. They do however require the requalification of the
filler material in accordance with the terms of S 5000.
- The qualification of a welding procedure shall have been approved at the workshop where the
procedure is used. Transfer from one workshop to another or to the site shall, however, be
allowed subject to the conditions laid down in S 6000.
- The tests or standard test coupons required for the qualification of filler materials covered by
S 5000 shall be performed by a qualification fabricating workshop in accordance with S 6000
using filler materials acceptance-tested in accordance with S 2000.
Note: Hardfacing by fusion on steel is dealt with separately in chapter S 8000.
S 1120 WELDING DATA PACKAGE

Each welding data package relates to one component. It is required for pressure retaining
components and for reactor internals.
It shall comprise:
- an overall or outline drawing of the component, marking the position of all welded joints. In the
special case of pipelines, other than those of the primary loops, to which the concept of an
overall or outline drawing does not apply, it shall be possible to identify the type of joint used,
e.g. on the isometric drawings,
- For components other than piping, a manufacturing schedule showing the assembly and welding
sequences for the parts of the component, together with the interlocking stress-relieving heat
treatments and inspections,
- a catalogue of all joints: for each welded joint, or for each type of joint in the case of piping, the
following shall be provided or specified:
. a dimensional sketch,
. the welding procedure or procedures used and the relevant welding procedure data sheets,
. the cumulated heat treatments,
. the properly referenced qualification test coupon or test coupons which validate the welding
procedure,
. a recapitulatory list of qualification test coupons for the whole component with, for each
test coupon :
- the preliminary welding procedure specification (pWPS),
- an extract from the welding procedure qualification report including, in particular, the
values recorded at the time the qualification assembly was carried out, allowing the area of
validity of the qualification to be established,
. a list of welding control test coupons.
S 1000 / 2  n° 137-2012
S 1121 WELDING PROCEDURE DATA SHEETS

Welding procedure data sheets enumerate and quantify all the variables regarded as affecting the
area of validity of the qualification of the procedure concerned.
In the special case of mixed or heterogeneous welds (see S 3110), the welding procedure data sheet
shall specify the provisions adopted (at weld edges or in the standard part of the weld) concerning
overlapping of passes or layers and the measures taken to ensure that overlapping is properly
performed.
S 1200 WELDABILITY OF MATERIALS
The Contractor for the main primary system and the Manufacturer for the other components shall
satisfy themselves that all the materials to be assembled by means of welded joints are suitable for
welding by the proposed procedures.
The reference is provided by a covered-electrode manual butt weld of significant thickness made in
the flat position; the use of other welding procedures constitutes an extension of the weldability of
the material. The weldability of a steel increases with the range of possible choices of welding
processes and filler materials and with the widening range of variables of the welding procedures
which can be used to make satisfactory welds.
The Contractor or the Manufacturer shall make use of test results already available for the materials
involved or shall, if necessary, carry out adequate additional tests.
The information so obtained shall cover both the heat-affected zone and the deposited metal in their
final state, that is, they shall take into account the effect of any heat treatment(s) applied after
welding.
The information shall cover the following aspects of the intended application:
- metallurgical characteristics,
- mechanical properties:
. strength,
. toughness (energy absorbed by breakage on Charpy impact test specimen, etc.),
- resistance to various types of cracking:

. hot,
. when reheated,
. cold. In particular, mixed or heterogenous welds (cladding and buttering comprising stainless
steel or Ni-Cr-Fe alloy, repairs included) shall be performed in accordance with the same
conditions (preheating, postheating, etc.) as those adopted for welding with a deposited metal
the same as the base metal, unless justification can be provided for not doing so. This applies
to the deposition of at least all of the layers capable of affecting the base metal above critical
temperature AC1;
- service performance.
 n° 137-2012 S 1000 / 3
The scope of this last item depends on all the various stresses applied to the joint in question
(mechanical, thermal and corrosion stresses). In particular, the effects of radiation on irradiated
joints and the effect of the environment on all joints shall be assessed.
All data proving weldability shall be attached to the part or product qualification report in
compliance with M 140 in order to supplement these reports with regard to weldability as required
by M 143.4 and the note of M 143.6.
S 1300 GENERAL REMARKS ON HEAT TREATMENTS
S 1310 INTRODUCTION
The heat treatment parameters set out in subchapter S 1300 are recommended minimum values; it is
understood, that working on the basis of these values, it shall be for the Manufacturer to apply
stricter standards, if necessary, in order to ensure the proper quality of fabrication and he shall be
able to support by test results his choice of the heat treatment parameters associated with the
welding operations.
The conditions governing the application of such treatments are specified in S 7500.
The equivalent thicknesses E to be taken into account for pre and post heating operations are as
follows, depending on the type of connection:
S 1000 / 4  n° 137-2012
S 1320 PREHEAT AND INTERPASS TEMPERATURE

DEFINITIONS
The preheat temperature is the minimum temperature in the groove immediately prior to welding or,
in case of multi-pass welds, the lowest temperature of the underlying metal immediately before each
pass. Interpass temperature shall be the highest temperature of the underlying metal immediately
prior to each pass.
The preheat condition and the maximum interpass temperature shall be defined by the Manufaturer,
mainly by reference to:
- the grades and thicknesses of the materials to be assembled,
- the type of joints, the test coupon restraint conditions and the welding sequences,
- the welding procedures used.
The minimum preheat temperature shall be determined on the basis of tests (1) so as to eliminate or
minimize the hardening effects associated with phase changes by reducing the cooling rate of
the weld.
This preheat temperature shall be maintained over the whole welded joint until heat treatment after
welding (postheating or stress relieving heat treatment).
The maximum interpass temperature shall be defined on the basis of tests (2) so that the specified
mechanical properties of the deposited metal are not affected.
(1) These tests form part of the weldability file which includes for example 1st pass hardness measurements and
cracking tests.
(2) These tests may for example be acceptance or qualification tests for filler materials in accordance with S 2000
or S 5000.
S 1321 CARBON STEELS

For equivalent thicknesses E (as defined in S 1310) greater than 40 mm, preheating to a minimum
temperature of 100°C is recommended, or mandatory if required in B, C or D 4000, for steels of
minimum specified tensile strength Rm lower than 440 MPa in the non-stress relieved condition,
e.g. steels:
S 235 - S 275 – P 235 GH (A 37) – P 265 GH (A 42).
For steels of minimum specified tensile strength Rm greater or equal than 440 MPa in the non-stress
relieved condition, e.g. steels S 355, P 295 GH (A 48) and P 355 GH (A 52), the minimum
recommended, or mandatory if required in B, C or D 4000 preheating temperature for equivalent
thicknesses E (as defined in S 1310) equal to or greater than 20 mm, is 125°C.
S 1322 LOW ALLOY STEELS EXCEPT Cr AND Cr-Mo STEELS

CONTAINING NOT LESS THAN 0.5% Cr - 0.5% Mo
For equivalent thicknesses E (as defined in S 1310) greater than 15 mm or of specified tensile
strength greater than 450 MPa, preheating to a minimum temperature of 125°C is recommended or
mandatory if required in B, C or D 4000.
 n° 137-2012 S 1000 / 5
S 1323 Cr AND Cr-Mo STEELS

For equivalent thicknesses E (as defined in S 1310) greater than 15 mm or of specified tensile
strength greater than 400 MPa, preheating to a temperature between 150°C and 300°C is
recommended or mandatory if required in B, C or D 4000.
S 1330 POSTHEATING
The purpose of this treatment is mainly to diffuse the hydrogen and to avoid the risk of cold
cracking.
When preheating is required in accordance with S 1320, postheating is then required at a

temperature equal to or greater than the preheating temperature for a minimum of 60 min, except if
stress-relieving heat treatment is to be performed immediately after welding without any return to
room temperature.
S 1340 STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT

The Manufacturer shall define the conditions for intermediate and final postweld stress relieving
heat treatment, if any, in accordance with the requirements of chapter F 8000.
Conditions for such heat treatment are dependent on the variables listed in F 8120 and on the
welding process used.
The currently accepted holding temperatures and the times for which they are maintained (the
temperature being assumed to be uniform within the range specified throughout thickness of the
welded joint) and the minimum thicknesses for which the type of treatment is required are given
below for information purposes.
S 1341 CARBON STEELS

Thicknesses over 30 mm (as defined in S 7544 c) This limitation can nevertheless be increased to
35 mm for steels with a minimum specified tensile strength Rm not exceeding 440 MPa in the non-
stress relieved condition, for example the following steels:
S 235 - S 275 – P 235 GH (A 37) – P 265 GH (A 42).

- Holding temperature: 550°C to 625°C (recommended minimum 575°C).
- Holding time:
. 2 minutes per millimetre of thickness (as defined in S 7544 c) with a minimum of 30 minutes
and a maximum of 120 minutes.
S 1000 / 6  n° 137-2012
S 1342 LOW-ALLOY STEELS WITH THE EXCEPTION

OF Cr AND Cr-Mo STEELS
- Thicknesses over 10 mm (the thickness refers to the parts to be welded; for welds between two
parts of different thickness, the thickness of the thicker part shall be used) with the exception of
steels with a nickel content  1%.
- Holding temperature: 595°C to 675°C.
- Holding time:
. 1 hour per 25 mm of thickness (as defined in S 7544 c) with a minimum of 30 minutes:
beyond 2 hours it shall be held for 2 hours + (15 minutes per 25 mm over 50 mm).
S 1343 LOW-ALLOY Cr AND Cr-Mo STEELS

MARTENSITIC AND FERRITIC STAINLESS STEELS
a) 0.5% Cr - 0.5% Mo
1% Cr - 0.5% Mo
1.25% Cr - 0.5% Mo
- Holding temperature: 595°C to 675°C.
- Holding time: 1 hour for each 25 mm of thickness (as defined in S 7544 c) with a minimum of
30 minutes; beyond 5 hours it shall he held for 5 hours + (15 minutes for each 25 mm of
thickness over 125 mm).
b) Castings of 13% Cr - 4% Ni steel: see S 1343.a. with the following remark:

- holding temperature: 595°C to 620°C.
c) 2.25 % Cr  1% Mo 

5 % Cr  0.5 % Mo  see S 1343.a. with the following remark :

Martensitic stainless steels 
- holding temperature: 675°C to 760°C.
d) Ferritic stainless steels: see S 1343a. with the following remark:

- holding temperature 700°C to 760°C.
S 1400 CONSERVATION OF TEST SPECIMENS,

QUALIFICATION ASSEMBLIES AND
PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS
Discard from test coupons and test specimens of welding procedure qualification shall be kept by
the Manufacturer during 3 years.
Discard from production weld test coupons and test specimens shall be kept by the Manufacturer
until the component is accepted.
 n° 137-2012 S 1000 / 7
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - June 2013 Addendum Section IV - S
S 1500 DEFINITION OF WELDING

PROCEDURE OPERATIONS
A welding process is said to be manual if the welding torch or electrode is hand-guided by the
welder.
A welding process is said to be partially mechanized if the operator can intervene during the course
of welding.
A completely mechanized, automatic or robotized welding process is one in which no human

intervention is possible during the course of the welding operation.
S 1600 TO S 1800 NOT USED
S 1900 CONTINUED VALIDITY OF QUALIFICATIONS

TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS
Subject to compliance with the provisions of S 2550, S 3160, S 4200, S 8250 and S 8340,
concerning the term of validity of filler material acceptance certificates, of qualifications for
welding and hardfacing by fusion procedures and for welders and operators, the certifications and
qualifications established in accordance with any given edition of SECTION IV of the RCC-M,
shall be considered valid for the purposes of the previous and following editions, unless subchapter
S 1900 of these editions explicitly introduces special transitional provisions concerning compliance
with all or part of the new provisions laid down in this edition.
The range of qualification associated with the welding procedure qualifications and welders and
operators qualifications is then that of the edition of the RCC-M applicable contractually to the
manufacturing operations in question.
In the case of existing welding procedure qualification:
- for which the heat input values were not measured, a test coupon performed under the same
conditions as the welding procedure qualification may be used to define the range of qualification
in heat input.
As the minimum, the measure of heat input values for every pass, the required non-destructive
tests, hardness tests and impact tests shall be performed on this coupon.
- for which the maximum interpass temperature was not validated during the welding procedure
qualification, the area of validity shall be based on the maximum interpass values measured
during acceptance tests of filler materials or of the test coupon mentioned in the previous
subparagraph.
S 1000 / 8  n° 140-2013
S 2000
ACCEPTANCE OF FILLER MATERIALS
S 2100 GENERAL
S 2110 PRINCIPLES
This chapter defines the general principles to be included in specifications for the acceptance of
carbon, low-alloy and stainless steel and nickel-alloy filler materials.
These materials are for use in making strength welds, buttering, and cladding, seal and repair welds.
The main purpose of the acceptance tests is to establish that the lots of filler materials used in
manufacture are of a constant quality similar to that of the lots which have undergone qualification
tests. The acceptance tests shall, therefore, be carried out under reproductible conditions and shall
be related to the qualification tests carried out on filler materials outside the dilution zone when such
qualification is stipulated in S 5000.
They shall be carried out in the presence of the Quality Control Department of the Supplier of the
filler materials and/or of the Manufacturer.
S 2120 ACCEPTANCE SPECIFICATION

The Manufacturer shall draw up acceptance specifications for the supply of filler materials. This
document shall be drafted in accordance with the provisions of this section and shall refer to the
provisions of the technical qualification data sheet for filler materials defined in S 5142 when such
qualification is required in S 5000 and shall comply with these provisions.
The contents of this document may be limited to provisions additional to this section, including, in
particular, in the case of acceptance performed on the weld deposit:
- the welding parameters,
- the interpass temperature and any prescribed post weld heat treatment,
- the basic drawing for taking test specimens,
- reference to a data sheet referred to in S 2800 or S 2900 (or otherwise to a data sheet defining the
results required in accordance with the provisions of S 2700).
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 1
S 2200 DESIGNATION
Products are identified by a conventional designation. The Designations of AFNOR standards are
used for this purpose, or alternatively or additionally, foreign designations AWS, JIS, DIN, etc.
Reference to these standards does not mean that their technical provisions (particularly as regards
dimensions) apply; they simply make it easier to name the products.
A gas or gas mixture is defined by its nominal composition and by one or more indices of purity in
accordance with standard NF EN ISO 14175.
S 2300 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
S 2310 TIG WIRES

As a general rule, dimensions of wires are in accordance with standard NF EN ISO 544.
S 2320 MIG OR MAG WIRES

As a general rule, dimensions of wires are in accordance with standard NF EN ISO 544 for all
grades.
S 2330 COVERED ELECTRODES

The dimensions of electrodes are in accordance with standard NF EN ISO 544, except for the length
of alloy core electrodes which may be shorter. Compliance with equivalent standards other than
French is acceptable.
S 2340 OTHER PRODUCTS

The dimensional characteristics of other products (flux-cored wires, submerged-arc welding wires,
strip electrodes, consumable inserts) shall be specified by the product Supplier in agreement with
the Manufacturer.
S 2400 DEFINITION OF LOTS
S 2410 SOLID WIRES AND STRIP ELECTRODES

A lot of filler material must have the same trade name and shall respond at least to the class S3
criteria as per standard NF EN ISO 14344.
S 2000 / 2  n° 140-2013
S 2420 FLUX CORED WIRES

A lot of filler material must have the same trade name and shall respond at least to the class T4

A lot of filler material must have the same trade name and shall respond at least to the class C3
criteria as per standard NF EN ISO 14344. In addition, the core wire must originate from the
same heat.
For class 2 and 3 components, except for main secondary system components mentioned in C 4440,
covered electrodes lots can be constituted in conformance with the requirements of class C3 of
standard NF EN ISO 14344.
S 2440 SOLID FLUXES

A lot of filler material must have the same trade name and shall respond at least to the class F2
A lot of flux shall be associated with a lot of wire or strip to form an indivisible pair for acceptance
and manufacture.
S 2500 LOT TESTS
The tests to be performed on each lot of filler materials are listed in Table S 2500.
When referring to this table, three cases have to be considered according to the purpose for the
material used:
1) strength welds and buttering,
2) TIG root pass welds and seal welds,
3) cladding.
Materials to be used for repair welds shall be subjected at least to the same series of tests as the
materials used to make the weld which is to be repaired.
Note: For TIG wires used for welds not subjected to pressure whose thickness does not exceed 10 mm, acceptance
tests may consist in carrying out a test which reproduces the conditions of the qualification test performed on a
flat or tubular butt test coupon. In this case, these tests replace the tests stipulated in table S 2500 for the
deposited metal outside the dilution zone, and consisting in performance of a transverse tensile test and two
face bend tests on a single specimen for each type of test.
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 3
S 2510 TESTS ON FILLER MATERIALS

Wires, strip electrodes and consumable inserts shall be subjected to a product analysis.
The elements to be analyzed, the required contents and, where appropriate, the ferrite content
determined by reference to Schaeffler's diagram as modified by Delong or McKay (see figure
S 2500.2) are prescribed in the reference data sheets.
S 2511 COBALT CONTENT OF FILLER MATERIALS

Cobalt content shall be limited for filler materials used for cladding in direct contact with the
primary fluid (as defined in F 6000 - Annex F I) and for welds directly exposed to radiation from the
reactor.
This limit is laid down in the attached reference data sheets and shall comply with the following
maximum values:
- austenitic-ferritic stainless steel: Co  0.1% in area away from neutron flux
Co  0.06% in area under neutron flux
- carbon or low alloy steel: Co  0.03%
- nickel-based alloy: Co  0.06%
S 2520 TESTS PERFORMED ON DEPOSITED METAL OF PRODUCTS

TO BE USED FOR WELD-DEPOSITED AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC
STAINLESS STEEL OR NICKEL-BASE ALLOY CLADDING
For these products, a chemical analysis of the deposited metal outside the dilution zone shall be
performed as specified below. The required values and the ferrite content in the case of austenitic-
ferritic stainless steels are prescribed in the reference data sheets and the technical acceptance
specification.
A corrosion test in accordance with S 2535.2 shall be performed, if required. This test is not
required for 24 Cr-12 Ni products used in the first layer.
S 2521 COVERED ELECTRODES AND GAS-SHIELDED WIRES

The weld deposit and the sampling shall be carried out in accordance with standard
NF EN ISO 6847, or in accordance with S 2531 in the case of covered electrodes.
Pending the issue of a specific standard, the same procedure shall be followed for gas-shielded
wires.
S 2522 STRIP ELECTRODES AND FLUXES

1) Base metal
- Strip electrode type S 23 12 L and nickel-base alloy: the base metal may be low alloy steel.
- Strip electrode type S 19 9 L: the base metal shall be very low carbon austenitic stainless
steel.
S 2000 / 4  n° 140-2013
- Dimensions: the dimensions of the coupon shall be large enough for a deposit to be made
without appreciable deformation.
- Preparation: the surface to be clad shall be machined (or ground) and degreased if necessary.
2) Operating conditions
- Drying: before welding, the flux shall be baked and kept in the conditions recommended by
the Supplier in the technical data sheet included in the qualification record in accordance
with S 5000.
- Parameters: the weld shall be made in the flat position. The welding parameters, and the
preheating and interpass temperature conditions shall be prescribed in the acceptance
specification. The weld shall be made in at least 3 layers.
3) Inspection of the weld deposit

- During welding: each weld bead shall be inspected visually and brushed. All slag shall be
removed, by grinding if necessary.
- After welding: after brushing, or grinding if necessary, the weld metal shall be inspected
visually.
4) Sampling
The sample for chemical analysis shall be taken from chips of metal to a depth of 2 mm from
the surface.
S 2530 TESTS ON WELD METAL FOR STRENGTH WELDS

AND BUTTERING
All lots or combinations of lots of filler materials shall be subjected to chemical analysis and
mechanical tests. The chemical analysis shall be performed either on material from the test plate for
mechanical tests or on the weld metal as specified in standard NF EN ISO 6847.
In the special case of TIG wires used exclusively for root passes and seal welds, the tests on the
weld metal are not required.
S 2531 DIMENSIONS OF TEST PLATES

The test plate shall in all cases be long enough for test samples to be taken both for the series of
required tests and any re-tests.
The dimension of acceptance filler metal test plates shall be in conformance with type 1.3 or 1.4 or
1.5 of standard NF EN 1597-1 with the following stipulations:
- the width (a) of filler metal acceptance test plates shall be increased to at least 150 mm for gas
welding processes except in cases defined in S 2500,
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 5
- the length of solid wire- flux combination test plates shall be increased to at least 500 mm,
- the test plate dimensions shall be in compliance with figure S 2500.1 for solid wire-flux
combinations in alloy or low alloy steel grades.
S 2532 PREPARATION OF TEST PLATES

The base metal used to make the test plate (including the backing strip) shall be:
- either a grade which is compatible with the weld metal obtained by fusion of the filler material
under test,
- or a carbon steel buttered with a filler material of the same grade as that to be accepted.
In this case, this steel shall correspond to one of the following grades:
- S235 or S275, quality J0 at least, of standard NF EN 10025-2,
- A 37 or A 42 of standard NF A 36-205,
- any other equivalent steel with the same chemical composition.
Buttering shall extend over all parts which may come into contact with the weld metal deposited by
welding.
After machining of the bevels and surfacing of the test-plate buttering, the buttering shall comprise
at least 3 layers.
S 2533 OPERATING CONDITIONS

DRYING
Before use, electrodes and fluxes shall be dried under the conditions recommended by the Suppliers
in the qualification data sheets of the qualification record in accordance with S 5000.
PARAMETERS
The weld shall be made in the flat position. The welding parameters, the conditions for preheating
and interpass temperature and any conditions for post-weld heat treatment shall be prescribed in the
acceptance specifications.
As a general rule, it is recommended that the "execution rates" defined in AFNOR standards be used
where these exist. Otherwise, it is recommended that the temperature should be close to the
maximum permitted interpass temperature.
EXAMINATION OF THE TEST PLATE

Each bead shall be visually inspected and brushed, if necessary.
Any slag shall be removed completely, by grinding if necessary.
Volumetric examination of test plates is not required. It may however be carried out to ensure that
test specimens are taken from sound metal.
S 2000 / 6  n° 140-2013
RCC-M - 2012 Edition - March 2014 Addendum Section IV - S
WELDING SEQUENCES
The direction of welding shall be changed after each bead.
In the case of automatic welding process, however, all beads may be made in the same direction.
Furthermore, in the case of automatic welding, with solid flux the following requirements shall be
applied:
- for weld beads at the edge of the groove, the wire (diameter D) shall be held vertical at a distance
from the groove of:
 1.5 mm
dia.  0.5 mm
- three passes shall be made per layer if a test plate with broad groove is used.
S 2534 HEAT TREATMENT

If a weld made with the acceptance-tested materials undergoes at least one stress relieving heat
treatment during manufacture, a simulated stress relieving heat treatment shall be applied to the test
plate (except in the case of 23.12 L type materials used only in the first layer) as required by
acceptance specifications and consistent with the qualification record called for in S 5000.
The equivalent holding time for the simulated stress relieving heat treatment shall be in all cases
equal to at least 80% of the duration of the heat treatment actually performed during manufacture.
If the effect of the stress-relieving heat treatment has been characterized during preparation of the
filler materials qualification record (see S 5000) performance of a reference stress-relieving heat
treatment may be proposed for acceptance.
S 2535 SAMPLING AND TEST METHODS

An outline sketch indicating the position of test specimens shall be included in the acceptance
specifications.
The direction of sampling and the orientation of KV impact tests are given in figures S 2500.1.b and
S 2500.1.c.
1) Chemical analysis
Chemical analysis and, in the case of austenitic-ferritic stainless steels, the determination of the
ferrite content (by reference to the Schaeffler diagram as modified by Delong or Mckay, figure
S 2500.2) shall be carried out in a zone located in the centre of the test plate.
When the tensile strength test is to be performed in the deposited metal, the sample shall be taken
in the extension of the cylindrical tensile test specimen or a fragment of this specimen.
2) Accelerated intergranular corrosion test

The corrosion test is required for deposits of austenitic-ferritic stainless steel outside the dilution
zone as specified in annex S I.
 n° 144-2014 S 2000 / 7
These tests shall not be required, however, if the carbon content is not higher than 0.035%.
Otherwise, the tests shall be carried out and shall give satisfactory results. In addition, the
chromium content shall be:
- Cr  19.00% for 19.9 type materials,
- Cr  17.00% for 19.12.2 type materials.
S 2536 NUMBER AND TYPE OF TESTS

The number and type of the tests depend on the grade and intended use of the materials. As a rule,
the tests to be carried out on the weld metal are of the same type as the tests performed on the base
metal to be welded, particularly as regards the tensile tests at high temperature and the impact tests.
The list which follows shows the series of tests to be carried out. Additional tests may be required
by the procurement specification according to special circumstances.
1) Chemical analysis
2) Tensile tests
1 tensile test at room temperature.
1 tensile test at high temperature according to the requirements of annex S I 120.
3) Impact tests
1 series of 3 KV impact test specimens:
- at room temperature for austenitic-ferritic stainless steels,
- for each of the temperatures where results are stipulated by the reference specification data
sheet (and/or the equipment specification) for carbon or low alloy steels.
S 2540 RESULTS
S 2541 RESULTS OF TESTS
Test results shall in general comply with the requirements of chapter S 3000, taking the following
into account:
a) Tensile test at room temperature
Elongation after fracture shall be at least 30% for austenitic-ferritic stainless steels and at least
20% for carbon and low-alloy steels.
b) Chemical analysis
The following values shall be satisfied:
1) Carbon steels, low-alloy steels and alloy steels
- S  0.025 %
- P  0.030 %
S 2000 / 8  n° 137-2012
For class 1 equipment, these values are modified as follows:

High radiation zones Other zones
- S  0.015 % - S  0.025 %
- P  0.012 % - P  0.025 %
- Cu  0.07 % - Cu  0.25 %
- Co : see S 2511
2) Austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steels
- S  0.025 %
- P  0.025 %
- Co : see S 2511
3) Nickel-base alloys:
- S  0.015 %
- P  0.020 %
- Co : see S 2511
S 2542 PRODUCTS DEFINED BY REFERENCE DATA SHEETS

In the case of materials defined by the attached reference data sheets (S 2800 and S 2900), the
specified requirements shall be satisfied, and, according to the base metal welded, shall be
supplemented with regard to the tensile properties after simulated stress relieving heat treatment, if
any, in accordance with S 2541.
S 2543 RETESTS
Any test improperly executed shall be invalidated.
If one or more tests produce results not to specification, confirmatory tests may be performed;
retests shall comprise two tests for each unsatisfactory test.
For the lot to be accepted, the results of all such retests shall be satisfactory.
For the impact test only a single unsatisfactory result shall require the repetition of twice the entire
series of tests at the given temperature.
The test specimens for the retests shall be taken from the same mould as the test specimens giving
unsatisfactory results. If this is not possible, another test plate shall be prepared for the whole series
of tests and all the results obtained shall be satisfactory.
S 2550 ACCEPTANCE VALIDITY PERIOD, REPORT

The full designation of the material used for the acceptance tests, the specified values and the result
of each test shall be recorded in a report. This document shall identify the specification which
stipulates acceptance conditions.
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 9
The period of validity of the acceptance is limited to the period indicated by the Supplier in the
qualification data sheet, starting from the date of signature of the report. It should not exceed five
years in the case of covered electrodes, flux-cored wires and fluxes coupled with any lot of wire or
strip electrode. The validity of the acceptance shall be extended for a period of the same duration
from the date of signature of the report on a welding test coupon for which the product accepted was
used.
If the results of this test coupon do not comply with the requirements of paragraph S 7850, the
appraisal specified in this same paragraph shall prove that the product for which extension of the
validity of the acceptance report is anticipated is not to blame. Should this not be the case, extension
of the validity of the acceptance report shall be refused.
S 2000 / 10  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 2500
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
High Temperature
 Ferrite Content
Determination of
Simulated tube
Tensile Test at
Tensile Test at
Key :
Temperature
Temperature
and/or- 20°C
Intergranular
(see SI 120)
KV at Room
KV at 0°C
Corrosion
Chemical
Analysis
weld (1)
Room
1) Strength welds and buttering
2) TIG root passes and seal welds
3) Cladding
(not considered in mechanical analysis)
Carbon or low-alloy steel TIG and

1-2
MAG rods and wire
Austenitic stainless steel TIG and MIG
1-2-3 1-2-3
rods and wire
Tests Performed on The Products
Nickel-base alloy TIG and MIG rods

1-2-3
and electrodes
Carbon or low-alloy steel electrodes for
1
submerged arc welding
Austenitic stainless steel electrodes for
1-3 1-3
submerged arc welding
Austenitic stainless steel strip electrodes 3
Nickel-base alloy strip electrodes 3
Flux
Gas
Covered Electrodes
Carbon or low-alloy steel 1 1 1 1
Austenitic-ferritic stainless steel 1-3 1-3 1-3 1 1 1

Tests Performed on Deposited Metal Outside Dilution Zone
Martensitic alloy steel 1 1 1
Nickel-base alloy 1-3 1 1 1 3

Bare Solids Rods and Electrodes
(TIG) carbon or low-alloy steel 1 1 1 1
TIG  austenitic-ferritic stainless

 1-3 1-3 1-3 1 1 1
MIG  steel
TIG MIG nickel-base alloy 1 1 1 1 3
(submerged arc) carbon or low-

1 1 1 1
alloy steel
(submerged arc) austenitic-ferritic
1-3 1-3 1-3 1 1 1
stainless steel
(MAG) carbon or low-alloy steel 1 1 1 1
Flux-cored electrode:
1 1 1 1
carbon or low-alloy steel
Austenitic-ferritic stainless steel strip
3 3 3
electrodes (+flux)
Nickel-base alloy strip electrodes 3 3
(1) Note : if required for tube plate cladding (see S 3750)
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 11
Figure a) TEST PLATE WITH BROAD GROOVE FOR ACCEPTANCE

OF WIRE ELECTRODE-FLUX COMBINATIONS
Figure b) LOCATION OF IMPACT TEST SPECIMENS
Figure c) LOCATION OF TENSILE TEST SPECIMEN
* NOTE : In all cases, the length of the test plate shall be sufficient to allow all the test specimens to
be taken for all tests and retests.
FIGURE S 2500.1
S 2000 / 12  n° 140-2013
FIGURE S 2500.2
DELONG'S DIAGRAM
CALCULATION OF PERCENTAGE OF  FERRITE
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 13
S 2600 LABELLING
Each package of any material shall be labelled with at least the following details:
- Supplier's designation,
- standard designation (if any),
- trade name,
- grade,
- heat or lot number,
- dimension or grain size,
- quantity.
The term "package" shall mean any of the following:

- case,
- box,
- spool,
- drum,
- sack, etc.
In addition, covered electrodes shall be marked individually near the bared end with some
conventional trade designation enabling them to be identified properly after drying.
S 2700 TECHNICAL REFERENCE DATA SHEETS
The series of reference specifications which follows, gives for each standard material designation,
the results of chemical analysis, the mechanical properties after any heat treatment and the base
metals involved:
- chapter S 2800 includes the data sheets for the properties of carbon and low-alloy steel filler
materials;
- chapter S 2900 includes the data sheets for stainless steel and nickel-base alloy filler materials.
These data sheets are to be used in one of two ways:
1) the material to be accepted with the base metal welded during manufacture, heat treatment to be
applied and the required mechanical properties are in accordance with the attached data sheets:
the reference data sheets shall apply in full,
2) the material to be accepted is not in accordance with any of the attached data sheets: the
acceptance specification shall be made to include all the data contained in the data sheets in
accordance with the requirements of this chapter.
S 2000 / 14  n° 137-2012
S 2800 DATA SHEETS FOR CARBON AND

LOW-ALLOY STEEL FILLER MATERIALS
S 2810 COVERED ELECTRODES, CARBON STEEL
S 2820.A COVERED ELECTRODES, LOW-ALLOY STEEL

(OUTSIDE HIGH RADIATION ZONES)
S 2820.B COVERED ELECTRODES, LOW-ALLOY STEEL

(HIGH RADIATION ZONES)
S 2830.A FLUX WIRE COUPLE, LOW-ALLOY STEEL

(OUTSIDE HIGH RADIATION ZONES)
S 2830.B FLUX WIRE COUPLE, LOW-ALLOY STEEL

(HIGH RADIATION ZONES)
S 2840 MAG WIRE, CARBON STEEL
S 2850 MAG FLUX-CORED WIRE, CARBON STEEL
S 2860 SUBMERGED ARC WELDING WIRE, CARBON STEEL
S 2870 TIG WIRE, CARBON STEEL
S 2880 MAG FLUX-CORED WIRE, LOW-ALLOY STEEL
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 15
CLASSIFICATION : E 7018 - E 380 B

E 420 B PROCESS: Manual arc DATA SHEET
STANDARD : AWS A5.1 No. S 2810
NF EN ISO 2560 TYPE OF PRODUCT: Covered electrode
GRADE : Carbon steel
1) CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
% Calcu-
Ta
C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo Co Cu V Fe N2 lated 
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de-  
       
posited 0.025(1) 0.25
metal 0.100 0.90 1.40 (2) 0.025 0.30* 0.20* 0.30 (1) 0.04*
0.030
2) MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
CHARACTE- TENSILE STRENGTH AT
TENSILE STRENGTH AT °C TENSILE AT °C
RISTICS ROOM TEMPERATURE
in MPa in % in MPa in % in MPa in %
DEP'D
METAL COND. Rp0.2 Rm A Z Rp0.2 Rm A Z Rp0.2 Rm A Z
As welded or min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min.
after
simulated stress
relieving heat
Varies according to the base metal
treatment in
accordance with see S 2540
S 2534**
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
KV 0°C
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D mean min. mean min. mean min. mean min.
METAL COND.
 60  42 (1)
Same as
above  40  28 (2)
1 = Strength welds and buttering

3) BASE METAL - TYPE OF WELD: 2 = TIG root pass and seal welds
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
BASE METAL BASE METAL
1 2 3 1 2 3
Steels as per NF EN 10028-2 X
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 X
4) COMMENTS
* If analysis is required elsewhere (1) for class 1 components (2) for components outside class 1
S 2000 / 16  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : E 8018
STANDARD : AWS A5.5 PROCESS: Manual arc DATA SHEET
GRADE : Low alloy Mn, TYPE OF PRODUCT: Covered electrode No. S 2820A
Mo, Ni steel*
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de- 0.15 0.80 0.25
       
posited to to to
metal 0.100 0.025 0.025 1.50 0.30 0.10 0.15 0.04
0.60 1.80 0.65
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
CHARACTE- TENSILE STRENGTH AT TENSILE STRENGTH
TENSILE AT 360°C
RISTICS ROOM TEMPERATURE AT 350°C
DEP'D
min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min.
Simulated
stress (1)
relief at 615°C (1) - 20 (1) (1)
for 15 hours 800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
KV 0°C KV -20°C RTNDT
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42  40  28 ** ** **
above
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 - 20 MND 5 X
P295 GH - P355 GH as per

X
NF EN 10028-2
M 1111 X
4) COMMENTS
* Outside high radiation zones. (1) depending on base metal.
** To be determined in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 17
CLASSIFICATION : E 8018
STANDARD : AWS A5.5 PROCESS: Manual arc DATA SHEET
GRADE : Low alloy Mn, TYPE OF PRODUCT: Covered electrode No. S 2820B
Mo, Ni steel*
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de- 0.15 0.80 0.35
       
posited to to to
metal 0.100 0.012 0.015 1.20 0.30 0.03 0.06 0.02
0.60 1.80 0.65
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
TENSILE AT °C
DEP'D
Simulated
stress 550
relief at 615°C 400 - 20 300
for 15 hours 800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42  40  28 * * *
above
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
M 2111 - M 2111 bis X
4) COMMENTS
* To be determined in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification
S 2000 / 18  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : E F 2
STANDARD : AWS A5.23 PROCESS: Submerged arc DATA SHEET
GRADE : Low alloy Mn, TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux wire couple No. S 2830A
Mo, Ni steel*
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding To be determined according to the flux
material
In de- 0.15 0.80 0.35
      
posited to to to
metal 0.100 0.025 0.025 1.50 0.30 0.25 0.04
0.60 1.80 0.65
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
TENSILE AT 360°C
DEP'D
Simulated
stress (1)
relief at 615°C (1) - 20 (1) (1)
for 15 hours 800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42  40  28 ** ** **
above
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 - 20 MND 5 X
M 1111 X
4) COMMENTS
* Outside high radiation zones. (1) depending on base metal
** To be determined in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 19
CLASSIFICATION : E F 2
STANDARD : AWS A5.23 PROCESS: Submerged arc DATA SHEET
GRADE : Low alloy Mn, TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux wire couple No. S 2830B
Mo, Ni steel
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding To be determined according to the flux
material
In de- 0.15 0.80 0.35
       
posited to to to
metal 0.100 0.010 0.015 1.20 0.30 0.03 0.07 0.02
0.60 1.80 0.65
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
TENSILE AT °C
DEP'D
Simulated
stress 550
relief at 615°C 400 - 20 300
for 15 hours 800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42  40  28 * * *
above
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
M 2111 - M 2111 bis X
4) COMMENTS
* To be determined in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification
S 2000 / 20  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : ER 70 S 6 PROCESS: MAG DATA SHEET

STANDARD : AWS A5.18
TYPE OF PRODUCT: Wire No. S 2840
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de-
     0.25(1)
posited
metal 0.15 1.20 2.00 0.025 0.025 0.30(2)
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
CHARACTE- TENSILE STRENGTH AT TENSILE STRENGTH TENSILE STRENGTH
RISTICS ROOM TEMPERATURE AT °C AT °C
DEP'D

Simulated
stress relief
heat treatment
in accordance
with S 2534** see S 2540
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
* *
 60  42 (1)
Same as
above
 40  28 (2)

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
M 1111 X
4) COMMENTS
* To be determined in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification (1) for components class 1
(2) for components outside class 1
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 21
CLASSIFICATION : E 70 T 1 PROCESS: MAG DATA SHEET

TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux-cored wire No. S 2850
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de-  
for for for  for for
posited 0.025(1) 0.25(1)
inf. inf. inf. (2) 0.025 inf. inf.
metal 0.030 0.30(2)
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D

Simulated
stress relief
heat treatment
in accordance
with S 2534** see S 2540
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
* *
 60  42 (1)
Same as
above  40  28 (2)

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
M 1111 X
4) COMMENTS
* To be determined in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification (1) for components class 1
S 2000 / 22  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : E 70 E M 12 K PROCESS: Submerged arc DATA SHEET

TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux wire couple No. S 2860
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In 0.07  0.85   
welding* to 0.35 to 0.025(1) 0.025 0.25(1)
(2)
material 0.15 1.25 0.030 0.30(2)
In de-
for for for   for for
posited inf. inf. inf. 0.025(1) 0.025 inf. inf.
(2)
metal 0.030
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D

Simulated
stress relief
heat treatment
in accordance
with S 2534 see S 2540
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS KV 0°C KV -20°C RTNDT
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND.
mean min. mean min. mean min. mean min.
Same as  60  42 (1)
above  40  28 (2)

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
4) COMMENTS
* Other elements  0.50% (1) for class 1 components
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 23
CLASSIFICATION : ER 70 S PROCESS: TIG

STANDARD : AWS A5.18 DATA SHEET
GRADE : Carbon steel TYPE OF PRODUCT: Wire No. S 2870
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
for for for   for for 
welding inf. inf. inf. 0.030 0.025 inf. inf. 0.30*
material
In de-
posited
metal
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
As above

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
4) COMMENTS
* For cladding
S 2000 / 24  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : E 70 T2
STANDARD : AWS A5.20 PROCESS: MAG DATA SHEET
GRADE : Low alloy Mn, TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux cored wire No. S 2880
Mo, Ni steel*
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de- 0.15 0.80 0.35 
      
posited 0.100 to to 0.025 0.025 1.20 0.30 to 0.10 0.15 0.04
metal 0.60 1.80 0.65
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
RISTICS ROOM TEMPERATURE AT 350°C AT °C
DEP'D
Simulated
stress 550
relief at 615°C 400 - 20 300
for 15 hours 800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42  40  28 ** ** **
above

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
M 2114 X
4) COMMENTS
* Outside high radiation zones.
** To be determined in accordance with the requirements of the equipment specification.
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 25
S 2900 DATA SHEETS FOR STAINLESS STEEL

AND NICKEL BASE ALLOY FILLER MATERIALS
S 2910 TIG WIRE - ER 308 L (W 19 9 L)

S 2915 TIG WIRE - ER 316 L (W 19 12 3 L)
S 2920 COVERED ELECTRODES, E 308 L (E 19 9 L)

S 2925 COVERED ELECTRODES, E 316 L (E 19 12 3 L)
S 2930 COVERED ELECTRODES, E 309 L (E 23 12 L)
S 2940 FLUX WIRE COUPLE, ER 308 L (S 19 9 L)

S 2945 FLUX WIRE COUPLE, ER 316 L (S 19 12 3 L)
S 2950 FLUX WIRE COUPLE, ER 309 L (S 23 12 L)
S 2960 FLUX STRIP ELECTRODE COUPLE, EQ 308 L (S 19 9 L)
S 2970 FLUX STRIP ELECTRODE COUPLE, EQ 309 L (S 23 12 L)
S 2980 TIG WIRE, ER Ni-Cr 3

S 2981 TIG WIRE, ER Ni-Cr-Fe 7
S 2982 TIG WIRE, ER Ni-Cr-Fe 7A
S 2985 COVERED ELECTRODES, E Ni-Cr-Fe 3
S 2986 COVERED ELECTRODES, E Ni-Cr-Fe 7
S 2990 FLUX STRIP ELECTRODE COUPLE, ER Ni-Cr 3

S 2991 FLUX STRIP ELECTRODE COUPLE, EQ Ni-Cr-Fe 7A
S 2995 COVERED ELECTRODES, E 13-4
S 2000 / 26  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : ER 308 L (W 19 9 L)
STANDARD : AWS A5.9 - NF EN 12072 PROCESS: TIG DATA SHEET
GRADE : Austenitic-ferritic TYPE OF PRODUCT: Wire No. S 2910
stainless steel
% Calcu-
Mn Cr Ta
C Si P S Ni Mo Co Cu V Fe N2 lated 
** ** Nb
ferrite
In 1.00 9.00 19.00  5
     for
welding 0.030 0.60 to 0.025 0.020 to to 0.50 0.20 inf. to
material 2.50 11.00 21.50 15*
In de-
posited
metal
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
As welded 520
210 - 30 125
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42
above

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Z 2 CN 18-10 X X X
Z 2 CN 18-10 controlled nitrogen content X X X
Z 3 CN 18-10 X X X
Z 3 CN 20-09 X X X
4) COMMENTS
* Preferred max. 12 %.
** The Cr and Mn contents shall enable the criteria of S 3634 to be met during qualification of the cladding procedure
 n° 144-2014 S 2000 / 27
CLASSIFICATION:ER 316 L (W 19 12 3 L)
STANDARD : AWS A5.9 - NF EN 12072 PROCESS: TIG DATA SHEET
GRADE : Austenitic-ferritic TYPE OF PRODUCT: Wire No. S 2915
stainless steel
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In 1.00 12.00 18.00 2.00  5
   
welding 0.030 0.60 to 0.025 0.020 to to to 0.20 to
material 2.50 14.00 20.00 3.00 15*
In de-
posited
metal
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
RISTICS ROOM TEMPERATURE AT 350°C AT 360°C
DEP'D
As welded 520
210 - 30 140 130
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42
above
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Z 3 CND 17-12 controlled nitrogen content X X X Z 3 CND 19-10 X X X
Z 2 CN 18-10 X X X
Z 2 CN 18-10 controlled nitrogen content X X X
Z 2 CND 17-12 X X X
4) COMMENTS
* Preferred max. 12%.
S 2000 / 28  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : E 308 L (E 19 9 L) PROCESS: Manual arc

STANDARD : AWS A5.4 - NF EN 1600 DATA SHEET
GRADE : Austenitic-ferritic TYPE OF PRODUCT: Covered No. S 2920
stainless steel electrodes
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de-
  **   9.00 18.00   0.20 for 5
posited 0.035 0.90 2.50 0.025 0.025 to to 0.50 pref.max inf. to
metal 12.00 21.00 0.15 15*
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
min
min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min.
.
As welded 520
210 - 30 125
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42
above

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Z 2 CN 18-10 X X
Z 2 CN 18-10 controlled nitrogen content X X
Z 2 CN 20-09 X X
4) COMMENTS
* Preferred max. 12/%.
** For cladding welds, the Mn content is to be limited (see S 3634).
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 29
CLASSIFICATION : E 316 L (E 19 12 3 L)
STANDARD : AWS A5.4 - NF EN 1600 PROCESS: Manual arc DATA SHEET
GRADE : Austenitic-ferritic TYPE OF PRODUCT: Covered electrodes No. S 2925
stainless steel
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de- 12.00 18.00 2.00 5
     for
posited 0.035 0.90 2.50 0.025 0.025 to to to inf. to
metal 14.00 20.00 3.00 15*
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
As welded 520
210 - 30 140 130
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42
above

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Z 2 CND 17-12 X X Z 3 CND 19-10 X X
Z 2 CN 18-10 X X
Z 3 CND 17-12 controlled nitrogen content X X
4) COMMENTS
S 2000 / 30  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : E 309 L (E 23-12 L) PROCESS: Manual arc

GRADE : Austenitic-ferritic TYPE OF PRODUCT: Covered No. S 2930
stainless steel electrodes
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de-
     11.00 22.00   0.20 8
posited 0.030 0.90 2.50 0.025 0.025 to to 0.50 pref.max to
metal 14.00 25.00 0.15 18
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
min
min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min.
.
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 X X P 355 GH as per NF EN 10028-2 X X
M 1111 X X
P 295 GH as per NF EN 10028-2 X X
4) COMMENTS
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 31
CLASSIFICATION: ER 308 L (SA 19 9 L)

STANDARD : AWS A5.9 - NF EN 12072 PROCESS: Submerged arc DATA SHEET
GRADE : Austenitic-ferritic TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux wire couple No. S 2940
stainless steel
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In 1.00 9.00 19.00  5
     for
welding 0.025 0.60 to 0.020 0.020 to to 0.50 0.20 inf. to
material 2.50 11.00 22.00 15*
In de- 1.00 9.00 19.00  5
     for
posited 0.030 1.00 to** 0.025 0.025 to** to 0.50 0.20 inf. to
metal 2.50 11.00 22.00 15*
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
As welded 520
210 - 30 125
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42
above

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Z 2 CN 18-10 X X
Z 3 CN 20-09 X X
4) COMMENTS
* Preferred max. 12 %. % C, S and P are lower in the material because of the

** The Cr and Mn contents shall enable the criteria of S 3634 to be met during amount added by the flux.
qualification of the cladding procedure
S 2000 / 32  n° 144-2014
CLASSIFICATION: ER 316 L (S 19 12 3 L)
stainless steel
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In 1.00 11.00 18.00 2.20 5
   
welding 0.025 0.60 to 0.020 0.020 to to to to
material 2.50 14.00 20.00 3.00 15*
In de- 1.00 11.00 18.00 2.00 5
    for
posited 0.030 1.00 to 0.025 0.025 to to to inf. to
metal 2.50 14.00 20.00 3.00 15*
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
As welded 520
210 - 30 140 130
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42
above

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Z 2 CND 17-12 X X
Z 2 CN 18-10 X X
Z 2 CND 17-12 controlled nitrogen content X X
4) COMMENTS
% C, S and P are lower in the material because of the amount added by the flux.
* Preferred max. 12%.
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 33
CLASSIFICATION: ER 309 L (S 23-12 L)

stainless steel
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In 1.00 11.00 23.00
    
welding 0.025 0.60 to 0.020 0.020 to to 0.50
material 2.50 14.00 25.00
In de- 1.00 11.00 22.00 8
     for
posited 0.030 1.00 to 0.025 0.025 to to 0.50 inf. to
metal 2.50 14.00 25.00 18
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 X X
M 1111 X X
4) COMMENTS
% C, S and P are lower in the material because of the amount added by the flux.
S 2000 / 34  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION: EQ 308 L - (S 19 9 L) PROCESS: Submerged arc

GRADE : Austenitic-ferritic TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux/strip No. S 2960
stainless steel electrode couple
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
     10.00 19.00  0.20
welding 0.020 0.60 2.00 0.025 0.025 to to pref.max
material 12.00 23.00 0.15
In de-
     9.50 19.00  0.20 7
posited 0.030 1.50 2.00 0.025 0.025 to to pref.max to
metal ** 11.50 21.00 0.15 17*
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND.

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Z2 CN 18-10 X
Z2 CND 17-12 X
4) COMMENTS
** Si  1.20 % for 90 mm wide strip.
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 35
CLASSIFICATION : EQ 309 L (S 23 12 L) PROCESS: Submerged arc

GRADE : Austenitic-ferritic TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux/strip No. S 2970
stainless steel electrode couple
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In 11.50 22.00
    
welding 0.025 0.60 2.00 0.025 0.025 to to *
material 14.00 25.00
In de-
     11.50 22.00  12
posited 0.040 1.50 2.00 0.025 0.025 to to 0.50 * to
metal ** 13.50 26.00 22
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
METAL COND.

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 X
P 355 GH as per NF EN 10028-2 X
M 1111 X
4) COMMENTS
* For the vessel. cobalt  0.20 % - preferred max. 0.15 %.
** Si  1.20 % for the 90 mm wide strip.
S 2000 / 36  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : ER Ni Cr3 PROCESS: TIG DATA SHEET

TYPE OF PRODUCT: Wire No. S 2980
GRADE : Nickel-base alloy
% Other Calcu-
Ta
C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo Co Cu Ti Fe ele- lated 
Nb
ments ferrite
In 2.50 18 2.00
    67.00     
welding 0.100 0.50 to 0.020 0.015 min. to 0.10 0.50 0.75 3.00 0.50 to
material 3.50 22.00 3.00
In de-
posited
metal
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
As welded 550
240 - 30 190
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND.
 60  42

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Nickel-base alloy X
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 X X X
M 1111 X
4) COMMENTS
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 37
CLASSIFICATION : ER Ni-Cr-Fe 7 PROCESS: TIG

STANDARD : AWS A5-14 DATA SHEET
GRADE : Nickel-base alloy TYPE OF PRODUCT: Wire No. S 2981
% Other Ta
C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo Co Cu Ti Fe ele- + N2 A1
ments Nb
In 28.00 
        8.00 For   
welding 0.040 0.50 1.00 0.020 0.010 Rem. to 0.50 0.10 0.30 1.00 to inf. 0.10 0.030 1.10
material 31.50 12.00
In de-
posited
metal
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
As welded 550
240 - 30 190
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND. mean min. mean min. mean min. mean min.
Same as  60  42
above
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Nickel-base alloy X
M 4107 - M 4108 - M 4109 X
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 X X X
M 1111 X
Stainless steels X
4) COMMENTS
S 2000 / 38  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : ER Ni-Cr-Fe 7 PROCESS: TIG DATA SHEET

STANDARD : AWS A5-14
TYPE OF PRODUCT: Wire N° S 2982
% Other Ta Al
C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo Co Cu Ti Fe ele- + A1 + B Zr
ments Nb Ti
In 28.00 
        7.00  0.50    
welding 0.040 0.50 1.00 0.015 0.010 Rem to 0.50 0.06 0.30 1.00 to 0.50 to 1.10 1.50 0.005 0.020
material 31.50 11.00 1.00
In de-
posited
metal
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
As welded 550
240 - 30 190
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
Same as
 60  42
above
3) BASE METAL - TYPE OF WELD: 1 = Strength welds and buttering

2 = TIG root pass and seal welds
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 - 20 MND 5 X X X
4) COMMENTS
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 39
CLASSIFICATION : E Ni Cr Fe 3 PROCESS: Manual arc

GRADE : Nickel-base alloy TYPE OF PRODUCT: Covered electrodes No. S 2985
% Other Ta Calcu-
C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo Co Cu Ti Fe ele- + lated 
ments Nb ferrite
In
welding
material
 1.00
In de- 1.00 5.00 to
 pref to   59.00 13.00
to    6.00 
to 0.50 2.50
posited 0.100 max. 0.020 0.015 min. 17.00 0.10 0.50 1.00 10.00 pref
metal 9.50 min.
0.60 1.80
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
As welded 550
250 - 30 190
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42
above
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Nickel-base alloy X X
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 X X
Stainless steels X
4) COMMENTS
S 2000 / 40  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : E Ni-Cr-Fe 7 PROCESS: Manual arc DATA SHEET

STANDARD : AWS A5-11
TYPE OF PRODUCT: Covered electrodes No. S 2986
% Other Ta
C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo Co Cu Ti Fe ele- + N2 A1
ments Nb
In
welding
material
In de- 28.00 
        8.00 For 1.20 For For
posited 0.045 0.65 5.00 0.020 0.010 Rem. to 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.50 to inf. to inf. inf.
metal 31.50 12.00 2.20
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
As welded 550
240 to 30 190
800
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND.
Same as  60  42
above

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Nickel-base alloy X X
M 4107 - M 4108 - M 4109 X X
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 X X
Stainless steels X
4) COMMENTS
 n° 140-2013 S 2000 / 41
CLASSIFICATION : ER Ni Cr 3 PROCESS: Submerged arc

DATA SHEET
STANDARD : AWS A5-14 TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux/strip
No. S 2990
GRADE : Nickel-base alloy electrode couple
% Other Ta Calcu-
C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo Co Cu Ti Fe ele- + lated 
ments Nb ferrite
In 2.50
  to   67.00 18.00
to      2.30
to
welding 0.10 0.25 0.010 0.015 min. 22.00 0.10 0.50 0.75 3.00 0.50
material 3.50 3.00

In de- 0.60
for pref for   for for for for  2.00
posited inf. inf. 0.020 0.015 inf. inf. inf. inf. 10.00 min.
metal max.
0.40
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND.

3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 X
4) COMMENTS
S 2000 / 42  n° 137-2012
CLASSIFICATION : EQ Ni-Cr-Fe 7A PROCESS: Submerged arc

TYPE OF PRODUCT: Flux/strip electrode
GRADE : Nickel-base alloy No. S 2991
couple
% Other Ta Al
C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo Co Cu Ti Fe ele- + A1 + B Zr
ments Nb Ti
In
28.00 7.00 0.50
weldin              
0.040 0.50 1.00 0.015 0.010
Rem. to
0.50 0.06 0.30 1.00
to
0.50
to
1.10 1.50 0.005 0.020
gmater 31.50 11.00 1.00
ial
1.00
In de- to
28.00
  2.50   for  for  7.00 1.00
   
posited 0.040 0.40 pref 0.015 0.010 Rem. to inf. 0.06 inf. 0.10 to to
0.10 1.50 0.005 0.020
metal 31.50 11.00 3.00
max.
2.00
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
Rp0.2 Rm A Z Rp0.2 Rm A Z Rp0.2 Rm A Z
METAL COND
b) TENACITE
CHARACTE- KV room
RISTICS temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
METAL COND Moy. min. Moy. min. Moy. min. Moy. min.
3) BASE METAL - TYPE OF WELD 1 = Strength welds and buttering

2 = TIG root pass and seal welds
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
16 MND 5 - 18 MND 5 - 20 MND 5 X
4) COMMENTS
 n° 137-2012 S 2000 / 43
CLASSIFICATION : E 13-4 PROCESS: Manual

STANDARD : NF EN 1600 DATA SHEET
GRADE : 13-4 TYPE OF PRODUCT: Covered electrodes No. S 2995
% Calcu-
Ta
Nb
ferrite
In
welding
material
In de- 3.00 11.50 0.4
    
posited 0.060 1.00 1.50 0.030 0.025 to to to
metal 5.00 14.50 1.0
a) TENSILE STRENGTH
DEP'D
min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min. min.
Stress relieving
heat treatment
at 600°C for 600 800 15
3 hours
Other treatments cf. S 2534
b) IMPACT STRENGTH
CHARACTE- KV room
temperature
J J J J °C
DEP'D
Stress relieving
heat treatment
 40  28
at 600°C for
3 hours
Other treatments cf. S 2534
3 = Cladding
WELD WELD
1 2 3 1 2 3
Z 6 CND 13-4 X
Z 12 C13 X
4) COMMENTS
S 2000 / 44  n° 137-2012
S 3000
WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
S 3100 GENERAL
S 3110 SCOPE
This chapter specifies the requirements to be satisfied for the approval of a welding procedure
specification by welding procedure tests as defined in standard NF EN ISO 15609-1. It defines the
conditions for the execution of welding procedure approval tests and the limits of validity of an
approved electric arc welding procedure.
The provisions of S 3120 to 3160 apply to all the welding procedures covered in this chapter.
The subchapter S 3200 “General case” covers butt-welding of plates, tubes and pipes, angle welds
and branch connections. It applies to all grades of steel and all nickel-base alloys.
For arc welding of steels, the requirements of this chapter ensure conformance with standard
NF EN ISO 15614-1.
The requirements for special cases are specified in subchapters S 3300 to S 3800.
The numbers in the list of processes, where incorporated, are shown in brackets.
S 3120 REPAIR BY WELDING OF PRODUCTION WELDS

The welding procedures used for these repairs shall be qualified in accordance with S 3110.
In some special cases, however, the weld repairs must be simulated on the welding procedure
qualification test piece (or, failing this, on a production test piece) or must be proved by appropriate
tests. Such cases include especially the following:
- the repair of austenitic stainless steel or nickel base alloy cladding, buttering or welds on carbon
or low alloy steel base metal.
- the repair of tube to heat exchanger or steam generator tube plate welds,
- repairs carried out by another welding process to welds made by the MAG (135) and flux cored
wire (136 or 114) processes,
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 1
- repairs to Canopy welds,

- repairs to plasma arc welds with or without filler material (15).
S 3130 DOCUMENTS TO BE ESTABLISHED

Every welding procedure qualification shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions set out
in a properly identified set of documents which must comply with the requirements of the relevant
paragraphs and which shall comprise at least the following:
- the p-WPS (preliminary Welding Procedure Specification),
- the range of approval of the qualification,
- the tests to be carried out and the associated criteria in relation to the qualification level,
- the basic sketch for the removal of test specimens,
- bead or sequence distribution and the welding process used for each bead,
S 3140 QUALIFICATION TESTS

The preparation, execution and testing of the test piece must take account of the conditions to be
applied to the preparation, execution and testing of production welds.
S 3141 NUMBER AND TYPE OF TEST PIECES

The number and type of test pieces for welding procedure approval and the tests to be carried out
depend on the welding operation to be performed and are determined by:
- the essential variables governing the range of approval of the qualifications,
- the working conditions: where access is especially difficult, this fact must be taken into account
in the performance of the welding procedure test and in the conditions applied to the non-
destructive examination of the qualification test piece.
S 3142 DIMENSIONS
The dimensions of the qualification coupon shall be determined in accordance with:
- the welding process,
- the plan for the removal of specimens for tests and retests,
- the non-destructive examinations to be performed,
- if necessary, the qualification of a welding procedure for repairs.
In any event, the width of each part (or of each section of tube) to be welded must not be less than
150 mm and 2 e (where e is the thickness of the test coupon).
S 3000 / 2  n° 137-2012
S 3143 ACCEPTANCE OF BASE METALS AND FILLER MATERIALS

The filler materials used for qualification shall be acceptance-tested in accordance with S 2000.
The base metal shall have undergone an acceptance test to establish the characteristics necessary for
the application of this chapter. It is not necessary that it should have been procured in accordance
with SECTION II of this Code.
The acceptance test reports relating to these materials (base metal and filler materials) must be
available before the start of welding operations on the test piece. The same applies to the welding
product qualification data sheet issued by the product Supplier for the products covered by S 5000.
These documents shall be submitted to the Inspector at his request.
However, the lot of filler materials used for the qualification testing of cladding procedures is
exempted from acceptance tests to the extent that the welding conditions, the test series to be
performed and the results to be obtained satisfy the requirements of the acceptance test
specifications.
S 3144 POSITION AND DIRECTION OF WELDING

The basic welding positions are defined in standard NF EN 287-1.
S 3150 REPORTS
The results of welding procedure qualification tests shall be made available to the Inspector and
shall be submitted to him at his request. The results shall be contained in a report which shall
describe:
- the essential conditions (both specified and actual) governing the execution of weld on the
test piece,
- the non-destructive examinations performed and the results obtained,
- the destructive tests carried out, together with the required values and the results obtained,
- the base metal and filler materials acceptance reports stipulated in S 3143.
S 3160 VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION

The welding procedure qualification is valid for an unlimited time on condition that it is not
invalidated by the requirements of S 7610 and S 7830.
However, for welds listed in B 4231 and C 4231, a demonstration that the level of skill has been
maintained shall be provided in accordance with the requirements defined in S 6232.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 3
S 3200 GENERAL CASES
The welding procedure test shall be performed in conformance with all the requirements of standard
NF EN ISO 15614-1, by means of compliance with the provisions set out below which explain or
complete those in the standard. Unless otherwise indicated, the numbering of paragraphs reflects
that of the standard.
Para. 6 TEST PIECE

Para. 6.1 GENERAL
a) Base metal and filler materials
In the case of rolled or forged products, the main direction of forging ratio must be identified and
orientated in such a manner that the direction in which KV impact test specimens in the heat
affected zones are taken is representative of that used for the procurement of these products to
the provision that:
- where both directions (longitudinal and transverse) are used for sampling product supplies,
the transverse direction shall be used,
- for pipes, the direction may be different, where technical feasibility imposes this, provided
that impact tests are performed in the same direction in the base metal of the test piece.
b) Type of groove
Where production grooves are to be prepared by heat preparation (oxygen or plasma cutting,
gouging) the requirements of F 3300 d shall be met.
Grooves shall be subjected to the same examinations and tests prior to welding as those required
in fabrication.
c) Postweld heat treatment

c1) Simulated stress relieving heat treatment
With the exception of the sampling area for the corrosion tests, to be performed without
stress relieving heat treatment, if the latter are specified (stainless steels with a carbon
content greater than 0.035%), the heat treatment shall be applied to the entire test piece.
Once the weld has been performed (including post-heating, if any) the test piece shall be
subjected to a heat treatment simulating all the stress relieving heat treatments applied in
production to the welds covered by the qualification.
Simulated stress relieving heat treatment conditions shall be as specified for fabrication
(holding temperature range, heating and cooling rates above the initial temperature when
furnace loading). When a production weld is subjected to successive stress relieving heat
treatments at different holding temperatures, the corresponding qualification weld shall be
treated at each of these temperatures.
S 3000 / 4  n° 137-2012
For each holding temperature, the holding time for simulated stress relieving heat treatment
shall always be greater than 80% of the total duration of holding times in fabrication.
Provision shall be made for manufacturing variables.
However, a simulated heat treatment at several holding temperatures (corresponding to
several intermediate stress relieving heat treatments followed by a final stress relieving heat
treatment at a higher holding temperature) which is representative of actual manufacturing
conditions, may be considered to cover a heat treatment comprising a smaller number of
holding temperatures, on condition that:
- the final holding temperature of the heat treatment to be covered is the final holding
temperature of the simulated heat treatment, the latter temperature having a nominal value
at least 25°C greater than all other heat treatments,
- the rules for holding times listed above are respected for each holding temperature.
Simulated stress relieving heat treatment conditions shall be specified in the documents
defining the welding procedure qualification.
The treatment may, by agreement, be carried out in a single cycle. The Manufacturer shall be
able to justify simulated heat treatment parameters.
If the effect of the duration of stress-relieving heat treatment has been characterized for the
base material (material weldability file, see paragraph S 1200) and for filler materials
(qualification record as per S 5000), a stress-relieving heat treatment, the duration of which
is calculated on the basis of the thickness of the test piece, may be proposed.
Temperature cycles shall be recorded.
c2) Other heat treatments
The test piece shall be subjected to the same thermal cycles as those corresponding to the
heat treatments performed on production joints. For the purposes of paragraph c2), only
solution heat treatment or precipitation treatment for the case of austenitic alloys or
austenitic stainless steels, and only quenching, normalizing and tempering treatments for the
other cases, shall be taken into account.
Para. 6.3 WELDING OF TEST PIECES

a) Preheating, interpass and postheating temperatures
At the start of welding of the test piece, the measured preheating temperature shall not exceed the
nominal temperature specified in the p-WPS (preliminary Welding Procedure Specification). The
preheating temperature, over at least half the thickness of the weld, shall be held as close as
possible to the specified minimum temperature (for example, when holding the temperature to
below the specified minimum temperature + 25°C, the deviation may be up to 40°C if the time
for cooling the coupon between passes is too long).
After completing half the joint, a welding sequence at a higher temperature may be performed, in
order to reach and measure the nominal interpass temperature.
The postheating temperature reached during the qualification test shall be held as close as
possible to the specified minimum value.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 5
b) Welding conditions
In the course of the qualification test, periodic measurements shall be made of:
- parameters U, I and v (v = speed). In the case of process 111, these readings may be
supplemented by a measurement of the bead length deposited per unit length of electrode.
Para. 7 EXAMINATION AND TESTING

Para. 7.1 EXTENT OF TESTING
a) Non-destructive examinations
The qualification coupon shall also be subjected to all the non-destructive examinations specified
for the manufacture of the joints qualified by it and the coupon shall also comply with the Class 1
requirements set out in S 7700.
b) Destructive tests
The following provisions supplement those of standard NF EN ISO 15614-1 for butt welded
coupons. In the case of representative coupons, only paragraphs b3) "Metallographic
examinations" and b4) "Hardness measurements" shall apply.
b1) Definition of the mechanical properties and the sampling method
The type of test specimens to be sampled and the methods for performing tests are given in
tables S 3201 and S 3202 below. These tables incorporate and clarify the requirements of
table 1 in standard NF EN ISO 15614-1.
b2) Chemical analysis

- a sample for chemical analysis shall be taken in a zone outside the dilution area. In
addition, chemical analysis shall be performed for each process used in combination,
except for TIG root passes,
- if the thickness of the test piece makes it impossible to perform analysis in a zone outside
the dilution area, the analysis shall be performed on a separate deposit of sufficient
thickness,
- where a longitudinal tensile test is required the sample shall be taken from the end
extension of a tensile specimen chosen so as not to lie within the dilution zone.
The quantities of all elements analyzed during acceptance tests of filler materials shall be
determined.
b3) Metallographic examination

These are performed in accordance with Annex SI 400 on a complete transverse section of
the weld.
In the case of pipe welds, the section examined shall preferably lie in the overlap zone.
b4) Hardness measurements

These measurements are also required for sub-group 1-1 steels.
S 3000 / 6  n° 137-2012
b5) Determination of the delta ferrite content

The delta ferrite content of the deposited metal is determined only for austenitic or austenic-
ferritic stainless steels (group 8). The content is determined in accordance with the modified
SCHAEFFLER diagram (DELONG, see figure S 2500.2).
A magnetic saturation method or direct magnetic measurement method may be performed

(the apparatus having been calibrated beforehand) prior to heat treatment.
b6) Intergranular corrosion test in the deposited metal

The corrosion test of the deposited metal for austenitic or austenic-ferritic stainless steels
shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Annex SI 600.
However, these tests are not required if the carbon content is  0.035% and if the chromium
content is  18%.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 7
TABLE S 3201.a
MECHANICAL TESTS TO BE PERFORMED FOR WELDING

PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION, IN THE DEPOSITED METAL
Groups 8
Materials All Groups All Groups except Group 8 and nickel base alloy and nickel-
base alloy
1 (pressure 1 (pressure
1,(2 & 3 if
Component 1 (core resisting resisting
1, 2 and 3 required C 1, 2 et 3 1, 2 and 3
Class area only) joint) joint)
or D 2200)
(3) (3)
Type Impact test
Longitudinal tensile tests KV for Pellini for
of KV impact test (7) (7)
(8) RTNDT RTNDT
test KV
0°C
Temperature Room High (1) (3) (3) Room
- 20°C (2)
Procedure SI 120 SI 312 SI 331 SI 332 SI 332 SI 312
Energy Energy Energy
Measure- Rm, Re0,2, Re0,2, Rm Lateral Fibrosity Lateral Fracture or
Energy
ment A%, Z A%, Z expansion transition expansion not
% fibrosity curve % fibrosity
Sampling
SI 121 SI 312 SI 331 SI 332 SI 332 SI 312
conditions
Area (6)
P R A P P R A SI 331 SI 332 SI 332 P R A
table S 3202 (5)
Number of
samples per
1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 SI 332 SI 332 3 3 3
test
temperature
(1): in addition, at least 3 temperatures other than 0°C and -20°C, selected to find a test specimen of 10% fibrosity and
a test specimen of 100% fibrosity
(2): reactor pressure vessel only
(3): as required by the equipment specification
(4): not applicable
(5): for information
(6): depending on the thickness, the sampling areas (P, R, A) shall be distributed to comply with the positioning
specified in figures 5 and 6 of standard NF EN ISO 15614-1.
(7): the tests shall only be required for thicknesses ≥ 12 mm
(8): test to be performed for thicknesses  15 mm. For cylindrical butt welds, if the thickness and the outside diameter
can provide the necessary samples.
S 3000 / 8  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 3201.b
MECHANICAL TESTS TO BE PERFORMED FOR WELDING

PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION, IN THE HAZ
Groups 8 and
All Groups except Group
Materials All Groups nickel-base
8 and nickel base alloy
alloy
Component 1, 2 and 3 1 (core
1, 2 and 3 1, 2 and 3 1, 2 and 3 1, 2 and 3 1, 2 and 3 (5)
Class (5) area only)
Type Trans-
Root Face Side
of verse KV impact (8) KV impact (8)
bend (9) bend (9) bend (7)
test tensile
0°C
Temperature Room Room Room Room (1) Room
- 20°C (2)
Procedure SI 110 SI 220 SI 220 SI 220 SI 322 SI 331 SI 322
Energy Energy
Rm
Measure- Lateral Fibrosity
location Energy
ment expansion transition
of break
% fibrosity curve
Sampling
SI 111 SI 211 SI 211 SI 213 SI 322 (3) SI 331 SI 322 (4)
conditions
Area (6) Through Internal External Through R

P SI 331 P R (10)
table S 3202 thickness skin skin thickness (10)
Number of
samples per
2 2 2 4 3 3 SI 331 3 3
test
temperature
(1): in addition, at least 3 temperatures other than 0°C and -20°C, selected to find a test specimen of 10% fibrosity and
a test specimen of 100% fibrosity
(2): reactor pressure vessel only
(3): in addition to the requirements of standard NF EN ISO 15614-1, for class 1 components in MnMoNi quenched and
tempered steels, additional test specimens shall taken with a notch at 4mm from the fusion line.
(4): notch at 1 mm from the fusion line.
(5): test to be repeated in the base metal for information, if not diposal
(6): depending on the thickness, the sampling areas (P, R, A) shall be distributed to comply with the positioning
specified in figures 5 and 6 of standard NF EN ISO 15614-1
(7): for thicknesses >20 mm only
(8): the tests shall only be required for thicknesses ≥ 12 mm
(9): for thicknesses  20 mm only
(10): for thicknesses >30 mm only.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 9
TABLE S 3202
TEST SPECIMEN SAMPLING AREAS
POSITIONING IN THE THICKNESS
WELDING OF ONE SIDE ONLY SAMPLING AREA WELDING OF BOTH SIDES
t = THICKNESS OF QUALIFICATION TEST PIECE
Note : the sampling areas (P on the skin, R at the root, A additional) shall be distributed to comply with the
location specified in figures 5 and 6 of standard NF EN ISO 15614-1.
(1) A is located at quarter thickness
S 3000 / 10  n° 137-2012
Para. 7.2 LOCATION AND TAKING OF TEST SPECIMENS

For orbital welding, the sampling pattern defined in figure 6 shall be repeated to characterize both
welding directions as required by paragraph 7.4, except in the case of product analysis.
Para. 7.4 DESTRUCTIVE TESTING

Para. 7.4.3 Bend tests
The diameter of the stamp or the rollers is specified in MC 1263
Defects located in the angles of the test specimen shall be taken into consideration.
Para. 7.4.4 Macrographic and micrographic examinations

In addition, the micrographic and macrographic criteria specified in SI 400 shall be satisfied.
Para. 7.4.5 Impact testing

a) For steels in groups 1 to 6
a1) In the deposited metal
- For class 1 components, the results of each series of tests (3 test specimens) shall satisfy the
following requirements:
at 0°C . 60 J minimum average value,
. 42 J minimum individual value (only one result may be below the guaranteed
mean value),
in addition and when stipulated in subsection B 4230
at -20°C . 40 J minimum average value,

mean value).
- For class 2 and 3 components, the results of each series of tests (3 test specimens) shall
satisfy the following requirements at 0°C:
. 40 J minimum average value,
mean value).
a2) In the HAZ

As a general rule, the tests shall be performed at 0°C. The minimum specified values shall be
at least equal to those specified for the base metal concerned.
If the tests are performed at -20°C, the results of each series (3 test specimens) shall satisfy
the following requirements:
. 40 J minimum average value,
. 28 J minimum individual value (only one result may be below the guaranteed mean
value).
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 11
b) For steels in group 7

The minimum specified values in the deposited metal and the HAZ shall be equal to those
specified for the base metal.
c) For steels in group 8 and nickel-base alloys

- The results of each series of tests (3 test specimens) in the deposited metal and the HAZ shall
satisfy the following requirements at room temperature:
KV : 60 J minimum average value, for steels in group 8 and for nickel-base alloys, and
42 J minimum individual value.
This value of 60 J can be reduced to 50 J for welding steels in group 8 subjected to stress
relieving heat treatment.
Para. 7.4.6 Hardness testing

Table 2 is modified and supplemented by the following values:
- GROUP 3 : The maximum permissible value is 380 HV for welds not subject to heat treatment
and 320 HV for multi-pass welds subjected to heat treatment.
- GROUP 7 : The maximum permissible value is 350 HV for coupons subjected to heat
treatment, for steels of specified maximum tensile strength 900 MPa or less.
Para. 7.4.7 Longitudinal tensile tests of the deposited metal (paragraph added in relation
to the standard)
In addition to the provisions in the standard, which do not impose any special requirements,
compliance with the following is required:
a) At room temperature
The tensile strength and the yield strength shall be at least equal to those specified for the base
metal. Where base metals are joined for which different minimum values are specified for these
two characteristics, the values to be guaranteed shall be the lower of the two for each of the
characteristics.
a1) Special case of materials in groups 1 to 6

The tensile strength of the deposited metal shall not exceed 800 MPa.
Elongations shall be at least 20% and the reduction in area shall be recorded for information.
In any event, the following expression shall be satisfied:
Rm × A  10500
where Rm signifies the ultimate tensile strength MPa and A the elongation expressed as a
percentage over a gauge length equal to 5 times the diameter.
a2) Special case of materials in group 8

The tensile strength of the deposited metal shall not exceed 800 MPa. Elongation after
fracture shall be at least 25% and the reduction in area shall be recorded for information.
S 3000 / 12  n° 137-2012
a3) Special case of nickel-base alloys

The tensile strength of the deposited metal shall not exceed 800 MPa. Elongation shall be at
least 30% and the reduction in area shall be recorded for information.
b) At high temperature
The minimum guaranteed value of the yield strength corresponds to the minimum value specified
for the base metal.
The tensile strength value is taken for information purpose.
Where base metals with different minimum specified values are welded together, the value to be
guaranteed shall be the lesser of the two.
Para. 7.4.8 Chemical analysis (paragraph added in relation to the standard)

The required results are those defined in the acceptance specification (as stated in S 2120).
Para. 7.4.9 Delta ferrite content (paragraph added in relation to the standard)
When required, the delta ferrite content shall lie between 5% and 15% (preferably not exceeding
12% max.) by reference to the modified SCHAEFFLER diagram DELONG.
In case of doubt, an additional test by direct magnetic measurement may be performed (the
apparatus having been calibrated beforehand). The results obtained shall lie between 3% and 15%.
Para. 7.4.10 Intergranular corrosion test (paragraph added in relation to the standard)
When required, this test shall produce satisfactory results in conformance with MC 1313.
Para. 7.6 RETESTING PROCEDURES

Where an unsatisfactory result is due to the poor execution of the test or to the presence of a defect
in the specimen, the relevant result must be disregarded and the test shall be repeated.
Retesting is only allowed for impact tests.
Para. 8 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION

Para. 8.2 RELATED TO THE MANUFACTURER
The qualification tests shall be performed in the same workshop as the production welds, subject to
the provisions of chapter S 6000.
Para. 8.3 RELATED TO THE PARENT MATERIAL

Para. 8.3.1 Base metal grouping system
Products of the same grade but produced by different steelmaking or manufacturing processes
(forging, rolling, casting, etc.) are accepted as equivalent. However, in the case of cast products,
every effort shall be made to perform the qualification tests on the cast product.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 13
Para. 8.3.1.1 Steels
For group 1 steels, a welding procedure is qualified for all steels having a yield strength less than or
equal to the minimum specified yield strength of the qualification weld base metal. The yield
strength to be considered in determining the range of qualification is taken from the symbolic name
of the grade (e.g. for grade P265GH, a yield strength of 265 MPa shall be considered regardless of
the weld thickness).
Low-alloy manganese-molybdenum-nickel steels (of types 16MND5, 18MND5 and 20MND5) form
part of group 3.
In the case of group 8 steels, any increase in the maximum specified content of boron, niobium or
titanium invalidates the qualification of the welding procedure. In addition, group 8 steels having a
nitrogen content greater than 0.11% shall be qualified using a base metal with identical specified
nitrogen content.
In the case of a qualification test piece of two base metals (from the same group) considered to be
non-equivalent, the procedure may be qualified on a basis of a test piece made from the two base
metals provided that each line of fusion has been individually characterized.
Para. 8.3.1.2 Nickel-base alloys
The qualification is only valid for the alloy grades used in the tests.
Para. 8.3.2.2 Range of qualification of full penetration butt welds, T-welds, branch
connection and fillet welds
Table 5 is supplemented as follows:
For multi-pass welding, the thickness welded during manufacture shall not exceed:
- 1.33 t for thickness of base metal greater than 200 mm,
- 1,1 t for gas-shielded processes (131, 135, 136, 137) with a short-circuit supply,
- For groups 1 and 3 steels, 1.1 t when a heat treatment exceeding the critical temperature
(normalising, or heat treatment for mechanical properties) is performed on the welded joint.
However, in the case of homogeneous repair and surfacing welds, the lower limit is reduced to:
- 16 mm if t > 200 mm,
- 5 mm if t  200 mm.
For repairs and surfacing welds on thicknesses less than the aforementioned values, a test performed
with the minimum thickness is required for the extension of the qualification.
In the case of multi-process welding in which each process involves multiple passes, only the
maximum thickness "2t" shall be taken into account in the range of qualification of the
deposited metal.
Table 6 is supplemented as follows :

Regarding the qualification weld thickness "t", the limits 3 < t <30 mm and t ≥ 30 mm are replaced
respectively by 3 < t <50 mm and t ≥ 50 mm.
S 3000 / 14  n° 137-2012
Para. 8.3.2.3 Range of qualification of the diameters of pipes and branch connections
The rules in this paragraph relating to pipes also apply to girth welds and cylindrical shells.
In application of B 4231, the equivalence between plates and tubes stated in the standard does not
apply to reactor coolant piping.
Para. 8.4 COMMON TO ALL WELDING PROCEDURES

Para. 8.4.1 Welding processes
Use of a procedure deleting the use of a process specified in the welding procedure specification for
root passes (TIG, etc.) is authorized, in the case of welds which are not fully penetrated and in the
case where root passes are deleted.
Para. 8.4.3 Type of joint

Moreover:
a) a qualification executed with deletion of root passes does not allow production welding of full
penetration welded joints without deletion of root passes.
b) groove shape obtained by thermal means (oxy-gas cutting, possibly with grinding) covers
mechanical processes but the reverse does not apply.
Table S 3203 a) relates to the qualification of butt welds, T-joints and fillet welds.
Table S 3203 b) relates to qualification of nozzle welding and branch connection.
 n° 140-2013 S 3000 / 15
Para. 8.4.5 Filler material, make (manufacturer and trade name)

The welding procedure is only approved for the use of covered electrodes, flux or flux cored wires
of the same trade name, and for filler metal (wire, rod, etc) of the same standard name as that used
for the qualification test piece. However, a new qualification is not required where use is made of
another filler material with the same symbol (all types of flux, flux-core for wires or electrode
covering) and conforming to the same procurement specification, provided that this has been
qualified in accordance with the provisions of S 5000.
Para. 8.4.6 Filler material dimensions

The welding procedure is only approved for the use of filler materials with exactly the same
geometrical characteristics as the materials used for the qualification test piece. However, for
manual TIG (141) or covered electrode processes (111), qualification performed using a filler
material with a given nominal diameter o also covers immediately adjacent nominal diameters (as
per standard NF EN ISO 544), except for the root pass executed on an assembly welded on one side
only with no backing, for which no size change is permissible.
Para. 8.4.7 Type of current

The qualification is also limited to the amperage ranges specified in the qualification test or in the
qualification data sheet as described in S 5000 (in the event of electrodes of different diameter being
used).
Para 8.4.8 Heat input

Tables S3204 a) and b) show the range of validity for heat input depending on the type of
production assembly and group of materials.
The "Heat input" variable does not have to be considered for short duration welds or welding
sequences for which the variables used to calculate the heat input, particularly the welding speeds,
are not measurable with certainty (e.g. tack welds, bolt stops).
Para. 8.4.12 Post weld heat treatment

The welding procedure qualification shall be invalidated if heat treatment performed immediately
after welding during qualification (without return to room temperature) is postponed for
production welds.
Qualification of the welding procedure is also invalidated in the event of stress-relieving heat
treatment applied to production welds:
- if there is any modification of the specified upward and downward rates of temperature (heating
and cooling rates above the initial furnace temperature),
S 3000 / 16  n° 140-2013
TABLE S 3203 a)
Type of assembly for the qualification of butt welds,
T- joints and fillet welds
 n° 140-2013 S 3000 / 16 a
TABLE S 3203 a) (cont.)

Type of assembly for the qualification of butt welds,
T- joints and fillet welds
S 3000 / 16 b  n° 140-2013
TABLE S 3203 b)
Type of assembly for the qualification of branch connection
 n° 140-2013 S 3000 / 16 c
TABLE S 3203 b) (cont.)

Type of assembly for the qualification of branch connection
S 3000 / 16 d  n° 140-2013
TABLE S 3204 a)
Range of approval of heat input
Case of assemblies of butt welds, T- joints and fillet welds
 n° 140-2013 S 3000 / 16 e
TABLE S 3204 b)
Range of approval of heat input
Case of branches
S 3000 / 16 f  n° 140-2013
- if there is an increase in the duration of the treatment which invalidates the representativeness of
the simulated heat treatment applied to the joints used for qualification as defined in para 6.1 c1).
The qualified temperature range must also take into account the simulated stress-relieving heat
treatment adopted for production parts procurement (M151.2).
Qualification of the welding procedure is invalidated if there is any modification of the temperature
cycles for heat treatment performed after welding, other than stress-relieving heat treatment, which
are capable of affecting the final metallurgical conditions of the product (normalization, quenching,
solution heat treatment, etc).
Para. 8.4.14 Welding technique (paragraph added in relation to the standard)

Changes invalidating approval of the welding procedure:
- change from a spray, droplet or pulsed arc to a short-circuit arc, or vice-versa,
- modification of the width, frequency or dwell time of oscillation, for automatic processes,
- change in the trade designation of the welding automation equipment,
- change in the nominal chemical composition of the gas or gaseous mixture, for face and root
protection,
- reduction, during manufacture, by 10% or more of the front shield gas flow in relation to the
minimum specified value,
- change from a single-electrode to a multiple-electrode process and vice-versa.
Para. 8.5.3 Process 141

The welding procedure ceases to be approved if one of the following modifications is made:
- introduction or elimination of filler material,
- modification of the specified chemical composition of a consumable insert,
- modification of the profile in the cross-section of the consumable insert.
Para. 8.5.4 Process 15

The welding procedure is qualified only for the ranges specified in the p-WPDS (preliminary
Welding Procedure Specification) for the distance between the edges to be welded.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 17
S 3300 SIMULATED REPAIRS BY WELDING
In the cases covered by S 3120, a simulated repair by welding shall be performed in accordance
with the requirements of S 3200 and taking into account the following remarks:
- One qualification shall be required for each welding procedure used in making the repair. This
qualification is valid only for the process (111, 121, 141,…) used for the weld to be repaired.
If the repair welding procedure has been qualified in accordance with S 3200 then one
qualification shall be only required per welding process used in making the repair.
If a welding procedure which been qualified in accordance with S 3200 is used with the same
process as the weld to be repaired then no repair qualification is required,
- Over the coupon length defined in the descriptive documents 50% of the thickness of the
qualification test piece shall be removed so that the edges of the site to be filled encompass both
the non-heat-affected base metal and the deposited metal.
The following tests shall be performed:

- non-destructive examination of the repair,
- a tensile test of the deposited metal performed on a cylindrical test specimen at room
temperature and at high temperature as stipulated in Annex S I 120,
- a series of tensile tests at room temperature, across the weld and covering the entire thickness
which has been repaired,
- a series of side bend tests covering the entire repaired thickness in the case of welds with a
thickness of 20 mm or more,
- a determination of the energy absorbed by breakage KV of the newly deposited metal as
stipulated in Table S 3201 a.
If the repaired depth is less than 10 mm, the notch shall be parallel to the skin so that the newly
deposited metal is located under the notch.
- a metallographic examination (see Annex S I),
- a chemical analysis of deposited metal,
- hardness measurements.
S 3400 STEEL CAST PARTS REPAIRS BY WELDING
S 3410 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION

S 3411 WORKSHOP
Provisions to be applied are those of paragraph 8.2 of the standard supplemented by S 3200.
S 3000 / 18  n° 137-2012
S 3412 BASE METAL: GRADE

Provisions to be applied are those of paragraph 8.3.1 of the standard supplemented by S 3200 ;
however, the qualification shall be carried out on the cast product.
S 3413 BASE METAL: SHAPE - DIMENSIONS

a) The multilayer repair welding procedure is qualified on the basis of a sample into which has
been machined a recess of the shape and size defined in figure S 3413.1.
 = angle to be defined according to welding position and the shape of the selected excavation cavity.
However,whenever technically feasible, an angle of 30° ± 5° shall be adopted.
h = 0.6 x H (with a minimum of 30 mm).
r  10 mm.
H = represents the maximum thickness to be repaired (the thickness of those parts of the whole specimen
subjected to pressure, excluding the flanges, shall be taken as reference values).
a  15 mm.
The welded length L over the entire thickness shall be capable of providing required test specimens (in principle
L  500 mm).
FIGURE S 3413.1
SAMPLE FOR REPAIR WELDING PROCEDURE

QUALIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS
Where difficulties are encountered in procuring thick plates, or in the case of repairs to thin-
walled parts, qualification may be performed using butt-welded test pieces, in which plate
thickness E shall be at least equal to 15 mm.
b) In the case of parts with walls subjected to internal pressure and whose thickness (excluding the
flanges) is 100 mm or more, the thickness H of the test piece shall not be less than 100 mm.
c) In the case of parts with walls subjected to internal pressure and whose thickness (excluding the
flanges) is less than 100 mm, the thickness H of the sample shall be between 50 and 100 mm
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 19
d) In the case of parts which are not subjected to pressure, approval may proceed on the basis of a
sample with a minimum thickness H of 50 mm.
e) A multilayer welding procedure qualification covers all repairs with a thickness of 1.5 h or less
(h being defined in figure S 3413.1) or 1.5 E in the case of the butt-welded joint
f) If, during machining of the component, the removal of a defect involves superficial removal of
metal, as defined in the figure M 366.3b) and located in an area requiring a welding repair, the
welding procedure qualification tests may be limited to:
- liquid penetrant examination of the weld after surface has been ground level,
- metallographic examination of a complete cross-section of the weld,
- a series of hardness measurements: such measurements are not carried out in the case of
austenitic-ferritic stainless steels,
- a face bend test; the thickness of the test specimen shall be equal to the thickness h + 5 mm
minimum, and its width shall comply with MC 1263 A. The excavation of the metal shall lie
on the longitudinal axis of the test specimen,
- the test piece shall have the shape and dimensions defined in figure S 3413.2.
g) For materials other than austenitic-ferritic stainless steels, where the welding procedure to be
approved in a single-layer process performed at the foundry or by the Manufacturer, the
qualification test shall be performed using a sample as shown in figure S 3413.2. The value of h
being determined on the basis of the welding procedure used. Required examinations and tests
shall be the same as those specified in f) above. In addition, a second series of hardness
measurements shall be performed such that one series is located in the overlap zone between
adjacent beads and the other in the centre of the bead.
5  h  10 mm
H  20 mm
  50 mm
a and b  15 mm.
L = The length of the sample shall be sufficient to provide a bend test specimen of the length defined
by the test specification.
FIGURE S 3413.2
S 3000 / 20  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - Edition 2012 Section IV - S
S 3414 WELDING PROCESS

Provisions to be applied are those of paragraphs 8.4.1 and 8.5 of the standard supplemented
by S 3200.
S 3415 FILLER MATERIALS AND SHIELDING GAS

Provisions to be applied are those of paragraphs 8.4.4, 8.4.5, 8.4.6 and 8.5 of the standard
supplemented by S 3200.
S 3416 TYPE OF JOINT

For repairs, the type of preparation may be disregarded.
For materials other than austenitic-ferritic stainless steels, renewal of the repair welding procedure
qualification shall be required in the event of a change from a multi-layer to a single-layer deposit
and vice-versa.
S 3417 WELDING POSITION

The welding procedure is qualified only for the fundamental welding position defined in standard
NF EN 287-1 which corresponds to qualification test. The following conditions shall also apply:
- qualifications for the flat weld and vertical upward weld positions or the flat and horizontal
positions shall cover all intermediate positions,
- the flat weld positions shall be covered by any other position provided that tests have shown
this extension to be possible.
S 3418 WELDING TECHNIQUE AND PARAMETERS

The welding procedure is qualified only for:
- the type of current (d.c, a.c or pulsed) and the (positive or negative) d.c or pulsed polarity,
- in the case of manual processes, the ranges of the electrical parameters I in all cases and U in the
case of type 13 processes,
- for non-manual processes, the ranges of the parameters I, U and v (welding speed),
specified in the documents describing the welding procedure.
S 3419 HEAT TREATMENTS

Provisions to be applied are those of paragraphs 8.4.9, 8.4.10, 8.4.11 and 8.4.12 of the standard
supplemented by S 3200.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 21
S 3420 EXECUTION OF THE TEST PIECE

S 3421 BASE METAL AND FILLER MATERIALS
The base metal and filler materials shall be those used during manufacture or be representative of
the latter taking into account the specified equivalences (see para. 8.3.1, 8.4.4, 8.4.5 and 8.4.6 of the
standard, supplemented by S 3200).
S 3422 WELDING OF THE TEST PIECES

The requirements stated in paragraph 6.3 of the standard are replaced by the following:
The preparation and welding of qualification assemblies shall be performed in accordance with
pWPS, under the general conditions for manufacture welding which they shall represent.
Welding and checks, inspections and testing of qualification assemblies shall be performed in the
presence of an inspector or inspection agency.
a) Pre-heating, interpass and post-heating temperatures
nominal temperature specified in the p-WPS (preliminary Welding Procedure Specification).
Over more than half the thickness of the weld, the preheating temperature for the 1st layer, shall
be held as close as possible to the specified minimum temperature (for example, when holding
the temperature to below the specified minimum temperature + 25°C, the deviation may be up to
40°C if the time for cooling the coupon between passes is too long).
After completion of half the joint, a welding sequence at a higher temperature may be performed,
in order to reach and measure the nominal interpass temperature.
The post-heating temperature during the qualification test shall be held as close as possible to the
specified minimum temperature.
b) Welding conditions
In the course of the qualification test, periodic measurements of the parameters specified in S 3418
shall be made.

Paragraph 6.1 c) of the S 3200 is applicable.
S 3430 TESTING OF THE TEST PIECE

Provisions to be applied are those of paragraphs 7.1 et 7.3 of the standard supplemented by S 3200.
S 3432 DESTRUCTIVE TESTS

The type of test specimens to be taken and the method of performing the tests are defined in Annex
S I and in MC 1000.
S 3000 / 22  n° 137-2012
a) Definition of the series of mechanical tests and of the method of sampling
TENSILE TEST BEND TEST

THICKNESS AXIS PERPENDICULAR
LONGITUDINAL IN THE TRANS-
OF THE
DEPOSITED METAL VERSE TO WELD AXIS (4)
RECESS (h)
OR OF THE AT TEMPERATURE SIDE BEND
OVER THE
TEST PIECE (E) DEFINED IN SI 120 FACE ROOT OVER THE
IN mm WHOLE
BEND BEND WHOLE
ROOM HIGH THICKNESS
THICKNESS
30  h  60 or
15  E  60 1 (1) 1 1 1 1
60 < h  120
or 60 < E  120 2 (2) 1 1 1 1
120 < h or E 3 (3) 1 1 1 1
IMPACT TESTS : NUMBER OF TEST SPECIMENS REQUIRED
THICKNESS
KV KV (5)
OF RECESS (h) OR
DEPENDING ON HEAT-AFFECTED ZONE OTHERS
TEST COUPON (E)
DEPOSITED METAL AND BASE-METAL (6)
IN mm
According to the
1 series of 3 specimens 1 series of 3 specimens in requirements of the
15  E < 30
in the skin the skin equipment specification
and Annex S I
1 series of 3 samples:
3 series of 3 specimens
-at midthickness for h or
taken as follows: According to the
E  50
-1 under skin requirements of the
30  h or E - at 1/3 thickness for
-1 from bottom of recess equipment specification
50 < h or E  80
or from root and Annex S I
-at 1/4 thickness for
-1 from heart of weld
80 < h or E
(1) 1 test specimen whose axis is located at the midthickness of the weld .
(2) 2 test specimens located on each side of midthickness of the weld.
(3) 1 test specimen whose axis is located at the midthickness of the weld 1 test specimen above and 1 test specimen
below: one of the 3 test specimens to be from the bottom area of the recess.
(4) If the base metal and the deposited metal show a marked difference in behaviour during the bending test, the
transverse bending tests (axis of the test specimen perpendicular to the axis of the weld) shall be replaced by
longitudinal bending tests (axis of the test specimen parallel to the axis of the weld). The tests shall be
performed on one series of test specimens only. Enough specimens shall be taken to cover the entire thickness of
the welded joint.
(5) For steels other than those in group 8 (specified in S 3200), the KV impact tests mentioned must be carried out in
the heat-affected zone at 1 mm from the fusion line. For class 1 components in MnMoNi quenched and tempered
steels, additional test coupons shall taken with a notch at 4mm from the fusion line.
For group 8 steels (specified in S 3200) and nickel-base alloys (groups 4X), the KV impact tests referred to are to
be carried out with a notch located 1 mm from the fusion line.
(6) Tests to be carried out in the base metal as a reference where necessary.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 23
A sample for chemical analysis shall be taken from the end extension of a tensile test specimen
(chosen, where appropriate, so as not to lie within the dilution zone). A determination shall be
performed of the carbon, silicon, sulphur, phosphorus and manganese contents and of the
alloying constituents of low and high-alloy steels.
c) Metallographic examination
This shall be carried out on a complete cross section of the weld in accordance with Annex S I.
d) Hardness measurements
These shall be performed in accordance with figure SA 3432. Hardness measurements shall not
be carried out on austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steels for group 8 and nickel-base
alloys groups 4X
FIGURE S 3432
S 3440 RESULTS
Paragraph 7.4 of the standard completed by S 3200 is applicable.
S 3450 SIMULATED REPAIR BY WELDING

Provisions to be applied are those of subchapter S 3300.
S 3000 / 24  n° 137-2012
S 3500 SPECIAL WELDS
S 3510 BUTT WELDING OF DISSIMILAR METAL JOINTS

S 3511 GENERAL
These coupons may be made, either by welding together directly the two different base materials, or
by buttering followed by joining. In the latter case, qualification of the welding procedure for
buttering and joining can be carried out simultaneously in accordance with figure S 3511 below.
FIGURE S 3511
S 3512 EXECUTION AND TESTING OF THE TEST PIECE

In every case the provisions of S 3200 are applicable according to the nature of the materials joined.
In particular, test specimens shall be taken in such a way that every area can be characterized
subject to the following remarks:
- transverse tests on the weld shall cover the base metals, the buttering (if any) and the weld joint:
bend tests shall be performed so as to stress the areas of the joint, the buttering metal and the
weld metal. The number of test specimens and the method by which they are to be taken shall be
defined in accordance with the joint geometry,
- the axis of longitudinal cylindrical tensile test specimens of the deposited metal shall lie on the
axis zz' of the weld joint,
- the impact tests of the deposited metal shall be applied to the weld metal and the buttering where
the latter is not made of an equivalent metal or does not undergo equivalent simulated stress
relieving heat treatment. In this last case, the notch shall be located at the midthickness (e/2),
- chip sampling for chemical analysis shall be performed to a maximum depth of 2 mm after
grinding down of 0.5 mm of the as-welded surface of the first layer of austenitic-ferritic steel
buttering at the start, middle and end of the bead.
In each case, verification of the carbon, chromium and nickel contents shall be performed; the
following values shall be observed:
- chromium  17.00%,
- nickel  9.00%,
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 25
- in addition, a reduction of more than 10% in the number of passes in the first layer for a given
width invalidates the austenitic-ferritic stainless steel buttering procedure qualification,
- macrographic and micrographic examinations shall be performed in compliance with S I 400,
and should in particular allow the conditions of overlapping between passes of the first layer of
buttering for non-manual processes.
It should be noted that, for the purpose of qualification, the thickness of the buttering to be taken
into account is that marked "e" on figure S 3511. The range of qualification is as follows:
Thickness e of
Range of qualification
the qualification test
(mm)
coupon (mm)
e≤5 e to 2e
5 < e ≤ 12 5 to 2e
e > 12 0,5e to 2e

with the requirements of S 3300, and bearing in mind the following remarks:
qualification is valid only for the process (111, 141,…) used for the buttering to be repaired.
If the repair buttering procedure has been qualified in accordance with S 3500 then one
If a welding procedure which been qualified in accordance with S 3500 is used with the same
process as the buttering to be repaired then no repair qualification is required,
- the selected removals of metal shall be representative of the limit conditions allowed by the
specification for carrying out:
- in the case of austeno-ferritic stainless steels:

. a stainless steel repair without preheating,
. a repair with or without a supporting layer (e.g. of 24.12),
. a repair of the base metal followed by reconstitution of the buttering.
- in the case of nickel-base alloys:
. a repair without preheating,

. a repair of the base metal followed by reconstitution of the buttering.
S 3000 / 26  n° 137-2012
S 3520 CANOPY AND OMEGA TYPE WELDS

a) The welds covered by this paragraph are essentially those of the CANOPY and OMEGA types.
b) 1) Workshop
The provisions to be applied are those in paragraph 8.2 of the standard, supplemented
by S 3200.
2) Base metal - grade

The welding procedure is qualified only for base metals of identical specified chemical
composition.
3) Base metal - Shape and dimensions

The welding procedure ceases to be approved in the case of any modification of more than
30% in the length of the joint.
4) Welding processes
The provisions to be applied are those in paragraph 8.4.1 of the standard, supplemented
by S 3200.
5) Filler metal and shielding gas

The provisions to be applied are those in paragraphs 8.4.4, 8.4.5, 8.4.6 and 8.5 of the
standard, supplemented by S 3200.
6) Type of joint
The welding procedure ceases to be qualified in the event of any modification of the
preparation of the joint.
7) Position and direction of weld

The welding procedure is qualified only for the basic welding position corresponding to the
qualification test coupon.
8) Welding technique and parameters
- in the case of manual processes, the ranges of the electrical parameters I,
- for non-manual processes, the ranges of the electrical parameters I, U and v (welding
speed),
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 27
In addition, the provisions to be applied are those in paragraph 8.4.14 of S 3200, subject to
the following additional requirements:
- the welding procedure ceases to be qualified:
. in automatic welding, in the event of any modification of the angular relationship or of
the distance between the welding electrode (and the wire, where applicable) and the
base metal,
. if a change is made from single-pass to multi-pass welding, and vice-versa,
. if, where applicable, tack welding for securing the rims and the consumable inserts is
introduced or discontinued,
- the welding procedure is qualified only for the same coding and type of automatic welding
machine, where applicable.
9) Heat treatments
The provisions to be applied are those in paragraphs 8.4.9, 8.4.10, 8.4.11 and 8.4.12 of the
standard, supplemented by S 3200.

The test piece shall take the form of a model as representative as possible of the production weld
(bearing in mind the range of qualification defined above).
The joint shall be machined, gouged out and ground by the same processes as are used in
production (thermal, mechanical processes, etc.).
In the course of the qualification test, the periodic measurements specified in S 3521 b)8) shall be
made.
When an automatic welding machine is used, U and I shall be measured continuously.
S 3523 TESTING THE TEST PIECE

1) General
All samples are taken after the test piece has undergone the full range of non-destructive
examinations laid down.
2) Non-destructive examinations
The qualification test piece shall undergo all the non-destructive examinations applied in
manufacture to the welds which it qualifies and shall satisfy class 1 requirements (S 7710).
3) Destructive tests
- Visual examination: a visual examination shall be carried out on internal* and external
surfaces to verify the penetration of the weld.
- A diametrical cross-section passing through the overlap zone of the final pass shall be
prepared for metallographic examinations.
- A series of hardness values shall be established (except in the case of austenitic and
austenitic-ferritic stainless steels).
S 3000 / 28  n° 137-2012
4) Results
No lack of penetration* and no collapse of the weld is allowed. The fusion of the consumable
insert shall be complete. Examination of the sections may serve to determine the thickness of the
joint.
* Except for welds where incomplete penetration is explicitly included in design.

A simulated repair by welding shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of S 3120.
Every repair welding procedure intended to be used in production shall be simulated on a coupon
identical to that used for the welding procedure qualification.
This coupon shall be tested according to the same requirements as for the procedure approval,
subject to the following remark: the two sections for macrographic and micrographic examinations
shall encompass the repaired area.
S 3530 FILLET WELDS NOT SUBJECTED TO MECHANICAL

STRESSES
S 3531 ATTACHMENT WELDS
The requirements of standard NF EN ISO 15614-1 concerning fillet welds apply.
Two sections shall be prepared for metallographical examinations in accordance with Annex S I
and in the case of carbon and low-alloy steels, hardness measurements shall be performed.
S 3532 SEAL WELDS

This paragraph applies to seal welds not covered in paragraphs S 3520 and S 3800. These welds are
qualified on the basis of test coupons which conform to S 3531 or on a representative coupon.
S 3540 PIPE SOCKET WELDS

S 3541 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION OF THE REPRESENTATIVE SOCKET WELD
TEST PIECE
a) With the exception of the special provisions b), below, this range of qualification is defined in
paragraph 8 of the standard, supplemented by S 3200.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 29
b) Special provisions
1) Thickness of material and diameter of pipe
The welding procedure qualification performed on a pipe of nominal thickness "e" is valid for
pipes with a real thickness of between e1 (maximum value) and e2 (minimum value) defined
below:
- e1 = 1.5 e + 3 mm
- e2 = 0.75 e for e > 5 mm
- e2 = 0.85 e for e  5 mm
It is accepted that a pipe with an outside diameter OD shall cover pipes with an outside diameter
greater than or equal to OD.
2) Welding position
The welding procedure is qualified only for the basic welding position (see fig. S 3541) in
which the qualification coupon has been executed, with a range of qualification of ± 15°,
corresponding to the position occurring in manufacture for the welding of branch
connections, subject to the following remarks:
- position H - L 045, covers the flat vertical axis and horizontal axis positions, as well as all
intermediate positions,
- position H - L 225, covers all the positions of figure SA 3541, and all intermediate
positions,
- flat vertical axis covers horizontal axis rotating tube and vice versa.
3) Welding technique
See paragraph 8.4.14 of S 3200.
In addition, the requirements stated in paragraph 8.4.8 of the standard are replaced by the
following:
S 3000 / 30  n° 137-2012
- in the case of manual processes, the ranges of the electrical parameters I,
- for non-manual processes, the ranges of the electrical parameters I, U and v (welding
speed),
"flat" vertical axis

PB
"overhead" vertical axis

PD
Horizontal axis
fixed tube: PF
Horizontal axis
rotating tube: PB
Fixed tube
"Axis at 45°"
FIGURE S 3541

Pipe socket welds shall be approved using a qualification test piece which is representative of the
socket weld, so that account can be taken in the performance of the welding procedure qualification
test and its associated non-destructive examinations, of the particular conditions of execution
(accessibility, welding sequences and parameters, etc.) and examination conditions.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 31
S 3543 EXAMINATION OF THE TEST PIECE

S 3543.1 General
The destructive tests are performed after the qualification test piece has been subjected to all the
heat treatments and non-destructive examinations specified in the p-WPS (preliminary Welding
Procedure Specification).
For the qualification test piece, the minimum space stipulated in the welding data package, between
the end of the pipe and the bottom of the socket before welding, shall be complied with.
S 3543.2 Non-destructive examinations

The non-destructive examinations for the test piece are those stipulated in manufacture for the joints
which they qualify and shall satisfy the requirements of class 1 (S 7710).
S 3543.3 Destructive tests

The tests stipulated below shall be performed in each zone corresponding to a basic welding
position.
The following examinations shall be performed on one section:
- a metallographic examination, in accordance with the requirements of Annex S I 400, on a
complete cross section of the weld,
- hardness measurements shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Annex
S I 500, except for austenitic or austenitic-ferritic stainless steels and nickel-base alloys.
S 3543.4 Results
- Visual examination and metallographic examination:
A check shall be made to ensure that none of the following are present:
- carbon monoxide porosities,
- lack of fusion or penetration, cracks,
- root defects exceeding 0.8 mm,
- sag greater than:
e where e  2.11 mm,
e/2 where 2.11 < e  4 mm.
Where e > 4 mm, no sag shall be tolerated.
Check that the values of the throat height as defined in chapters B, C and D 3000 are met.
- Line of hardness measurement:

As a general rule, the heat-affected zone of ferritic steels shall not exceed 350 HV10.
S 3000 / 32  n° 137-2012
S 3550 FRICTION WELDING

1) Workshop
The provisions to be applied are those in para. 8.2 of the standard supplemented by S 3200.
2) Parent metal: grade

The welding procedure is qualified only for parent metals of each component of the assembly of
identical specified chemical composition.
Equivalence between products of the same grade subjected to different melting processes and
heat treatments (forged, rolled, cast) is not permissible.
3) Parent metal: thickness and pipe diameter

The welding procedure is qualified only for the specific diameters and thicknesses of the parts to
be joined.
4) Welding process
The welding process is qualified only for the machine used and the process used (inertia or
constant speed, control according to time or the length of metal consumed).
5) Welding technique and parameters

The qualification of the welding procedure is compromised when any of the following
parameters is modified:
- rotation speed ± 5%,
- butting sequence: modification of the application force by ± 10% and of the duration by
± 1 second,
- friction sequence: modification of the application force by ± 10% and of the duration
by  21 secondes,
- modification of the braking time by ± 1 second (time between the cancellation of the rotation
driver and application of the forging force),
- forging sequence: modification of the application force by ± 10% and of the duration by
± 2 seconds.
6) Post weld heat treatment

The provisions to be applied are in those in paragraph 8.4.12 of the standard, supplemented
by S 3200.

Two qualification assemblies shall be welded. The required non-destructive tests are performed on
both qualification assemblies. The destructive tests are spead across the two qualifications
assemblies.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 33
1) Parent metal
The parent metals shall be those used during the manufacturing process and must have the same
diameter and thickness.
The length of test pieces shall be such that heat flow remains comparable to that of the
production part.
The parts to be joined shall be cleaned and degreased and the roughness of the test piece faces
shall be representative of that of the production parts.
2) Welding the qualification test piece

The tests piece are joined on the machine used for the production welds and the fixed parameters
shall be recorded.
3) Weld finishing
The external and internal flashes may be eliminated by machining. The surface condition of the
machined part shall be such that it does not hinder the performance of the scheduled inspections.
4) Heat treatment
The provisions to be applied are those in paragraph 6.1.c1) of S 3200.
S 3553 TESTING OF THE TEST PIECE

1) General
The destructive tests are performed after the test piece has been subjected to all the heat
treatments and non-destructive examinations specified in the p-WPS (preliminary Welding
Procedure Specification).
2) Non-destructive examination
After elimination of the weld flashes, the qualification test piece shall be subjected to all non-
destructive examinations (surface examination, liquid penetrant and volumetric examination,
etc.) scheduled in the production cycle and shall meet the requirements of the highest level for
these joints.
3) Destructive tests
a) Transverse tensile test
Two transverse tensile tests and one tensile test at high temperature shall be performed on
cylindrical or prismatic specimens in accordance with the requirements of S I 100.
The test specimens shall be taken such that their axis is perpendicular to the weld plane. The
weld shall be centred in the finished area.
For annular parts, the axis of the test specimen shall be located at mid-wall thickness. For
solid parts, the axis shall be at mid radius.
b) Bend test
Four side bend tests shall be performed whatever the thickness of the test piece, in
accordance with the requirements of S I 213 and MC 1263 c).
S 3000 / 34  n° 137-2012
c) Impact test
The impact test specimens shall be taken at mid-thicknes of the test piece for annular parts
and at mid-radius for solid parts. Their axes shall be parallel to those of the joined parts and
the notch shall be perpendicular to the skin.
d) Metallographic examination
These examinations shall be performed in accordance with annex S I 400 on a transverse
section of the weld.
LOW ALLOY STEELS AUSTENITIC STAINLESS

STEELS AND NICKEL
NUMBER OF TEST SPECIMENS KV ZAT at 0°C BASE ALLOYS
REQUIRED KV at 0°C
1 mm 4 mm
weld plane KV at 20°C
fusion fusion
weld plane
line line
Homogeneous coupon 3 3 3 3
Dissimilar joint of low alloy

steel on stainless steel or nickel 3 3 3
base alloy
Stainless steel on nickel base alloy 3
4) Results
a) Tensile tests
- At room temperature
The tensile strength must be at least equal to the minimum value specified for the base
metal.
In the case of joints of parent metals with different specified minimum tensile strengths,
the lower of the two shall be the value to satisfy.
- At high temperature
The minimum guaranteed value of the yield strength corresponds to the minimum value
specified for the base metal.
The tensile strength value is taken for information purpose.
Where base metals with different minimum specified values are welded together, the value
to be guaranteed shall be the lesser of the two.
b) Bend tests
There shall be no marked cracking or lack of bonding. The length of isolated cracks and
uncovered porous zones shall not exceed 3 mm.
c) Impact tests
Test results shall meet the requirements of paragraph 7.4.5 of S 3200.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 35
A check shall be performed to ensure that the joint contains no defects such as:
- cracks,
- lack of bonding,
- undercuts.
5) Repairs
Defective welds shall be rejected. No repairs are authorized.
S 3560 ELECTRON BEAM WELDING

This sub-chapter specifies the requirements to be satisfied for the approval of a welding procedure
specification by welding procedure tests as defined in standard NF EN ISO 15609-3. It defines the
conditions for the execution of welding procedure approval tests and the limits of validity of an
approved electron beam welding procedure.
The provisions of S 3130, S 3150 and S 3160 apply to all the welding procedures covered in this
chapter.
For electron beam welding, the requirements of this chapter ensure conformance with standard
NF EN ISO 15614-11.
Weld repairs shall be simulated on the welding procedure qualification coupon or, failing this, on an
additional coupon taken under the same conditions as the weld to be repaired.
These repairs shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of paragraph S 3200 (for the
general case) or of the relevant RCC-M chapter applicable to the repair process used.
Welding procedures shall be qualified in accordance with all the requirements stipulated in standard
NF EN ISO 15614-11 and the stipulations listed below, which specify or complete the following
paragraphs of the standard. Unless otherwise indicated, the numbering of paragraphs reflects that of
the standard.
§6 QUALIFICATION COUPON
§ 6.1 GENERAL
a) Base metal
The base materials shall be identical to or representative of those used in production (see § 8.5).
In the case of rolled or forged products, the main direction of deformation shall be identified and
orientated in such a manner that the positioning of test specimens for KV impact tests, where
applicable, is representative of that used for the procurement of these products. Where
procurements are tested in both (longitudinal and transverse) directions, the transverse direction
shall be used.
S 3000 / 36  n° 137-2012
b) Type of joint
The qualification test coupon shall be representative of that intended and specified for the
fabrication process and shall be made within the alignment tolerances on the preparation of the
welds.
The coupon shall be subjected to the same examinations and tests prior to welding as those
required in fabrication.
c) Post weld heat treatment

Paragraph 6.1 c) of S 3200 is applicable
§ 6.3 WELDING THE QUALIFICATION COUPON

The qualification coupon shall be welded using the same electron gun as for the production welds.
If, in fabrication, there are areas of overlap and extinction, these shall be reproduced for the
qualification test. During the course of the qualification test, the parameters Ue (acceleration
voltage), Ie (beam current) for the calculation of the emission energy and If (focusing power) shall
be automatically recorded.
The welding parameters shall be those specified in standard NF EN ISO 15609-3 plus, in addition:
- the emission energy and focusing power of the electron beam shall be within a tolerance of 10%
for a given welding speed.
- the distance between the electron gun and the part shall be within a tolerance of 5%.
§7 INSPECTIONS, EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS

§ 7.1 SCOPE OF INSPECTIONS, EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS
a) Non-destructive examination
The qualification coupon shall also be subjected to all the non-destructive examinations applied
in fabrication to the joints which it qualifies and must satisfy the class 1 requirements given
in S 7700.
b) Destructive examinations
The tests to be performed for butt-welded coupons are those defined in S 3200, paragraph 7.1.b.
However, the following tests shall not be performed:
- longitudinal tensile test of the weld metal,
- chemical analysis, determination of the ferrite content,
- intergranular corrosion.
§ 7.2 LOCATION AND CUTTING OF TEST SPECIMENS

All samples shall be taken after the test coupon has undergone the whole range of heat treatments
after welding as defined in paragraph 6.1 c and non-destructive examinations called for in the
documents describing the qualification.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 37
If more than one welding process is employed to execute the test piece, every effort shall be made to
take test specimens in such a way that each process can be characterized.
Test specimens for mechanical testing shall be taken from the areas which nondestructive
examinations have shown to be the most sound.
On the other hand, sections for metallographic examinations shall be located in areas with
indications acceptable for non-destructive examinations.
The areas in the thickness from which test specimens shall be taken are shown in table S 3202. The
sampling areas (P on the skin, R at the root, A additional) shall be distributed to comply with the
location specified in figures 5 to 8 of standard NF EN ISO 15614-11.
§ 7.4 DESTRUCTIVE TESTS

§ 7.4.1 Transverse tensile test
In the special case of transverse tensile tests, minimum guaranteed values lower than those of the
base metal may be used, if this is provided for in the equipment specification, and subject to it being
taken into account at the design level.
§ 7.4.2 Bend tests

The diameter of the stamp or the rollers is specified in MC 1263.
Defects located in the angles of the test specimen shall be taken into consideration.
§ 7.4.3 Impact tests

The sampling area for test specimens and the impact test temperatures are given in tables S3201 a
and b. Specimens shall be of the KV type, for which the sampling procedures and test performance
methods are given in Annex SI 300.
Impact tests results shall be in accordance with the requirements of S 3200 § 7.4.5.
§ 7.4.4 Hardness tests

The Vickers's hardness test under load HV10 shall be performed as described below.
These measurements are also required for sub-group 1-1 steels.
Hardness measurements shall be performed on current weld areas and on areas of overlap,
extinction and restart, where applicable.
Hardness measurements shall be performed in the weld, the heat affected zones and the base metal
in order to assess the range of hardness values throughout the welded coupon.
For materials of thickness not greater than 5 mm, a single hardness profile line shall be followed at a
depth of at most 2 mm beneath the upper surface of the welded coupon.
For materials of thickness greater than 5 mm, two hardness profile lines shall be followed at a depth
of at most 2 mm beneath both the upper and lower surfaces of the welded coupon.
For welds with backing runs, fillet welds and T-butt joints, an additional hardness profile line shall
be followed in the root area. Typical examples of indentation distribution are shown in Figures 1 a),
b), e) and f) in standard EN 1043-1 and in Figures 3 and 4.
S 3000 / 38  n° 137-2012
For each hardness profile line, at least three indentations shall be made in each of the following
areas:
- the weld,
- the heat affected zones,
- the two base metals.
For the HAZ, the first indentation must be as close as possible to the fusion line.
The results of the hardness test shall meet the requirements of Table 1. However, the requirements
for groups 6 (non heat treated), 7, 10 and 11 and for dissimilar coupons shall be specified prior to
testing.
TABLE 1
MAXIMUM ALLOWED HARDNESS VALUES (HV10)
CR ISO/TR 15608 without with

Steels PWHT PWHT
1, 2 380 320
3 380 320
4, 5 380 320
6, — 350
7 a) — 350
9.1 350 300
9.2 450 350
9.3 450 350
a) For steels of specified maximum tensile strength 900 MPa or less.
§ 7.4.5 Metallographic examination

These examinations shall be performed in accordance with Annex S I 400 on a complete transverse
section of the weld.
In addition, metallographic examinations shall be performed on areas of weld overlap, extinction
and restart, where applicable.
The micrographic and macrographic criteria specified in SI 400 shall be satisfied.
§ 7.5 RETESTS
S 3200, paragraph 7.6 is applicable.
§8 AREA OF VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION

The use of the electron beam welding process on top of or alongside another welding process
requires a qualification encompassing the two processes in order to qualify the combination.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 39
§ 8.2 RELATED TO THE MANUFACTURER

The qualification tests shall be performed in the same workshop as the production welds, subject to
the provisions of chapter S 6000.
§ 8.3 RELATED TO THE MATERIAL

The use of an identical electron gun other than the one employed in carrying out the qualification
tests requires the performance of a reduced qualification test comprising the following:
- metallographic examinations meeting the requirements of SI 400,
- line of hardness measurements meeting the requirements of § 7.4.4.
§ 8.5 RELATED TO THE BASE METAL

§ 8.5.1 Grades
Qualification shall only be valid for the one grade of base metal (or grades in the case of
heterogeneous coupons) used for the qualification coupon.
Permanent backing metal shall be considered to be a base metal for the purposes of qualification of
the group or sub-group.
NOTE
- Small variations in the composition of similar grades due to the use of national standards shall not require a new
qualification.
- If the grade used contains more than 0.11% nitrogen, the maximum nitrogen content shall not be greater than that of
the sample of metal used for the test piece,
- A dissimilar weld joint shall be approved on the basis of a test piece made up of the two materials and the
qualification shall be valid only for this combination.
§ 8.5.2 Coupon geometry

§ 8.5.2.1 Thickness
Acceptance level B is required.
§ 8.7 RELATED TO THE GEOMETRY OF THE COUPON

A new qualification is necessary in the event of modification of the type of preparation (increased
gap or separation between the two specimens to be welded).
§ 8.11 RELATED TO THE WELDING PARAMETERS

The welding procedure is qualified only within the limits specified for the welding parameters in the
preliminary Welding Procedure Specification (pWPS) as specified in paragraph 6.3.
S 3000 / 40  n° 137-2012
§ 8.13 RELATED TO HEAT TREATMENTS AFTER WELDING

Qualification of the welding procedure is also invalidated in the event of stress-relieving heat
treatment applied to production welds:
- if there is any modification of the specified upward and downward rates of temperature (heating
and cooling rates above the initial furnace temperature),
- if there is an increase in the duration of the treatment which invalidates the representativeness of
the simulated heat treatment as defined in para. 6.1 c 1) of S 3200.
Qualification of the welding procedure is invalidated if there is any modification of the temperature
cycles for heat treatment performed after welding, other than stress relieving heat treatment, which
are capable of affecting the final metallurgical conditions of the product (normalization, quenching,
solution heat treatment, etc).
§ 8.14 RELATED TO THE NUMBER OF PASSES

Qualification of the welding procedure is invalidated if there is a change from welding on one side
to welding on both sides, and vice-versa.
S 3570 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR METAL-PLATED

PLATE JOINTS
S 3571 RULES APPLICABLE TO THE SUBSTRATE STEEL
The requirements of subchapter S 3200 apply for the substrate steel.
S 3572 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION FOR THE METAL-PLATING

- Qualification shall only be valid for the one grade used in the tests.
- Qualification shall be valid for metal-plating thicknesses between 0.9 t and 1.5 t (where t is the
thickness of the metal-plating on the qualification test coupon).
- Qualification shall only be valid if the width and depth of the groove measured from the edge of
the groove in the substrate steel are not altered beyond allowable tolerances.
S 3573 TEST CONDITIONS

In defining the conditions for non-destructive examination and acceptable defects, the total
thickness of the qualification coupon must be taken as reference.
The minimum transverse tensile strength is that of the whole test piece as a whole when the
cladding is included in the sizing. Transverse tensile test specimens therefore comprise both the
substrate steel and the metal-plating.
At least two tests shall be performed.
Bend test specimens shall be taken from the entire test piece.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 41
Impact test specimens shall be located in the weld metal and the heat affected zone of the part of the
test piece affecting the substrate steel.
The entire test piece shall be subjected to metallographic examination.
Hardness tests are only performed on the substrate steel and the corresponding molten area.
A chemical analysis of the deposited metal shall be performed for both the substrate steel and the
metal-cladding.
S 3580 PROVISIONS FOR JOINTS CONNECTING PREVIOUSLY

WELDED CLAD PARTS
Qualification of the welding procedure for this type of joint may be performed either in accordance
with the general requirements of S 3200, the cladding being qualified in accordance with S 3600 or
S 3700, or by extension to this case of the special provisions of S 3570.
S 3590 HOMOGENEOUS BUILD-UP

Homogeneous build-up is qualified on basis of a butt-welded test coupon of plates or tubes.
S 3600 WELD OVERLAY CLADDING OF

AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS STEEL
ON CARBON AND LOW-ALLOY STEELS
Austenitic-ferritic stainless steel claddings shall be produced by the use of type 24Cr 12Ni steel for
the first layer and type 20Cr 10Ni steel for the subsequent layer(s) of the deposited weld metal.

S 3611 WORKSHOP
The qualification tests shall be performed in the same workshop as the production welds subject to
the provisions of S 6000.

The qualification test is valid only for the grades of steel used for the tests. Notwithstanding this,
extensions may be considered and adopted by the Manufacturer according to the following general
principles.
Products of the same grade but produced by different steelmaking or manufacturing processes
(forging, rolling, casting, etc.) are accepted as equivalent. However, in the case of cast products,
every effort shall be made to perform the qualification tests on the cast product.
S 3000 / 42  n° 137-2012
For carbon steels and carbon-manganese steels, and for low alloy manganese-molybdenum-nickel
steels, the requirements of paragraph 8.3.1.1 in subsection S 3200 apply.
S 3613 BASE METAL: SHAPE, DIMENSIONS

a) A qualification relating to a plate cladding procedure is also valid for the cladding of tubes with
an outside diameter of  500 mm.
b) The qualification test piece for welding procedures for the cladding of tubes and branch-
connections with outside diameters less than 500 mm, this value being reduced to 150 mm for
the flat position, shall take the form of a section of the tube to be clad.
In this case, the qualification is valid for the cladding of tubes with an Outside Diameter of
 0.5 OD, for manual welding and  0.75 OD for automatic welding where OD is the diameter
of the tube constituting the qualification test piece. This qualification is therefore also valid for

the welding of plates .
c) The approved thicknesses (E) depend on the thickness of the base metal of the qualification test
piece (e) in accordance with the following requirements:
- e  50 mm: 0.75 e  E  1.5 e + 3 mm,
- e > 50 mm: E > 50 mm.
In this case, use should be made, wherever possible, of plates with a thickness greater than or
equal to 90 mm. In every instance, suitable devices should be used to prevent the deformation of
the test piece during welding operations and, if possible, during the heat treatments to be
performed on the test piece.

The addition, deletion or modification of welding process, or the modification of the type of
operation (manual, partially mechanical or automatic) shall require a new welding procedure
qualification.

a) The welding procedure is qualified only for the use of shielded metal arc welding flux and flux-
cored arc welding wire of the same trade name and of filler metals (wire, rod, etc.) of the same
standardised designation as those used for the qualification coupon. However, a new
qualification is not required where use is made of another filler material with the same symbol
(fused or agglomerated flux, low hydrogen rutile) and conforming to the same procurement
specification, provided that this has been qualified in accordance with the provisions of S 5000.
b) Except for shielded metal arc welding, the welding procedure is only qualified for the use of
filler materials with exactly the same geometrical characteristics as the materials used for the
qualification coupon.

In both cases the attention of the Manufacturer is drawn to the provisions of S 3631.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 43
In the case of shielded metal arc welding, the first layer of the cladding of qualification test piece
shall be carried out with the maximum electrode diameter used in fabrication.
Any increase in this diameter invalidates the qualification of the cladding, and it is understood
that the electrode diameters used for the second layer are less than or equal to those used for the
first layer (unless another combination of electrode diameters for the first and second layer has
been specified and qualified with due regard to the risk of causing a brittle structure at the
interface).
c) The welding procedure is not qualified if one of the following modifications is introduced:
- change from solid to flux cored wire and vice-versa,
- introduction or elimination of additional filler metal.
d) The welding procedure is not qualified if one of the following modifications is made to the
shielding gas:
- change in the nominal chemical composition of the gas or gaseous mixture,
- reduction by 10% or more in the face shielding gas flow in relation to the minimum specified
value.
S 3616 NUMBER AND SEQUENCE OF LAYERS

a) Claddings comprising one or more layers shall be subjected to separate qualifications. The range
of qualification (N) in relation to the number of layers applied (n) shall be as follows:
- n=1 N=1
- n=2 2N4
- n3 Nn
Note : The number of layers shall not be taken into consideration for repair welding procedure qualifications
where stipulated in S 3120.
b) When high energy level automatic welding processes are used, the conditions and sequencing of
overlapping of the various layers shall be noted and shall govern the range of qualification.
S 3617 WELDING POSITION AND DIRECTION

A welding procedure shall be qualified only for the basic welding position used for the qualification
test coupon and subject to the following remarks:
- the flat weld position shall be covered by any other position provided that tests have shown this
extension to be possible,
- the flat weld positions and the vertical upwards position shall cover all intermediate positions
welded in the same direction,
- the vertical position and overhead position shall cover all intermediate positions,
- the flat and horizontal vertical positions shall cover all intermediate positions within the angle of
rotation,
S 3000 / 44  n° 137-2012
- the position "fixed pipe, horizontal axis" shall cover the flat weld, vertical and overhead
positions,
- the position "fixed pipe, vertical axis" shall cover the horizontal vertical weld position,
- the 2 positions "fixed pipe, horizontal axis" and "fixed pipe, vertical axis" shall cover all
positions.
It should, however, be noted with regard to the vertical positions that each direction of welding
(upwards or downwards) shall be considered separately.
A qualification test on pipe in a given position may be considered as equivalent to a qualification
test on plate, on condition that the requirements of S 3613 and S 3631 are met.

a) Welding parameters:
- the type of current (d.c. or a.c.) and the (positive or negative) d.c. polarity.
- the ranges of the electrical parameters (I in all cases and U in the case of type 13 processes or
automatic welding),
- the range of welding speed v (automatic welding only), subject to note 1,
The Surveillance Agent or Inspector for the qualification test may stipulate the values of these
parameters for the execution of the test piece within the limits stated in the documents describing
the qualification and in accordance with the position of the weld to be used for this qualification.
b) Heat input
- for each grade of weld metal deposited and for each heat affected layer of the base metal, the
qualified lower limit of heat input shall be 25% less than the heat input used for the welding
- in addition, where cladding contributes locally, as a secondary function, to structural strength
[B 4440 e)], for each grade of weld metal deposited the qualified upper limit of heat input
shall be 25% greater than the heat input used for the welding qualification test coupon.
c) Qualification of the welding procedure is invalidated when one of the following changes is
introduced:
- change from a stringer bead to a wave-bead technique (waving more than 3 times the
diameter of the core wire),
- change from a technique using one to a technique using more than one wire for the
simultaneous feed of the same field pool and vice-versa,
- modification of the width, frequency or dwell time of oscillation,
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 45
- change in the trade designation of the welding automation equipment.

Note 1 : If, for the same electrical characteristics, the welding procedure specifies variable speeds V depending on
the angle of the slope of the plate in relation to the welding direction, then it is accepted that two test
pieces made respectively at the minimum and maximum specified speed V qualify the welding procedure
for all the intermediate speeds.
Note 2 : For information purposes, the documents describing the welding procedure shall specify the limits for the
free height between nozzle and arc and the width of overlap between passes.

a) Qualification of the welding procedure is invalidated if one of the following changes is
introduced:
- reduction of the nominal preheat temperature applied at the start of the welding procedure
qualification test.
- reduction of the minimum duration or temperature of the postheat treatment during the course
of the welding procedure qualification test,
- increase in the maximum inter-pass temperature during the course of the welding procedure
qualification test,
b) For stress relieving heat treatments following welding, the requirements of paragraph 8.4.12 in
subsection S 3200 apply.

The base metals and filler materials shall be those used in production or shall be representative of
these within the defined ranges of equivalence.
The surface to be clad shall be prepared in accordance with the practices applied in manufacture
and shall be examined to ensure that it is free from defects.
S 3622 WELDING OF THE TEST PIECE

nominal temperature specified in the p-WPS (preliminary Welding Procedure Specification). The
preheating temperature for the 1st layer shall be held as close as possible to the specified minimum
temperature (for example, when holding the temperature to below the specified minimum
temperature + 25°C, the deviation may be up to 40°C if the time for cooling the coupon between
passes is too long).
For the other layers, a welding sequence at a higher temperature may be performed, in order to
reach and measure the nominal interpass temperature.
The postheating temperature applied during the qualification test shall be kept as close as possible
to the minimum specified value.
S 3000 / 46  n° 137-2012
Measurements of the U, I and V parameters shall be made in the course of the qualification tests:
- by the continuous automatic recording of U and I in the case of processes using automatic
welding machines, and
- periodically in the case of other processes,
- the edges of the deposit shall have a configuration (overlapping of passes, for example)
comparable to that adopted in production; welding of the qualification test piece shall be
interrupted and restarted for each of the layers deposited by a high energy level automatic
process, in order to facilitate examination stipulated in S 3633 d.
S 3623 SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT

After execution of the weld, including postheating if any, the qualification test piece shall be
subjected (1) to heat treatment simulating all the stress relieving heat treatments applied in
production to the claddings covered by the qualification.
Simulated stress relieving heat treatment conditions shall be as specified for fabrication (holding
temperature range, heating and cooling rates above the initial furnace temperature). Where a
production weld is subjected to successive stress relieving heat treatments at different holding
temperatures, the corresponding qualification test piece shall be treated at each of these
temperatures.
For each holding temperature, the holding time for simulated stress relieving heat treatment shall
always be greater than 80% of the total duration of holding times in fabrication. Provision shall be
made for manufacturing variables.
However, simulated heat treatment at several holding temperatures (corresponding to several
intermediate stress relieving heat treatments followed by a final stress relieving heat treatment at a
higher holding temperature) which is representative of actual fabrication conditions, may be
considered to cover a heat treatment comprising a smaller number of holding temperatures, on
condition that:
- the final holding temperature of the heat treatment to be covered is the final holding temperature
of the simulated heat treatment, the latter temperature having a nominal value at least 25°C
greater than all other heat treatments,
- the rules for holding times listed above are respected for each holding temperature.
Simulated stress relieving heat treatment conditions shall be specified in the documents defining the
welding procedure qualification.
The treatment may, by agreement, be carried out in a single cycle. The Manufacturer shall be able
to justify simulated heat treatment parameters.
Temperature cycles shall be recorded.
(1) With the exception of the sampling area for the specimens for corrosion tests carried out without stress relieving
heat treatment, where these are performed.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 47

SA 3631 GENERAL
- All samples shall be taken after the test piece has undergone the whole range of heat treatments
(except for the test specimens for certain tests specified in S 3633 f) and non-destructive
examinations called for in the documents describing the qualification.
- If more than one welding process is employed to execute the test piece, every effort shall be
made to take test specimens in such a way that each process can be characterized.
- Test specimens for mechanical testing shall be taken from the areas which non-destructive
examinations have shown to be the most sound.
On the other hand, sections for metallographic examinations shall be located in areas with
indications acceptable for non-destructive examinations.
- The examinations shall also provide means of characterizing all the basic welding positions
involved and therefore approved (see S 3617) by the test piece: a series of tests shall be carried
out in each of the corresponding areas.

manufacture to the claddings which it qualifies and must satisfy class 1 requirements. Its surface
condition shall be comparable to the most unfavourable condition of a production cladding.

The types of specimens to be taken and the method of performing the tests are specified in
Annex S I.
a) Bend tests
Four test specimens for side bend tests shall be taken in accordance with Annex S I (S I 230)
2 of which shall be parallel to the direction of welding and 2 perpendicular to this direction.
Chips of metal for chemical analysis shall be taken from a depth of 2 mm after grinding of
0.5 mm from the as welded surface to arrive at the final surface of the cladding. The carbon,
silicon, sulphur, phosphorus, manganese, nickel, chromium, nitrogen and cobalt contents and,
where applicable, the other alloying elements shall be verified.
c) Determination of the  ferrite content

This determination shall be carried out in accordance with the modified SCHAEFFLER diagram
(DELONG, see Figure S 2500.2). A retest may be carried out by direct magnetic measurement
(according to MC 1340 requirements) before any heat treatment is carried out.
S 3000 / 48  n° 137-2012
Sampling conditions for this examination shall be as follows:
- one sample shall be taken perpendicular to the welding direction and shall encompass several
weld beads belonging both to the first and subsequent layers,
- a second sample shall be taken parallel to the welding direction and shall encompass the
zones of the deposited metal and base metal where welding is interrupted and resumed as
stipulated in S 3622 when high energy level automatic welding processes are used.
These examinations shall be performed in compliance with Annex S I (S I 400).
In particular, in the case of the cladding on alloyed steels, examination of the underlying base
metal in zones likely to be heat-affected by a combination of welding procedures comprising at
least one high energy level automatic process shall confirm the absence of very large grained
zones due, for example, to deposition of a first layer which is not refined by deposition of the
subsequent layers.
e) Hardness measurements
These shall be performed in accordance with Annex S I 500. The rows of hardness indentation
are intended to check the hardness of the heat-affected zone of the base metal.
f) Corrosion test in the weld metal

The corrosion test shall be carried out in the manner specified in Annex S I.
However, these tests are not required if the carbon content is  0.035%. Otherwise, the tests
shall produce satisfactory results and, for 20Cr 10Ni type products, the chromium content shall
be  19.00%.
S 3634 RESULTS
a) Side bend test
There shall be no marked cracking; isolated cracks, uncovered porous zones and inclusions shall
not exceed 1.5 mm in length.
The elements to be determined and the limit values to be guaranteed shall be specified in the
The following, in particular, shall be within the limits stated below:
- %C  0.035 (preferably  0.030) ()
- % Si  1.50
- % Mn  2.00
- % Cr : between 18.00 and 21.00
 A carbon content above 0.035%, but not exceeding 0.040 % may be tolerated if intergranular corrosion tests are
performed and give satisfactory results and provided that, in the case of 20Cr 10Ni type products, the chromium
content is greater than 19.00%.
 n° 144-2014 S 3000 / 49
- % Ni : between 9.00 and 12.00

- %S  0.025
- %P  0.025
- %N : for information
c)  ferrite content
The  ferrite content shall be between 5 and 15% (preferably 12% max.) by reference to the
SCHAEFFLER diagram modified DELONG.
In case of doubt, an additional test may be performed by direct magnetic measurement
(according to MC 1340 requirements). The results shall then be between 3% and 15%.
In the base metal bonding zone (HAZ), hardness shall not exceed the values indicated in
paragraph 7.4.6 of the standard, supplemented by S 3200.

with the requirements of S 3600 and bearing in mind the following remarks:
qualification is valid only for the process (111, 122, 141,…) used for the cladding to be repaired.
If the repair cladding procedure has been qualified in accordance with S 3600 then one
If a cladding procedure which been qualified in accordance with S 3600 is used with the same
process as the cladding to be repaired then no repair qualification is required,
- the selected excavations shall be representative of the limit conditions allowed by the documents
describing the welding procedures for carrying out:
. a stainless steel repair without preheating,
. a repair with or without a supporting layer (e.g. of 24Cr 12Ni),
. a repair of the base metal followed by reconstitution of the cladding,
- for manual repairs performed on the supporting layer by TIG welding, qualification performed
using a filler material rod with a given nominal diameter, o, also covers immediately adjacent
nominal diameters (as per AFNOR standard NF EN ISO 544).
- the following tests shall be performed:
. non-destructive examinations of repair of the base metal and the cladding,
. two side bend tests on specimens at right angles to the direction of welding for the repair of
the cladding,
. metallographic examination,
S 3000 / 50  n° 137-2012
. hardness measurements,
. chemical analysis and determination of the ferrite content,
. intergranular corrosion test in accordance with the requirements of S 3633 f),
- the test specimens shall be taken in such a way that the repaired portion is located in their central
area.
Note : This simulated repair by welding need not be carried out if an equivalent simulated repair has been performed
in connection with buttering (S 3500).
S 3650 COMBINATION OF WELDING PROCEDURES

FOR CLADDINGS
The juxtaposition of claddings produced by two different welding procedures does not constitute a
combination of welding procedures. Each procedure requires to be qualified separately in
accordance with the requirements of S 3610, S 3620, and S 3630.
A cladding produced by superimposing deposits laid down by different welding procedures shall be
subject to special qualification. The test piece shall be produced in accordance with the method
described in the welding procedure. The range of qualification is governed by the requirements
of S 3610.
S 3700 WELD OVERLAY CLADDING OF

NICKEL-BASE ALLOY ON CARBON
AND LOW-ALLOY STEELS
The requirements of S 3600 are extended to this type of cladding subject to the following remarks:

The provisions of S 3610 shall apply.
S 3711 WORKSHOP


 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 51
S 3714 WELDING PROCESSES


The requirements of S 3615 are applicable subject to the following remark: in subparagraph b) it is
not required that the diameters of the electrodes used for the second layer should not exceed the
electrode diameters used for the first layer.
S 3716 NUMBER AND SEQUENCE OF LAYERS





S 3730 EXAMINATION AND TESTING OF THE TEST PIECE

S 3731 GENERAL
- All samples shall be taken after the test piece has undergone the whole range of heat treatments
and non-destructive examinations called for in the documents describing the qualification.
- If more than one welding process is employed to execute the test piece, every effort shall be
made to take test specimens in such a way that each process can be characterized.
- Test specimens for mechanical testing shall be taken from the areas which non-destructive
examinations have shown to be sound.
On the other hand, sections for macrographic and/or micrographic examinations shall be located
in areas with indications acceptable for non-destructive examinations.
S 3000 / 52  n° 137-2012
- The examinations shall also provide means of characterizing all the basic welding positions
involved and therefore approved (see S 3717) by the test piece: a series of tests shall be carried
out in each of the corresponding areas.

manufacture to the claddings which it qualifies and must satisfy class 1 requirements. Its surface
conditions shall be comparable to the most unfavourable condition of a production cladding.

The types of specimens to be taken and the method of performing the tests are specified in
Annex S I.
a) Bend tests
Four test specimens for side bend tests shall be taken in accordance with Annex S I (S I 230)
2 of which shall be parallel to the direction of welding and 2 perpendicular to this direction.
Chips of metal for chemical analysis shall be taken from a depth of 2 mm after grinding of
0.5 mm from the as-welded surface to arrive at the final surface of the cladding. The carbon,
silicon, sulphur, phosphorus, manganese, nickel, chromium, cobalt, iron, niobium + tantalum,
copper and titanium contents shall be verified.
In addition, in the case of tube plates, this analysis shall be repeated for those layers of the
cladding involved in the welding of the tubes and for this purpose samples of metal chips shall
be taken from a depth of 2 mm from the surface of these layers.
c) Metallographic examination
Sampling conditions for this examination shall be as follows:
- one sample shall be taken perpendicular to the welding direction and shall encompass several
weld beads belonging both to the first and subsequent layers (at least three overlap zones of
the last layer),
- a second sample shall be taken parallel to the welding direction and shall encompass the
zones of the deposited metal and base metal where welding is interrupted and resumed as
stipulated in S 3622 when high energy level automatic welding processes are used.
These examinations shall be performed in compliance with Annex S I (S I 400).
The rows of hardness indentation shall be performed in accordance with Annex S I 500 and are
intended to check the hardness of the heat-affected zone of the base metal.
 n° 144-2014 S 3000 / 53
S 3734 RESULTS
a) Side bend test
There shall be no marked cracking; isolated cracks and uncovered porous zones and inclusions
shall not exceed 3 mm in length.
The elements to be determined and the limit values to be guaranteed shall be specified in the
In the case of cladding with ERNiCr3 and ENiCrFe3 grades, the latter shall be within the limits
given below.
1) For the layer of cladding in contact with the fluid:
% Fe % Co % Si (% Nb + % Ta) %S %P
15.00 0.20 max. 0.65 (1) (2) 0.015 0.020

max. (preferred 0.15 max.) max. 1.80 min. max. max.
(1) In the case of manual cladding with covered electrode: 1.00 - 2.50%
(preferably 1.80% min.)
(2) In the case where wire or strip is used without provision for the addition of Niobium, this value is
replaced by the following value : % Nb + % Ta  0.25
2) For the layers concerned by tube welds, the limits are those given in S 3734 b1) or in the
following table:
(% Nb  % Ta)
% Fe % Co % Si %S %P
%Si
25.00 0.20 max. 0.65 0.015 0.020

10 min.
max. (preferred 0.15 max.) max. max. max.
For the other alloys, the elements to be determined and the limit values to be guaranteed shall be
those specified in the technical reference data sheets in S 2000 for the filler materials used, with the
following requirement:
- the iron content in the deposited metal shall be at most 15.00% for the layer that comes into
contact with primary coolant and the layers concerned by pipe welds.
c) Hardness measurements
In general, the hardness value shall not exceed 350 HV10 in the base metal bonding zone (heat-
affected zone).

with the requirements of S 3700 and bearing in mind the following remarks:
qualification is valid only for the process (111, 122, 141,…) used for the cladding to be repaired.
S 3000 / 54  n° 137-2012
If the repair cladding procedure has been qualified in accordance with S 3700 then one
If a cladding procedure which been qualified in accordance with S 3700 is used with the same
process as the cladding to be repaired then no repair qualification is required,
- the selected excavations of metal shall be representative of the limit conditions allowed by the
specification for carrying out:
. a repair without preheating,
. a repair of the base metal followed by reconstitution of the cladding,
- for manual repairs performed by TIG welding, qualification performed using a filler material rod
with a given nominal diameter, o, also covers immediately adjacent nominal diameters (as per
AFNOR standard NF EN ISO 544).
- the following tests shall be performed:

. non-destructive examinations on the repair of the base metal and the cladding,
. two side bend tests on specimens at right angles to the direction of welding for the repair of
the cladding,
. section for metallographic examinations,
. hardness measurements,
. chemical analysis,
- the test specimens shall be taken in such a way that the repaired portion is located in their central
area.
Note : This simulated repair weld need not be carried out if an equivalent simulated repair has been performed in
connection with buttering.
S 3750 SIMULATED TUBE TO TUBE PLATE WELDS

The welding of the tubes to the cladding shall be simulated either by welding 5 tubes or by making
lines of remelt as described below:
- the process shall be the one employed for welding the tubes with representative parameters (in
the case of TIG, use of the filler metal may be dispensed with),
- 5 circular weld beads (of a size representing the tube welds) shall be executed with a single pass
and 5 more with two superimposed passes (cladding doubly heat affected).
The absence of cracking shall be verified using the same methods as are specified for tube to tube
plate production welds.
Note : The aforementioned tests may be dispensed with when qualifying welding procedures provided that they are
performed when acceptance-testing filler materials and provided that these tests meet the requirements of
S 3000.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 55
S 3760 COMBINATION OF WELDING PROCEDURES

FOR CLADDING
The juxtaposition of cladding produced by two different welding procedures does not constitute a
combination of welding procedures. Each procedure requires to be qualified separately in
accordance with the requirements of S 3710, S 3720 and S 3730.
A cladding produced by superimposed deposits laid down by different welding procedures shall be
subject to special qualification. The test piece shall be produced in accordance with the method
described in the welding procedure. The range of qualification is governed by the requirements
of S 3710.
S 3800 TUBE TO HEAT EXCHANGER

TUBE PLATE WELDS
Steam generators are categorized as heat exchangers.
Weld assemblies of tubes on the tube plate with clearance shall be qualified according to the
requirements of standard NF EN ISO 15614-8.
Weld assemblies of tubes on the tube plate without clearance shall be qualified according to

These requirements relate to the welding of tubes made from austenitic or ferritic stainless steel, or
from nickel base alloy, carbon or low alloy steel to stainless, carbon or low-alloy steel tube plates
which are either unclad or have austenitic-ferritic stainless steel or high nickel base alloy cladding.
S 3811 WORKSHOP
The qualification tests shall be performed in the same workshop as the production welds subject to
the provision of S 6000.

a) The "base metals" referred to here are those corresponding to the area affected by the welding of
the tubes i.e.:
- the tube metal,
- the metal of that part of the plate or its cladding affected by the welding of the tubes.
The welding procedure is approved only for "base metals" with an identical specified chemical
composition.
S 3000 / 56  n° 137-2012
However, all non-stabilized austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steels which meet the
requirements relating to intergranual corrosion* shall be considered to be equivalent, subject to
the following reservation: in the case of a welding qualification test piece with 18-10 type filler
metal (without Mo) and with "base metal" of the same type, the qualification may not be
extended to the welding of 18-10-2 type steels (with Mo).
Base metals produced by different steelmaking, manufacturing or cladding processes are
accepted as equivalent.
* As defined in Annex S I.
b) When two base metals considered to be non-equivalent are joined, the welding procedure shall
be qualified for the combination in question and the qualification shall be valid only for this type
of combination.

a) A welding procedure qualification is valid for the welding of tubes whose nominal diameter or
nominal thickness does not vary by more than ± 10% from the dimensions of the tubes used for
the qualification test coupon.
b) In the case of steam generators, qualification of the welding procedure is only valid for the
dimensions (diameter and thickness) of the tubes used for this qualification, within
manufacturing tolerances.
c) The welding procedure ceases to be qualified in the event of a reduction of 10% or more in the
specified width of the ligament between the holes where this is less than the greater of the
following values: 10 mm or 3 times the nominal thickness of the tubes.

The addition, deletion or modification of a welding process, or the modification of the type of
operation (manual, partially mechanical or automatic) shall require a new welding procedure
qualification.

a) The filler materials used for the qualification test coupon shall conform to the acceptance
specifications for the products to be used for the production welds, covered by the qualification.
They shall have the same geometrical characteristics and be of the same grade.
b) In the case of shielded metal arc welding:

- the welding procedure is qualified only for the use of covered electrodes of the same trade
designation and filler metals (wire, rod, etc.) of the same grade as those used for the
qualification coupon. However, a new qualification is not required where use is made of
another filler material conforming to the same procurement specification provided that this
has been qualified in accordance with the provisions of chapter S 5000,
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 57
- the welding procedure is qualified only for electrode diameters not exceeding that used for
the qualification test coupon.
c) The welding procedure ceases to be qualified if one of the following modifications is introduced:
- use, deletion or addition of additional filler metal,
- use or non-use of consumable insert and, where applicable, any change in the specified
chemical composition or shape of the consumable insert,
- in the case of gas-shielded processes, a change in the diameter of the filler wire.
d) The welding procedure ceases to be qualified if one of the following modifications of the
shielding gas is introduced:
- change in the nominal chemical composition of the gas or gaseous mixture,
- modification of the gas flow beyond the specified limits.
S 3816 TYPE OF PREPARATION

The welding procedure ceases to be qualified if one of the following modifications is introduced:
- change from design involving tubes which pass through the plate to one in which the tubes are
socketed into or fit flush against the plates,
- in the case of gas-shielded processes, any geometrical modification in the preparation of the
tubes for welding to tube plates (including line-up clearances),
- addition, elimination or change in the fitup tube expanding procedure. The procedure is
defined by:
. the process (mechanical, expansion ring, roller, etc.),
. the type of machine,
. the adjustment parameter ranges (torque, pressure or number of revolutions).

The welding procedure is qualified only for the basic welding position corresponding to the
qualification test piece.

a) The welding procedure is qualified only for:
- automatic welding machines (same trade designation),
- the type of current (d.c. or a.c.) and the (positive or negative) d.c. polarity,
- the specified ranges of the electrical parameters (I in all cases and U only in the case of
automatic welding),
- the specified range of welding speeds (automatic welding only),
corresponding to the welding procedure qualification.
S 3000 / 58  n° 137-2012
It should be noted that the Surveillance Agent or the Inspector for the qualification test may
stipulate the values of these parameters for the execution of the welds within the limits stated in
the documents describing the qualification and in accordance with the position of the weld used
for the qualification.
b) Qualification of the welding procedure shall be reassessed if the following change is introduced:
- change from a single-pass to a multi-pass weld and vice-versa.

Qualification of the welding procedure shall be reassessed if the following change is introduced:
- an increase in the maximum specified inter-pass temperature or a reduction of the minimum
specified inter-pass temperature.

The base metals and filler materials shall be those used in manufacture or shall be representative of
these within the defined ranges of equivalence.
The coupon representing the tube plate shall be at least 90 mm thick. The holes made in it shall be
representative of a configuration (spacing) of the tube plate used in manufacture. However, the test
piece may be of lesser thickness provided that suitable devices are used to ensure that the thermal
conditions and clamping during the welding operation are representative of those used for
production welds.
S 3822 TYPE OF PREPARATION

The surface of the test coupon shall be prepared and inspected in accordance with the practices
applied in manufacture.
The method of edge preparation shall be representative of that used in manufacture.
The fitting of the tube, the fitup tube expanding procedure, where applicable, and the execution and
inspection of clearances shall be identical to those used in manufacture.

10 tubes at least shall be welded using:
- an automatic welding machine (where applicable) of the same type and brand as that used in
manufacture,
- current generators of the same type (d.c. or a.c.) and having similar static characteristics
(drooping, vertical, horizontal, etc.).
Measurements of the U, I and V parameters shall be made during the qualification test:
- by the continuous automatic recording of U and I in the case of processes using automatic
welding machines and,
- periodically in the case of other automatic processes.
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 59
S 3824 SIMULATED STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT

No simulated stress relieving heat treatment is required.

S 3831 GENERAL
All samples shall be taken after the test piece has undergone the whole range of non-destructive
examinations required by the documents describing the qualification.

The qualification test coupon shall undergo all the non-destructive examinations (visual
examination, liquid penetrant examination, leak test, etc.) applied in manufacture of the weld which
it qualifies and must be acceptable as per class 1 requirements. In the case of leak testing after
welding, a check shall be made to ensure that the fitup tube expansion is not leaktight and does not
invalidate the significance of the test on the weld. The leak test may be dispensed with if a
succession of grinding operations in 0.2 mm steps is carried out on at least 5 tubes.

On each tube, a diametrical section shall be made through the overlap zone of the final pass.
A macro-examination and a micro-examination of the weld bead root shall be performed on the
2 diametrically-opposed zones. In addition, any zone which appears suspect under macro-
examination shall be subjected to micro-examination at sufficient magnification to identify
the defect.
S 3834 RESULTS
a) Visual examination
The following are unacceptable:
- any lack of fusion at the edge of the hole in the plate,
- any lack of fusion at the inside edge of the tube (in the case of socketed tube welds),
- surface pores, cavities, cracks, carbon monoxide porosities,
- tungsten inclusions,
- clear diameter out of specification,
- any undercut at the base of the weld bead on the cladding side.
b) Liquid penetrant examination

- in the weld metal, any indication of whatever dimension,
- in the cladding and the heat-affected zone, indications of a dimension greater than that
specified for tube to tube plate production welds.
S 3000 / 60  n° 137-2012
c) Leak test
No leakage above the limit specified for production welds is acceptable.
d) Metallographic examinations (see figure S 3834)

- If there is a mechanical connection (see F 4423.2.1.d), the mean dimension of the throat on
10 consecutive welded tubes shall not be less than 0.8 e (where 'e' is the nominal tube
thickness) and no individual throat dimension shall be less than 0.66 e.
- Cracks are not permitted, and porosity and inclusions are tolerated only if the minimum leak
path distance remains locally greater than or equal to 0.66 e.
- Discontinuities at the root measuring not more than 0.24 e and at most 0.30 mm shall not be
regarded as disqualifying defects, provided the minimum leak path remains greater than or
equal to 0.66 e.
- Where a succession of grinding operations is performed (see S 3832.1), any porosities or
inclusions shall, in addition, measure less than or equal to 0.2 mm provided that this value
remains compatible with the dimensions ascertained from the transverse sections.
FIGURE S 3834 a) FIGURE S 3834 b)
The throat dimension (a) is the shortest distance between the root of the weld and the external surface of the molten
metal. This value shall take account of any throat porosity, inclusions or discontinuities, in accordance with figure
S 3834 b), with in this case:
a -  di ≥ 0.66 e (e: nominal tube thickness)
Minimum leak path

 -  di ≥ 0.66 e
with  di = sum of diameters of porosities or inclusions (for instance: di = d1 + d2).
FIGURE S 3834
 n° 137-2012 S 3000 / 61

S 3841 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION AND EXECUTION OF TEST PIECES
The conditions of execution and range of qualification are the same as those defined for tube to tube
plate welds (S 3810 - S 3820), subject to the provisions of the following paragraphs.
Each repair procedure to be used in manufacture shall be simulated on at least 6 tubes. Any change
of the model in the same trade mark of one of the automatic welding machines used in the welding
procedure qualification tests for tube to tube plate welds concerned by these repairs does not
invalidate the qualification of the repair procedure.

The following examinations shall be performed on these welds:
- a liquid penetrant examination.
- a destructive test on a diametrical section passing through the repaired area, including macro and
micrographic examinations on the two diametrically opposed areas.
The results of these examinations shall satisfy the same requirements as specified in S 3834.
S 3000 / 62  n° 137-2012
S 4000
QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
AND OPERATORS
S 4100 GENERAL
S 4110 PURPOSE
This chapter covers the rules to be applied for qualifying welders and operators. The qualification
procedure must take place prior to any fabrication work in order to verify that the welders and
operators have the necessary skills to properly execute welds using qualified welding procedures.
Welding procedure operations are defined in S 1500.
In the remainder of the text the term "WELDERS" shall apply also to operators who use a partially
mechanized welding process.
Unless otherwise specified in this section, operators using fully mechanized, robotized or automatic
welding procedures may be qualified in accordance with standard NF EN 1418
The general rules applicable are covered in S 4200. Rules applicable to special cases are covered
in S 4300.
S 4120 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE MANUFACTURER

The Manufacturer shall establish procedures for qualifying welders in accordance with the
requirements of this chapter. No production welding operation shall be undertaken unless the
specified qualifications have been obtained.
In the absence of other conditions (e.g. as stipulated in S 4210), the qualification of welders shall be
established under the Manufacturer's responsibility.
The technical skill of the welders is the responsibility of the Manufacturer.
S 4130 DOCUMENTS TO BE PREPARED

All welder qualification procedures shall be performed by applying a Welding Procedure
Description (as defined in Standard NF EN ISO 15609-1).
 n° 137-2012 S 4000 / 1
S 4140 RENEWAL OF QUALIFICATIONS

The conditions governing the renewal of qualifications as defined in S 4200 also apply to test
coupons and qualifications obtained in compliance with S 4300.
S 4200 GENERAL CASE
S 4210 INTRODUCTION
This subchapter sets out the principles to be applied for qualifying welders to perform fusion
welding operations on steels and nickel base alloys.
These qualification tests shall demonstrate that the welder is able to follow the instructions and that
he has the necessary skill to perform welds to the required level of quality.
Welders shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements stipulated in standard NF EN 287-1
for welding steels and in standard NF EN ISO 9606-4 for welding nickel-base alloys. Inspection
bodies put forward by the Manufacturer and approved by the Contractor may approve these
qualifications.
S 4220 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

S 4221 GENERAL
Standards NF EN 287-1 and NF EN ISO 9606-4 shall be applicable taking into account the
stipulations listed below which amplify or complete those contained in the said standards.
S 4222 SCOPE OF APPLICATION

(§ 1. Scope of application)
The use of procedures other than those covered in the standard is permitted on condition that the
same requirements are met.
(§ 5.2. Welding process)
Any change in the procedural conditions (manual, partially mechanized, mechanized, automatic),
the number of welders acting on the same bead shall require the welder(s) to be re-qualified.
S 4223 GROUPS OF MATERIALS

(§ 5.5.1. of standard NF EN 287-1 and paragraph 5.4 of standard NF EN ISO 9606-4)
Steel grades 16MND5 and 18MND5 shall be classified in group 3 of standard NF EN 287-1.
S 4000 / 2  n° 137-2012
The following nickel base alloys shall be classified in Group 43 of standard NF EN ISO 9606-4:
- Ni Cr 15 Fe (Alloy 600),
- Ni Cr 30 Fe (Alloy 690).
S 4230 RANGE OF APPROVAL

S 4231 GENERAL
This standard requires shall be applied taking into account the limitations and precisions stipulated
in the present chapter.
S 4232 GROUPS OF MATERIALS

(§5.5.2. of standard NF EN 287-1 and § 6.4 of standard NF EN ISO 9606-4)
Welders who perform welds on low-alloy manganese-molybdenum-nickel steels (of types
16MND5, 18MND5 and 20MND5) considered to form part of group 3 shall obtain their
qualification on a group 3 steel.
Welders performing welds on Nickel-base alloys of Group 43 types NiCr 15 Fe (Alloy 600) or
NiCr 30 Fe (Alloy 690) shall obtain their qualification on an alloy which is part of this group.
S 4233 DIMENSIONS
(§ 5.7 of standard NF EN 287-1 and § 5.6 of standard NF EN ISO 9606-4)
In the case of qualification for repairs of welds and of cast parts or on the edge of the groove, the
welder shall be qualified for all repair depths which are less than the maximum depth stated in table
4 of standard NF EN 287-1 or table 1 of standard NF EN ISO 9606.4.
For full-penetration welded joints of thickness above 50 mm executed manually, the range of
approval in thickness shall be limited to 5 mm and 2 t (where t is the qualification thickness) or to
5 mm and 2 t + h (where h is as defined in figure S 4233).
FIGURE S 4233
EXAMPLE OF POSITIONING PLATES
Note: For surface weld passes the positioning plates must be removed
 n° 137-2012 S 4000 / 3
S 4234 TYPES OF WELD

The following paragraphs of the standards shall apply with the following additions.
(§ 5.4 and 5.7. of standard NF EN 287-1 and § 6.3 of standard NF EN ISO 9606-4)
a) A qualification obtained on a butt weld shall also qualify fillet welds provided the range of
approval defined in this section (S 4200) is met regarding the thickness, diameter, type of weld,
base metal, filler material and welding position, with the following additional requirements:
- For tube fillet welds, the range of approval for diameter applies to the external diameter of the
inserted tube.
- For a full penetration T-butt joint in plate, the range of approval for thickness applies to the
thickness of the bevelled plate.
- in the case of assemblies which are not fully penetrated (plate and pipe), the range of approval
for thickness applies to the thinnest material.
In addition, a qualification obtained on a partial penetration tube or plate fillet weld does not
cover full penetration fillet welds.
b) If a consumable insert ring is used, any change in shape or cross-section shall require a new
qualification test.
c) § 5.4 c) of standard NF EN 287-1 is replaced by:

Full penetration butt-welded joints on tubes shall also qualify nozzles set at an angle ≥ 60° with
the same range of approval as given in tables 1 to 8. In the case of a branch pipe weld, the range
of approval is based on the outside diameter of the nozzle tube.
S 4235 EXAMINATION AND TEST METHODS

Each qualification test coupon with full-penetration butt welds shall be subjected to radiographic
examination.
Fillet weld qualification test coupons shall be subjected to macroscopic examination in accordance
with the requirements of the applicable standard with, for the qualification of steel welders, the
additional requirement that one of the macroscopic test specimen shall be taken in the area where
the weld is interrupted or restarted.
S 4236 PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION

(§ 9 of standard NF EN 287-1 and § 10 of standard NF EN ISO 9606-4)
The requirements of standard NF EN 287-1 regarding validity duration and renewal conditions may
replace those of standard NF EN ISO 9606-4.
A computer system which tracks a welder's work may be substituted for the signature of the
certificate after 6 months provided that it meets the traceability necessary for renewal requirements.
S 4000 / 4  n° 137-2012
The renewal file shall identify the test pieces executed by the welder. If qualification cannot be
renewed in accordance with paragraph 9.3 d) of standard NF EN 287-1, the prolongation shall be
limited to the range covered by the welds performed during the previous 6 months and which meet
the requirements of paragraphs 9.3 a) b) c) of standard NF EN 287-1; a new report shall be
necessary.
The renewal conditions shall also be applicable to representative test coupons. For example,
producing a branch pipe weld will be valid for renewal of both the butt joint normally required (on
condition that the branch connection has been the subject of a volumetric inspection) and of the
representative test coupon, where required by 6.3 j).
S 4240 ADDITIONAL TEST PIECES

S 4241 GENERAL
In some cases the requirements of the standard shall be supplemented by additional tests, as
stipulated in the present chapter.
S 4242 REPRESENTATIVE TEST PIECE OF NOZZLES

As per the standard, restricted to manual operations only.
j) qualification of one representative test coupon is required:
- for full-penetration nozzle assemblies for which the ratio of diameters D1/D2 is less than 5
(where D1 is the outside diameter of the support tube and D2 is the outside diameter of the
nozzle),
- for assemblies with nozzles set at less than 60° (angle formed by the tube axis - or the plane of
the support plate - and the axis of the nozzle).
S 4243 TESTING OF THE REPRESENTATIVE TEST PIECE

The following inspections shall be performed on nozzle test coupons:
- visual examination,
- radiographic or ultrasonic examination. However, 4 macrographic cross-sections offset at 90°
may be used instead of volumetric inspections where it is impossible to perform the latter, and for
diameters less than 120 mm.
The criteria to be satisfied are those stipulated in § 7 of standard NF EN 287-1 or § 8 of standard
NF EN ISO 9606-4.
S 4244 RANGE OF APPROVAL FOR REPRESENTATIVE

TEST PIECE OF NOZZLES
The range of approval of a representative test piece is as defined in S 4200 with respect to the
thickness, diameters, types of joint, base and filler metals, and welding position, with the following
provisions:
 n° 137-2012 S 4000 / 5
- the thickness "t" to be considered is:

 the thickness of the nozzle in the case of set-on nozzles,
 the thickness of the support tube or plate in the case of set-in or back-welded nozzles,
- the diameter "D" to be considered is the external diameter of the nozzle,

- the qualification ratio D1/D2 shall cover the upper manufacturing ratios,
- a qualification performed with nozzles set at an angle  shall be valid also for nozzle joints at
angles greater than ,
- the arrangements regarding plate butt coupons (Table 8 in standard NF EN 287-1 or Table 3 of
standard NF EN ISO 9606-4) are extended to cover nozzle welds,
- the range of approval of weld positions is shown in Table S 4244.
TABLE S 4244
RANGE OF APPROVAL OF BRANCH PIPE WELDS DEPENDING UPON POSITION
Key: Reading from left to right.
* coupon produced during qualification

X qualification extends to this position or coupon
- qualification does not extend to this position or coupon
S 4300 SPECIAL CASES
A welder or operator who has passed the qualification tests for a welding procedure shall be
qualified to use that procedure within the limits set by the terms of chapter S 4300.
S 4000 / 6  n° 137-2012
S 4310 CLADDING AND BUTTERING BY FUSION

OF AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS STEEL
AND NICKEL-BASE ALLOY
The general provisions of this chapter apply (S 4000 to S 4200) subject to the following provisions:
S 4311 EXECUTION OF THE QUALIFICATION TEST PIECE

The test specimen shall have a thickness equal to the thickness of the workpiece to be clad during
manufacture, or shall be at least 50 mm thick if the thickness of the workpiece is greater than
50 mm.
In the case of buttering, a butt weld 20 mm thick or greater shall be executed on a buttered
workpiece. Inspections and tests on the complete weld shall be performed in compliance
with S 4200.
The range of approval for the buttering shall be in compliance with the requirements S 4200 apart
from those concerning the shape (thickness and diameter) for which no restrictions apply.

Liquid penetrant and ultrasonic examinations shall be performed in accordance with the documents
specifying the (highest-level) conditions of cladding or buttering during manufacture.

S 4313.1 Bend tests
Number of test specimens: 2 side bends.
a) Sampling
Regardless of the thickness of the cladding or buttering, test specimens shall be taken at right angles
to the direction of welding.
The dimensions for cladding shall be: a thickness 10 mm and a min. width of 30 mm including the
full thickness of the cladding. The dimensions for buttering shall be a thickness of 10 mm thick and
a width that covers the full thickness of the qualification test piece
b) Procedure: see SI 230.

c) Acceptance criteria
There should be no blatant cracks; any isolated cracking, porosity or inclusion shall not exceed
3 mm in length.
 n° 137-2012 S 4000 / 7
S 4313.2 Macrographic and microscopic examination

Carried out on a cross-section of the cladding and encompassing several weld beads both in the first
and subsequent layers, the purpose of this examination is to verify compliance with adopted overlap
conditions, the absence of any fissures or cracks, any lack of penetration or bonding to the base
steel, and any incomplete fusion and any porosity or inclusion unacceptable to the test of soundness
of the weld.
Should the macrographic examination reveal any suspect area, a complementary microscopic
examination shall be carried out in order to remove any doubts concerning the indication observed
(inclusion, unsoundness, crack, structural feature).
S 4313.3 Chemical analysis

a) Stainless steel cladding only
Chemical analysis of the cladding is performed only in the case of manual metal-arc welding
with covered electrode (111).
The chemical composition determined from metal chips taken from a depth of 2 mm from the
skin of the minimum qualified cladding thickness shall lie within the following limits:
% C  0.035 (preferred value < 0.030)
A carbon content in excess of 0.035 %, though not greater than 0.040%, may be tolerated
provided that the accelerated intergranular corrosion tests give satisfactory results and provided
also that the chromium content is greater than 19.00%.
b) Stainless steel buttering only

In the case of buttering on alloyed or unalloyed steel, a sample for chemical analysis shall be
taken from a normal part of the first layer of deposited metal. The required values are:
- Cr  17.00 %
- Ni  9.00%
S 4320 WELDING OF HEAT EXCHANGER OR

STEAM GENERATOR TUBES TO TUBE PLATE
The conditions governing the qualification of welders and operators for this type of weld are
identical to those specified for the welding procedure qualification with regard to the scope of the
qualification and the execution and testing of the test coupons, subject to the provisions of
paragraphs S 4321 and S 4322.
S 4000 / 8  n° 137-2012
S 4321 RANGE OF APPROVAL

a) Base metal: grade
The base metals referred to here are those corresponding to the area of the tube welds, i.e.:
- that of the tube,
- that of the tube plate or its cladding involved in the tube weld.
The provisions of paragraph S 4200 are applicable.
b) Base metal: shape and dimensions

For welders, the provisions of paragraph S 3813 a) are applicable, steam generators included.
For welding operators, this variable is not to be taken into account.
c) Welding process
The provisions of 3814 are applicable.
d) Filler materials and protective media

For welders, the provisions of paragraph S 3815 are applicable. For welding operators, only the
provisions of paragraphs S 3815 a) and S 3815 c) 1st dash are applicable.
e) Type of preparation
For welders, the provisions of paragraph S 3816 1st dash and 2nd dash are applicable. For
welding operators, this variable is not to be taken into account.
f) Welding position and direction

The provisions of S 3817 are applicable.
g) Welding technique and parameters

For welders, the provisions of paragraph S 3818 are applicable. For welding operators, only the
trade designation of the automatic welding machine is a main variable, with the exception of
automatic welding machines on which the operator cannot adjust any of the electrical
parameters.
S 4322 EXECUTION OF THE QUALIFICATION TEST PIECE

- The number of tubes to be welded is 6 per welder or operator.
- Two macrographic examinations per tube shall be carried out on a diametrical section passing
through the overlap zone of the final pass.
Nota : As regards the qualification of welders for localized repairs, qualification may be based on a simulated repair to
test coupons in accordance with S 4321 and S 4322 and involving the repair of a hollow extending slightly
below the level of the weld root. The section for micrographic examination shall pass through the repaired zone.
This qualification does not cover the qualification for complete tube-to-plate welds.
 n° 137-2012 S 4000 / 9
S 4330 SPECIFIC SEAL WELDS

(CANOPY, OMEGA JOINTS ETC.)
The conditions governing the qualification of welders and operators for this type of weld are
identical to those specified for the welding procedure qualification with regard to the scope of the
qualification and execution and testing of the test coupons, subject to the following remarks:
- no section is required for macrographic (or microscopic) examination, a visual examination of
the internal and external faces shall be carried out to verify the penetration of the weld,
- one test per welder or operator shall be performed.
S 4340 PIPE SOCKET WELDS

The qualification conditions for welders of this type of joint are identical to those defined for
qualification of the welding procedure with respect to the range of approval of the qualification, and
execution and examination of the test coupons, subject to the following remarks:
- no line of hardness measurement is necessary; a macrographic examination shall be performed
in accordance with S 4200,
- one test per welder or welding operator shall be performed,
- qualification shall be valid for all diameters and thicknesses equal to or greater than those of the
qualification coupon,
- qualification shall be valid for all filler metal diameters,
- for base metals and filler materials, the range of approval of the qualification is that defined
in S 4200.
S 4350 FRICTION WELDING

The operator qualification conditions for this type of welding are identical to those defined for the
qualification of the welding procedure, regarding the range of approval of the qualification, the
welding process and the non-destructive examination of the test coupons, subject the following
remarks:
- one test shall be performed per operator,
- the operator's ability to perform the following shall be checked:
. adjust the machine,
. check the appearance of the parts prior to welding,
. load the machine,
. check the recording diagrams,
. check the dimensions of the test coupon.
- no destructive tests are necessary,
S 4000 / 10  n° 137-2012
RCC-M - 2012 Edition Tome IV - S
S 5000
QUALIFICATION OF FILLER MATERIALS
S 5100 GENERAL
S 5110 SCOPE
1) This chapter deals with the qualification tests performed on filler materials for which a trade
designation qualification is required.
These materials comprise:
- powedered fluxes (associated with wire or strip electrode of given chemical composition),
- flux-cored wires, and
- covered electrode.
Qualification tests performed on filler materials in conformity with a previous edition of the
present Code are acknowledged for the present edition provided it can be demonstrated that the
acceptance results comply with the requirements of the new edition.
2) The qualification of filler materials comprises two parts, the first relating to the Supplier of the
material and the second to the Manufacturer who uses the material.
a) Suppliers of welding materials shall issue a qualification data sheet for the undiluted material
corresponding to each trade designation of this material.
b) The Manufacturer shall perform a reduced series of tests on a standard test coupon. The
welding procedure qualification test covers this series of tests and renders unnecessary the test
on a standard test coupon.
S 5120 DEFINITIONS OF LOTS

The filler materials used for performing the qualification tests shall be manufactured under the
normal manufacturing conditions for materials of the brand which is to be qualified.
The manufacturing conditions shall enable lots to be accurately identified so as to guarantee as far
as possible the homogeneity of each lot.
The Supplier of the filler materials shall give details of the variables affecting the manufacturing
process which, when changed, entail alteration of the reference of the lot. Any modification of the
following variables shall necessitate a change of reference:
- dimension of product: diameter,
 n° 137-2012 S 5000 / 1
- number of the heat used for the product: wire, strip electrode,
- number of the lot of powder or covering material, the lot being determined by the Supplier of
filler materials on the basis of the conditions of supply governing the various component
materials and the conditions under which the mixture is manufactured.
Products intended for qualification testing shall be taken from the lots described above.

S 5131 DESCRIPTION OF TESTS
The qualification tests comprise the following:
1) tests on the products (as delivered),
2) tests on the weld metal, outside the dilution zone and in the flat position.
The number of lots of products and the number of test welds shall be sufficient (5 at least; the
number to be determined in the case of new products) to substantiate the characteristics
guaranteed by the Supplier of filler materials,
3) tests on a standard test coupon.
S 5132 METHOD
a) The tests on the filler materials and on the weld metal outside the dilution zone shall be
performed by the Supplier of the materials which are to be qualified.
The tests on a standard test coupon shall be carried out by a fabricating workshop qualified in
accordance with S 6000 and using filler materials acceptance tested in accordance with S 2000.
The conditions under which the weld metal is laid down and the tests are performed, as well as
the results to be obtained, shall comply with the requirements set out in this chapter.
b) As regards to the qualification tests carried out on a standard test coupon, account shall be taken
of the dimensions of all the covered electrode diameters used and the dimensions of the flux-
cored wire or wire associated with the fluxes to be qualified.
c) Where the materials are intended for cladding (austenitic stainless steel and nickel-base alloy),
the tests shall be performed in accordance with S 3600 and S 3700.
For strip electrodes, as widths shall be considered, there shall be no equivalence between widths.
d) Where products are intended for buttering, the tests on a standard test coupon shall be performed
in accordance with S 3500.
e) Materials used for backing passes which are subsequently removed need not be subjected to the
tests on a standard test coupon.
S 5000 / 2  n° 137-2012
S 5140 QUALIFICATION RECORD AND REPORT

S 5141 QUALIFICATION RECORD
This record comprises the following:
- a qualification data sheet prepared by the Supplier of filler materials on the basis of tests carried
out on the filler materials and on the weld metal outside the dilution zone (S 5131.1 and 2),
- a qualification certificate issued by the Manufacturer on the basis of the tests performed on a
standard test coupon or in accordance with the welding procedure qualification report.
S 5142 QUALIFICATION DATA SHEET

The qualification data sheet prepared by the Supplier of filler materials shall include:
a) the name of the Supplier and the workshop,
b) the type of the filler material and its trade and standardized designation in accordance
with S 2000,
c) the guaranteed geometrical, physical and chemical characteristics of the filler material. This
includes in particular the BONISZEWSKI basic index (B) of the fluxes and electrode coverings
according to the formula:
Basic index:
Ca 0  Mg 0  Ba 0  CaF2  Na 2 0  K 2 0  0.5 ( Mn 0  Fe 0 )
Si 0 2  0.5 ( AL 2 0 3  Ti 0 2  Zr 0 2 )
in which the elements are expressed in their molecular concentration,
d) the guaranteed mechanical and chemical characteristics of the weld metal in the flat position and
outside the dilution zone (with particular attention to the product diameters in question and the
relevant ranges of the welding parameters I, U, V, etc.),
e) limits on condition of use:

- group of base materials,
- the welding process and procedure, including the type of current, the polarity and the range of
parameters: I (A), U (V) and V (cm/min.) for automatic welding only,
- inter-pass temperature limits, stress relieving heat treatments and other postweld heat
treatments (where applicable),
- types of weld: strength weld (filling, root pass, cladding, etc.),
- position and direction of welding,
- drying (temperature, duration, permissible number of cycles),

- storage:
. maximum storage period beyond which renewed drying or a fresh acceptance test is
necessary,
 n° 137-2012 S 5000 / 3
. maximum period between the opening of the packing (or the end of drying) and the use of
the material, beyond which the renewed drying is necessary before use,
. conditions for the recycling of powdered flux, if any.
For the purpose of defining the conditions of use, reference may be made to welding procedure
specifications provided that these cover all the points mentioned above,
f) the definition of lots of material,
g) packaging, packing and marking.
S 5143 QUALIFICATION CERTIFICATE

The qualification certificate issued by the Manufacturer shall define the conditions under which the
tests of the standard test coupon or of the welding procedure qualification were carried out and the
results obtained. It shall make reference to the aforementioned data sheet and shall specify the limits
of validity of the qualification of the material.
S 5200 LIMITS OF VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION
The qualification (of the trade designation) of a filler material is approved only within the limits
defined by the following variables relating to the use of this filler material.
Furthermore, any change in the manufacture of the welding materials relating to the raw materials
used, the composition of the flux and the coverings, the manufacturing process etc., imposes on the
Supplier of welding materials an obligation to notify the Manufacturer (User).
If this change involves a modification of the characteristics of the welding material and its condition
of use, its trade designation shall be changed and new qualification tests shall be performed.
S 5210 GRADE AND THICKNESS OF BASE METAL

a) Grade
Paragraphs S 3200, S3312, S 3412, S 3500, S 3612 and S 3712 define the grades of material to
be used for the standard test coupons and the corresponding groups of materials covered by the
qualification.
b) Thickness
THICKNESS OF THE STANDARD

QUALIFIED THICKNESS
TEST COUPON
20 to 25 mm for manual welding

50 mm or less
30 to 40 mm for automatic welding
50 to 60 mm All thickness
S 5000 / 4  n° 137-2012
c) Extension of the limits of qualification

A change of grade or an extension of the thickness range requires only new tests on a standard
test coupon.
S 5220 GEOMETRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

OF WELDING MATERIALS
a) For the qualification tests performed on welding material and on the metal outside the dilution
zone:
- For each wire or flux-cored wire diameter and for each strip electrode width, a complete series
of qualification tests shall be performed for the flux-cored wire and the flux associated with
these products (wire or strip electrode of the same dimensions meeting the requirements of the
same acceptance specification).
- Qualification of a trade designation for a covered electrode of a given diameter included
between an upper and a lower diameter to standard NF EN ISO 544 is granted provided that
these two limiting diameters are themselves qualified.
b) For the standard test coupons, see S 5132 b).
S 5230 WELDING PROCESS AND TYPE OF CURRENT

Any change in the welding process, in the type of current (d.c. or a.c.) or in the d.c. polarity
(positive or negative) requires repetition of the qualification test except for the tests performed on
the products.
S 5240 TYPE OF WELD

A material qualified for cladding is not qualified for strength welds. A material qualified for strength
weld is qualified for cladding provided that the requirements relating to chemical composition
are satisfied.
S 5250 WELDING POSITION AND DIRECTION

a) A material is qualified for a welding position if it has undergone qualification tests for the
position in question. No equivalence is allowed between the four fundamental welding positions
(defined in S 4000). On the other hand, all intermediate positions between two qualified
fundamental positions are also qualified.
b) Extension of limits of qualification

Provided that this is justified by appropriate tests performed on a test coupon, qualification of a
welding material in a position other than the flat position may be extended to the flat position.
 n° 137-2012 S 5000 / 5
S 5260 WELDING PARAMETERS

Renewal of qualification shall be required for any increase:
- in specified amperage (I) in manual welding,
- in specified amperage (I) or voltage (U) in semi-automatic welding,
- in specified maximum heat input UI/v, calculated from the specified U, I and v (travel speed), in
automatic welding,
In general, for automatic welding, tests on a standard coupon shall be performed with maximum
heat input.
S 5270 ASSOCIATED HEAT TREATMENTS

Requalification is required in the event of:
a) any increase in the maximum specified interpass temperature, or any reduction in the specified
preheat temperature,
b) any modifications made to the simulated stress-relieving heat treatment, and other postweld heat
treatments which affect the range of approval of the welding procedure qualification concerned.
S 5300 QUALIFICATION TESTS FOR CARBON AND

LOW-ALLOY STEEL FILLER MATERIALS

S 5311 TESTS ON PRODUCT
a) Geometrical test
The geometrical diameter and length characteristics of 5 covered electrodes selected at random
shall be verified in accordance with the requirement of standard NF EN ISO 544.
In the case of a spool of flux-cored wire, the dimensional verification of the product shall be
performed on three sections separated from each other by a distance of 0.5 m.
b) Physical tests
In the case of flux-cored wires, the ease with which the product unwinds and travels through the
welding machine shall be verified.
S 5312 TESTS ON THE WELD METAL OUTSIDE THE DILUTION ZONE

The tests to be performed comprise the following:
- chemical analysis,
S 5000 / 6  n° 137-2012
- tensile tests at room temperature,

- tensile test at high temperature,
- determination of the energy absorbed by breakage KV at the following temperatures: 0°C
and/or - 20°C.
S 5313 TESTS ON THE TEST COUPON

The execution of the test coupon, the non-destructive examination tests (applying the criteria
corresponding to the highest-level requirements applicable to the use of the product concerned), the
sampling and the tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of chapter S 3000,
that is to say in particular, after the whole range of intended heat treatments has been carried out.
- radiographic examination or ultrasonic and liquid penetrant examinations,
- macrographic examinations and, on suspect areas, microscopic examination in accordance with
S 3000 and Annex S I,
- chemical analysis of the weld metal in the extension of the tensile test specimen,
- face bend test (1 test specimen),
- root bend test (1 test specimen),
- side bend test (1 test specimen),
- longitudinal tensile test at room temperature in the weld metal (1 cylindrical test specimen at the
axis of the weld),
- tensile test at room temperature across the weld (a series of rectangular test specimens to be
taken over the whole thickness of the weld),
- longitudinal tensile test at high temperature as stipulated in annex S I 120 in the weld metal
(1 cylindrical test specimen on the axis of the weld),
- KV impact tests on the weld metal at the following test temperatures: 0°C and/or - 20°C.
Reference may be made to the documents describing the welding procedure qualification.
S 5320 RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED

These shall comply with the requirements of S 3200 (having regard to S 2540 for the tests
performed on the weld metal outside the dilution zone) for the tests concerned, subject to the
following additional remarks and requirements:
- the coverings and flux shall be basic B  1 (preferably B  2),
- the sulphur and phosphorous contents of the weld metal shall be less than 0.035%,
- the macrographic and microscopic examination (of suspect zones) shall be documented by
photographs attached on the test reports.
 n° 137-2012 S 5000 / 7
S 5400 QUALIFICATION TESTS FOR AUSTENITIC

OR AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC STAINLESS
STEEL FILLER MATERIALS
These are materials giving a low ferrite content in the weld metal in the as-welded condition.

The qualification tests comprise the following tests:
S 5411 TEST ON PRODUCTS

a) Geometrical tests
The geometrical diameter and length characteristics of 5 covered electrodes selected at random
shall be verified in accordance with the requirement of standard NF EN ISO 544.
In the case of a spool of flux-cored wire, the dimensional verification of the product shall be
performed on three sections separated from each other by a distance of 0.5 m.
b) Physical tests
In the case of flux-cored wires, the ease with which the product unwinds and travels through the
welding machine shall be verified.

- liquid penetrant examination,
- determination of the ferrite content in accordance with S 2000,
- intergranular corrosion tests in accordance with Annex S I.
These tests are not required for materials of 20/10 type with low carbon provided that
C  0.035% and Cr  19.00%, and that Cr  17.00% in the case of low-carbon 18/10/3 type
materials,
- tensile test at room temperature,
- determination of the energy absorbed by breakage KV at room temperature,
- cracking test, where appropriate.
S 5000 / 8  n° 137-2012

The execution of the test coupon, the non-destructive examinations (applying the criteria
corresponding to the highest-level requirements applicable to the use of the product concerned), the
sampling and the tests shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of chapter S 3000. The
tests to be performed comprise the following:
- radiographic examination and liquid penetrant examination,
- macrographic examinations and microscopic examination of suspect areas in accordance with
S 3000 and Annex S I,
- chemical analysis of the weld metal in the extension of the tensile test specimen,
- face bend test (1 test specimen),
- root bend test (1 test specimen),
- side bend test (1 test specimen),
- longitudinal tensile test at room temperature in the weld metal (1 cylindrical test specimen on the
axis of the weld),
- longitudinal tensile test at room temperature across the weld (a series of rectangular test
specimens to be taken over the whole thickness of the weld),
- longitudinal tensile test at high temperature as stipulated in annex S I 120 in the weld metal
(1 cylindrical test specimen on the axis of the weld),
- KV impact test at room temperature on the weld metal.
Reference may be made to the documents describing the welding procedure qualification.

These shall comply with the requirements of S 3200 (having regard to S 2540 for the tests
performed on the weld metal outside the dilution zone) for the tests concerned. The macrographic
and microscopic examinations (of suspect zones) shall be documented by photographs attached to
the test reports.
S 5500 WELDING MATERIAL FOR AUSTENITIC-FERRITIC

STAINLESS STEEL CLADDING

S 5511 TESTS ON PRODUCTS

 n° 137-2012 S 5000 / 9

The tests to be performed are the following:
- determination of the ferrite content in accordance with S 2000,
- intergranular corrosion tests in accordance with annex SI. These tests are not required if
C  0.035% and Cr  19.00%.

The execution of the test coupon, the non-destructive examinations, the sampling and the tests shall
be carried out in accordance with S 3600.

These shall comply with S 3634 (having regard to S 2540 for the tests on the weld metal outside the
dilution zone) for the tests concerned.
S 5600 WELDING MATERIALS FOR NICKEL-BASE

ALLOY STRENGTH WELDS

S 5611 TEST ON PRODUCTS

S 5612 TESTS ON THE DEPOSITED METAL OUTSIDE

THE DILUTION ZONE
- tensile test at room temperature,
- KV impact test at room temperature,
- cracking test where appropriate.
S 5000 / 10  n° 137-2012


S 5700 QUALIFICATION TEST FOR FILLER MATERIALS

FOR NICKEL-BASE ALLOY CLADDING

The qualification tests comprise the following tests.
S 5711 TESTS ON PRODUCTS


- chemical analysis.

The execution of the test coupon, the non-destructive examinations, the sampling and the tests shall
be performed in accordance with S 3700.

 n° 137-2012 S 5000 / 11
S 5000 / 12  n° 137-2012
S 6000
TECHNICAL QUALIFICATION OF
PRODUCTION WORKSHOPS
S 6100 SCOPE
The purpose of the technical qualification of a production workshop is to evaluate the capacity and
technical resources of this workshop for carrying out welding operations.
S 6200 QUALIFICATION CONDITIONS
The technical qualification of a workshop for the execution of welding work is subject to the
S 6210 INSTALLATION
The workshop must possess suitable facilities for carrying out satisfactory welding work. These
facilities comprise:
a) welding equipment suitable for the welding procedure used and in good working order, properly
equipped places of work (including handling equipment) of the necessary cleanliness according
to the materials used and the classes of components, and premises storage facilities suitable for
the proper preservation and drying of the filler materials heat,
b) heat treatment facilities in good condition and of suitable capacity according to the work to be
done,
c) destructive and non-destructive examination facilities suitable for the inspection to be performed.
If the workshop does not possess the necessary heat treatment or test facilities, it must indicate in
the qualification report (see S 6300) who does the work required, and must guarantee that the
corresponding facilities are satisfactory.
S 6220 PERSONNEL AND SUPERVISION

The welding and test personnel (and their supervisors) must possess the necessary skill and
authorization. They must in general belong to the workshop; temporary outside assistance, duly
qualified according to RCC-M requirements, will nevertheless be allowed.
 n° 137-2012 S 6000 / 1
S 6230 EXPERIENCE
S 6231 GENERAL CASE
The workshop must normally have experience in carrying out jobs involving comparable welding
procedures, with regard to:
- the nature of the material (low alloy steels, austenitic stainless steels, etc.),
- the shapes (plates, pipes ...) and dimensions (range of thickness, etc.),
- the welding processes, the types of equipment for automatic purposes,
- the use of heat treatments,
- the conduct of non-destructive examinations.
In the absence of such experience, the performance of welding procedure qualification tests may
fulfil this function.
S 6232 DEMONSTRATION THAT THE LEVEL

OF SKILL HAS BEEN MAINTAINED
For welds listed in B 4231 and C 4231, the qualification report (see S 6300) shall also define sets of
welding procedures comprising:
- the same process and operating system (manual, partially mechanized, automatic),
- base metal belonging to the same family and defined as follows:
. carbon and low alloy steels used without preheating,
. carbon and low alloy steels used with preheating,
. austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steels
. nickel base alloys
- deposited metal belonging to the same family and defined as follows:
. carbon and low alloy steels,
. stainless steels and nickel base alloys.
For these welds, the qualification report shall only allow application of welding procedures
belonging to a group for which the last application does not exceed three years.
However, a welding procedure belonging to a set that does not involve preheating can be performed by
reference to a set performed with preheating for which the last application does not exceed three years.
The test coupons corresponding to the following welds shall be individually followed-up in the
welding procedure applications:
- heater welds on pressurizer head
- penetration welds on vessel bottom head
- adapter welds on vessel closure head
- Canopy and omega type welds for mechanisms
S 6000 / 2  n° 137-2012
- tube welds on steam generator heat exchanger plates

- dissimilar metal welds on nozzles.
Where a welding procedure has not been used for more than three years, a test assembly identical to
the one used for the qualification shall be performed before manufacture. It may be used for re-
qualifying a welder or as a test coupon.
S 6300 QUALIFICATION REPORT
S 6310 GENERAL CASE

Before the start of the welding operations, a qualification report shall be issued by the Manufacturer
attesting that the conditions of S 6200 are satisfied.
This report must indicate :
- the name of the workshop,
- the name of the person responsible for the qualification of the workshop ,
- the welding equipment,
- the heat treatment facilities,
- the non-destructive examination and destructive testing facilities and equipment,
- the list of technical skills (S 6220),
- the welding procedures used and constituting the experience of the workshop.
S 6320 DEMONSTRATION THAT THE LEVEL OF

SKILL HAS BEEN MAINTAINED
Where the level of skill has to be verified, as stipulated in S 6232, the qualification report shall
either contain a list or make reference to a document specifying the various sets of welding
procedures for which the last application does not exceed three years (see example on table S 6320).
This check on the level of skill can be performed once a year by revision of the document and by
ensuring that the last mentioned performance does not date back more than two years. For this
check, all occasions on which the procedure was performed can be listed not just those stipulated in
the contractual requirements or the applicable manufacturing documents (ASME, RCC-M, KTA,
Standards, etc.).
However, these applications of the procedure shall have been performed under the Quality
Assurance regulations and have been the subject of comparable non-destructive testing procedures
(extent, volumetric or surface examinations).
Where it cannot be demonstrated that the level of skill has been maintained for a given set of
welding procedures (as per S 6232), because the previous application dates back further than three
years, it is forbidden to use this set of welding procedures. However, this set can be reintroduced
after a new qualification has been performed or in anticipation of a test coupon (prior to
manufacture) where required.
 n° 137-2012 S 6000 / 3
TABLE S 6320
EXAMPLE OF A WELDING PROCEDURE DEMONSTRATING

THAT THE WORSHOP'S LEVEL OF SKILL HAS BEEN MAINTAINED
BASE METAL
FILLER Carbon and Carbon and

PROCESS Austenitic and
MATERIAL low alloy steels low alloy steels Nickel base
austenitic-ferritic
without with alloys
stainless steels
preheating preheating
 
Carbon and low
Manual alloy steels
process with
covered Stainless steels
electrodes and nickel base
alloys
  

Carbon and low
alloy steels
Wire / Flux
Stainless steels
and nickel base
alloys

Stainless steels
Strip / Flux and nickel base
alloys

 
Carbon and low
alloy steels
Stainless steels
 
Manual
and nickel base
TIG
alloys

Without filler
metal
Carbon and low

alloy steels
Stainless steels

Automatic
and nickel base
TIG
alloys

Without filler
metal
 : operating date: less than two years (and AQ reference)
S 6000 / 4  n° 137-2012
S 6400 WORKSHOP QUALIFICATION PERIOD
S 6410 QUALIFICATION PERIOD

The qualification of a workshop remains valid as long as no major modification is made to the
existing arrangements. Otherwise, the corresponding qualification report must be amended
accordingly.
S 6420 INVALIDATION OF THE QUALIFICATION

The qualification of a workshop shall be invalidated if a doubt arises regarding the validity of such
qualification because of a serious fault discovered in its production welds.
S 6500 TRANSFER OF WELDING

PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
For a welding procedure qualification test conducted at a workshop or site to be extended to another
workshop or site belonging to the same Manufacturer, this new workshop or site must satisfy the
conditions required in S 6200. In no case may such transfer be made from one Manufacturer to
another.
The welding procedure qualifications performed at a workshop or site must correspond to
production welds normally executed respectively at such workshop or site.
Moreover, in addition to the provisions of the first subparagraph of this paragraph, the Manufacturer
shall indicate in a report the arrangements made (technical precautions and supervision) to ensure
the continuity of the skill and experience following the transfer.
 n° 137-2012 S 6000 / 5
S 6000 / 6  n° 137-2012
S 7000
PRODUCTION WELDS
S 7100 GENERAL
S 7110 SCOPE
a) This chapter covers the welding operations carried out during the manufacture and erection of the
mechanical equipment of pressurized water nuclear plant.
b) By "welding operations" are meant:

- the preparation of the surfaces to be welded,
- the use of the filler materials,
- the use of the welding processes for:
. the production welds,
. equipment repairs,
- the finishing of production welds and repairs,
- the associated heat treatments (pre-heating, post-heating, stress relieving heat treatments),
- the conditions governing the preparation of production weld test coupon.
c) The other operations involved in welding such as the choice of joints, the cutting, the aligning of
the parts and the associated examinations are defined in SECTIONS I and V.
S 7120 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

All welding operations (joints, cladding, repairs) shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of a set of duly identified documents, which shall satisfy the requirements of the
applicable paragraphs and include at least:
- the welding procedure specification used,
- the various instructions prepared by the Manufacturer for the workshop personnel and in
particular the welders and welding operators, for the successful completion of the welding
operations.
After the execution of a welding operation, a production weld data sheet shall be issued
(see S 7470).
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 1
S 7200 STORAGE AND USE OF

THE WELDING MATERIALS
S 7210 STORAGE CONDITIONS

The storage conditions shall be such that the properties of the materials are preserved. For this
purpose, the materials shall be stored in an enclosed dry place, heated if necessary. The
Manufacturer is responsible for fixing the minimum temperature and the maximum relative
humidity required. The qualification data sheet as described in S 5000 must be respected.
S 7211 ENTRY INTO STORAGE

Each package of acceptance-tested materials shall be adequately identified (e.g. with a stamp) on
entry in storage. By "Package" is meant: the package of electrodes (or a larger package containing
several individually packaged units) a coil or spool or bundle of wire, sack or container of flux.
Materials acceptance-tested after entry into store shall be identified following each acceptance-
testing.
S 7212 STORAGE PERIOD

If the same place is used for the storage of acceptance-tested products and those awaiting
acceptance-testing or other materials, a physical separation shall be made between these products.
A sufficient space may be deemed to constitute a separation.
During storage, products shall remain in their original intact package (subject to S 7221 f). Any
product which has deteriorated or whose identity has been lost shall be discarded.
Particular care shall be taken when handling covered electrodes to prevent any possible damage to
their covering.
S 7213 STOCK CONTROL

The stock control of acceptance-tested products shall provide the following details of each product
lot or batch:
- designation,
- dimensions,
- acceptance-tested quantity taken into store,
- date of acceptance test,
- where applicable, the expiry date (see S 2550),
- lot number of the associated product (e.g. wire flux couple),
- date of removal from store,
- quantity removed,
- reference of the stored release document or note of materials discarded.
S 7000 / 2  n° 137-2012
S 7214 RELEASE FROM STORE

Products shall only be released from store on presentation to the storeman or his assistant of a
document which shall contain at least the following information:
- designation,
- dimensions,
- quantity,
- number of the lot or lots (or Manufacturer's code number*),
- assignation of the products to a given component or weld.
Note : If the documents do not satisfy these requirements, the Quality Control procedure relating to the removal of
products from store shall provide a source for all this information.
* Provided the code number shows the lot number to be clearly identified.
S 7220 USE OF THE WELDING MATERIALS

S 7221 DRYING AND CONSERVATION
a) The Manufacturer's attention is drawn to the fact that he must specify the maximum quantities of
material which may be removed from the store depending on conditions of application and the
methods of storage and distribution used so that the material loses none of it properties.
b) The drying and preservation qualification conditions are indicated by the Supplier (temperature
and holding time) in the qualification data sheet in accordance with S 5000.
c) When specified (see b), the user shall ensure that covered electrodes and fluxes are dried in
ovens reserved for acceptance-tested products.
The covered electrodes are dried after removal from the package, or placed in metal boxes
allowing air to circulate through both ends.
A panel shall be attached to each oven indicating the grade, lot no., and drying conditions of the
product contained.
An oven should only contain products of one grade at a time. However, more than one grade may
be placed in the oven, provided:
- their drying conditions are identical,
- there is a physical separation between them (a space not being considered as a physical
separation).
d) After drying, the electrodes and fluxes are stored in heated containers or cabinets until use.
Electrodes and fluxes in use which have been left for more than 4 hours at room temperature
shall be redried. This operation may only be repeated the number of times indicated in the
qualification data sheet in accordance with S 5000.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 3
e) Each welder shall have a portable container allowing him to keep his electrodes dry.
f) Electrodes and fluxes which have been unpacked and not used may only be put back into store
subject to the above requirements, in particular of S 7211, and according to a procedure which
specifies the means of identification and the new packaging.
S 7222 RECYCLING OF FLUXES

a) Recycling of fluxes is not recommended, particularly for agglomerated fluxes containing metallic
elements (Cr).
b) However, if this technique is used, the following conditions must be satisfied:

- the recycled flux must be mixed with new flux from the same lot, in a proportion not
exceeding 50% of the final mixture,
- before mixing, the recycled flux must have all particles of slag and fines removed by any
appropriate method,
- the Manufacturer must be able to show that the grain size characteristics of the mixed flux
remain within the limits specified by the qualification data sheet in accordance with S 5000.
S 7230 IDENTIFICATION OF THE PRODUCTS DURING WELDING

All products shall be identified at all times during use; for this purpose, the following requirements
shall be respected:
a) Covered electrodes
Each rod shall be marked in accordance with S 2000.
b) Spools of wire
Each spool shall have a clearly visible label indicating at least the grade, the diameter and the lot
number of the wire. Any spool without a label shall be discarded.
c) Wire rod
The grade shall be identified on each rod:
- either by cold stamping a reference code,
- or by marking one end of the wire with a reference colour.
If this second method is used, a panel indicating the conventional colours and their meaning shall
be placed alongside each place of work and welders shall be required to begin welding with the
uncoloured end.
d) Coils of wire and electrode

A label indicating at least the grade and the lot no. shall be attached to one end of the product and
shall remain in position for the duration of the welding operations.
S 7000 / 4  n° 137-2012
e) Flux
A suitable system of identifying the grade and lot shall be provided, to allow the complete
identification of the product at any moment for each flux container.
S 7300 PREPARATION AND EXAMINATION OF EDGES

AND SURFACES FOR WELDING
S 7310 BEVELS
a) The Manufacturer shall choose the shape of the bevels: these shall comply with the design rules
set out in SECTION I and with the welding procedure qualification tests.
b) At the supply boundaries it is necessary, in procurement specifications, to notify the various

component Manufacturers of the shape of the bevels to be prepared. This shall be done in
agreement with the Manufacturer who has to carry out on-site welding.
c) The fairing between two adjacent parts of different thicknesses shall be in accordance with the
provisions of SECTION I. It shall be compatible with the execution of the non-destructive
examinations required for these joints and any additional requirements given in the equipment
specification, as well as with the use of in-service inspection equipment.
S 7320 BEVELLING METHODS

a) The main joints shall preferably be prepared by machining or by thermal cutting and/or by
grinding, in accordance with the requirements of F 3000; shearing is allowed subject to
reservations of F 3200.
b) Pipe bevels shall normally be executed by mechanical machining. However, grinding may be
used for trimming purposes when aligning components on site and for the bevelling of small
diameter pipes.
If the inside diameters are machined, the wall thickness and the joint profile shall satisfy the
requirements of SECTION I.
S 7330 AIR CARBON ARC GOUGING*

a) For gouging ferritic materials, preheating is first carried out under the conditions recommended
for the welding of these materials (see S 1320). However, for low-alloy steels preheating is
recommended whatever the thickness.
b) The edges of grooves (backing runs or cavities) intended for welding shall be carefully finished
mechanically (grinding or other process) to remove any roughness, undercutting or other defects.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 5
c) After the use of this process, all traces of slag spatter shall be carefully removed. When this
process is used, in the vicinity of finished mechanical parts or already cleaned equipment, the
latter shall be protected to prevent any fouling or contamination by the spatter.
If the necessary protective devices cannot be set up, the air carbon arc process shall be
prohibited.
d) For cutting, removal of material and backing runs on austenitic stainless steel, the same
precautions as in c) shall be taken to protect the surfaces adjacent to the equipment from spatter.
The same applies to operations on ferritic steel if these take place in the vicinity of austenitic
stainless steels.
e) After air carbon arc gouging and finishing, and before welding, the areas to be welded shall be
subjected to the non-destructive examinations required for surfaces to be welded.
* This is the combined action of a carbon electrode arc and a jet of compressed air.
S 7340 CONDITIONS OF SURFACES AND EDGES

TO BE WELDED AND OF ADJACENT AREAS
a) The condition of the surface and edges to be welded shall be compatible with the welding
procedure and with the non-destructive examination methods required by this chapter.
b) The areas adjacent to the surfaces and edges to be welded shall have over a sufficient width a
surface finish compatible with the execution of the non-destructive examinations required for
the joints.
S 7350 REPAIRS TO SURFACES AND EDGES TO BE WELDED

The inspections performed before alignment may reveal one or more unacceptable indications
(S 7360) requiring repairs with or without welding.
a) Repair without welding: (reference subchapter F 3600)
Defects may be eliminated by the removal of material (grinding or other mechanical process)
without altering the geometry of the groove in such a way, according to the process used, as to
upset the normal performance of the welding operation.
In this case, the repair is not such as to give rise to the issue of a non-conformance report.
The examinations and acceptance criteria applied after the removal of material are those
specified for bevels and surfaces to be welded (tables S 7363.1 and 2).
b) Repair by welding (reference subchapter S 7600)

In this case, the Manufacturer shall issue a non-conformance report. The welding procedure shall
satisfy the same requirements as those for production welds.
According to the content of the repair, the following non-destructive examinations shall be
performed:
- magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination for carbon or low-alloy steels,
S 7000 / 6  n° 137-2012
- liquid penetrant examinations for austenitic steels,

- ultrasonic examinations for weld metal thicknesses > 5 mm.
Moreover, if the repaired area is not within the examination area of the joint or cladding, it shall
be recorded and tested after heat treatment as specified in tables S 7710 and S 7720.1 to 4, for
welds of the same type.
The locations and dimensions of the repairs shall be recorded, and included in the non-
conformance report.
S 7360 INSPECTION BEFORE ALIGNMENT

S 7361 DIMENSIONAL CHECK
Required for class 1, this check is also recommended for classes 2 and 3.
a) Method
To be defined by the Manufacturer.
b) Extent of the check

Shape of the groove, fairing, thickness, ovality.
c) Time of examination
Preferably to be carried out before the other surface examinations specified in this Code.
d) Acceptance criteria
The geometrical and dimensional tolerances specified in the fabrication drawings.
e) Report
Prepared only in case of non-conformance. The non-conformance certificate may replace this
report.
S 7362 VISUAL EXAMINATION

Required for classes 1 and 2, this examination is also recommanded for class 3.
a) Method
In accordance with the requirements of MC 7100 and MC 7200, SECTION III.
b) Extent
All surfaces to be welded and adjacent areas.
Preferably to be performed before the other non-destructive surface examinations.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 7
- The surface finish tolerances specified in the drawings.
- The surfaces to be welded shall have no defect liable to affect adversely the quality of
the weld.
e) Report
Prepared only in case of non-conformance. The non-conformance certificate may replace
this report.
S 7363 MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATION AND

LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION
In general these examinations are recommended. Moreover, they are compulsory for class 1 and 2
according to the requirements of tables S 7710.1, S 7710.2, S 7720.1 and S 7720.2.
a) Method
- Magnetic particle examination or liquid penetrant examination for carbon and low-alloy
steels.
- Liquid penetrant examination for austenitic stainless steels and nickel base alloys.
These examinations shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 5000 for
magnetic particle examination and MC 4000 for liquid penetrant examination.
b) Extent
100% of all the surface to be welded, clad or overlayed.
To be performed after surface preparation.
The criteria are defined in tables S 7363.1 and 2 below. The Manufacturer is however
recommended to weld on surfaces free from indications.
e) Report
- Noted on the routing sheet, in accordance with A 3000.
- A report is prepared only in case of non-conformance. The non-conformance report may
replace this report.
S 7000 / 8  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 7363.1
LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION
PRODUCTS SURFACES TO BE CLAD BEVELS

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, ONLY INDICATIONS > 2 mm SHALL BE
CONSIDERED RECORDABLE CONDITIONS
The following are unacceptable: The following are unacceptable:
(1) linear indications* (1) linear indications*
(2) rounded indications > 5 mm (2) rounded indications > 4 mm
(3) 3 or more indications in a line, less (3) idem (3) for the surfaces to be clad
CAST
than 3 mm apart (edge to edge)
(4) groups of 5 or more indications at (4) idem (4) for the surfaces to be clad
class 1 and 8 or more at class 2, on
2
rectangular area of 100 cm chosen
in the most unfavourable manner in
relation to the indications and with
its longest dimension not exceeding
20 cm.

(2) rounded indications >3 mm (2) rounded indications > 2 mm

ROLLED
or
FORGED than 3 mm apart (edge to edge)
(4) groups of 5 or more indications at (4) idem (4) for the surfaces to be clad
class 1 and 12 or more at class 2,
2
on rectangular area of 100 cm
chosen in the most unfavourable
manner in relation to the indications
and with its longest dimension not
exceeding 20 cm
Note : Bevels made in butterings shall be inspected according to the criteria applied to bevels in rolled or forged
products.
* See definition in MC 4200
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 9
TABLE S 7363.2
MAGNETIC PARTICLE EXAMINATIONS
PRODUCTS SURFACES TO BE CLAD BEVELS
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, ONLY INDICATIONS > 2 mm

SHALL BE CONSIDERED RECORDABLE CONDITIONS
(2) rounded indications > 5 mm (2) rounded indications > 4 mm

CAST
than 3 mm apart edge to edge, or
extending for more than 20 mm at
class 1 and 30 mm at class 2 if this
distance is between 3 and 6 mm
Two indications are considered as one if the distance separating them is less than
twice the length of the shorter
ROLLED (2) non-linear indications > 3 mm (2) non-linear indications > 2 mm

or
FORGED (3) 3 or more indications in a line, less (3) idem (3) for the surfaces to be clad
than 3 mm apart edge to edge, or
extending for more than 15 mm at
class 1 and 20 mm at class 2 if this
distance is between 3 and 6 mm
Two indications are considered as one if the distance separating them is less than
twice the length of the shorter
Note : Bevels made in butterings shall be inspected according to the criteria applied to bevels in rolled or forged
products
* See definition in MC 5150
S 7370 ALIGNMENT OF WELD EDGES

a) The parts to be joined are aligned in such a way as to achieve the tolerances specified in F 4300
after welding.
In the case of pipes, machining or sizing of the ends may be necessary.
S 7000 / 10  n° 137-2012
b) For alignment and retaining of parts during welding, devices such as clamps, clips, temporary
attachments, tack welds, etc. are used.
However, wherever possible, mechanical devices are to be preferred, particularly in the case of
pipework.
c) The mechanical or welded devices shall satisfy S 7420 for the welding and F 6000 for the
cleanliness criteria.
S 7380 INSPECTIONS AFTER ALIGNMENT

The following inspections are required at classes 1 and 2 and recommended at class 3.
S 7381 DIMENSIONAL CHECKS OF READY-TO-WELD TEST COUPON

a) Method
To be defined by the Manufacturer.
b) Extent
At intervals, at least 4 in number, along each joint.
c) Time of inspection
To be carried out immediately before welding after any tack welding.
1) The edge dimension and gap width tolerances specified in the welding procedure or in the
fabrication drawings.
2) The maximum admissible offset in level necessary to satisfy the criteria defined in F 4300
for welds.
e) Report
Prepared only in case of non-conformance. The non-conformance report may replace this report.
S 7382 VISUAL EXAMINATION OF THE READY-TO-WELD TEST COUPON

a) Method
The visual examination shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of SECTION III:
MC 7100.
b) Extent
- All surfaces to be welded and their adjacent areas on the front and back sides of the joint,
when this back side is accessible.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 11
- The tack welds when, in accordance with the welding procedure specification, these are to be
incorporated in the final weld.
To be carried out immediately before welding and after any tack welding.
d) Criteria
- Identification and coding:
possible presence of marking, coding and other means used for the purpose of identifying the
joints on the component and for relating to them the results of the subsequent inspections to
be performed on the weld.
- Cleanliness:
absence of water, grease, oil, oxides and other materials liable to impair welding.
- Appearance of incorporated tack welds:
absence of shrinkage and end craters, cracks, porosity furrows or other imperfections liable to
impair the welding. This examination can be complemented by liquid penetrant examination
particularly in case of doubt.
e) Report
Prepared only in case of non-conformance. The non-conformance report may replace this report.
S 7400 EXECUTION ON PRODUCTION WELDS
S 7410 TACK WELD REQUIREMENTS

a) General
Tack welds do not form part of the joint. They shall be removed before or during the welding of
the joint, and their complete removal shall be ensured.
However, for certain welds without backing runs and for materials other than low alloy steels
over 20 mm thick, tack welds may be incorporated in the joint subject to the following
reservations:
1) the tack welds shall form part of welding procedure for that joint and the corresponding
qualification tests.
2) the ends of these tack welds shall be tapered to facilitate back side penetration if there is a gap
between the root face.
b) Execution
Tack welds are made according to a procedure which complies with the following requirements:
S 7000 / 12  n° 137-2012
1) They are made:

- either by welders qualified in accordance with S 4000 for production welds (this condition
is mandatory if the tack welds are incorporated in the joint as per a) above),
- or by welders or fitters who have demonstrated their ability to execute such welds by the
following tests:
execution, in the presence of a Surveillance Agent, of a series of:
. five tack welds in the flat position,
. five tack welds in the vertical position,
the length of these welds being:
. that obtained by the continuous fusion of an electrode in the case of manual shielded
metal arc welding,
. at least 50 mm for any other process.
These welds are carried out on a surface of a type used during manufacturing, on a base
metal of the same grade, and with the filler materials used during these manufacturing
operations.
CRITERIA
- assessment of operator skill.
- appearance of beads, which shall be continuous, without unacceptable undercutting at
the junction with the base metal and with no cracking at the ends.
2) The filler mterials used shall be taken among those acceptance-tested for the manufacturing
operations concerned, in accordance with S 2000.
3) If preheating is required for welding operations, the base metal shall be preheated to the
prescribed temperature.
4) The preheating is carried out and monitored according to the provisions of S 7500.
5) The preheated zone shall extend to a sufficient distance around the zone to be welded (the
minimum pre-heating temperature shall be reached at least 50 mm from the location of
the bead).
S 7420 WELDING OF PERMANENT AND TEMPORARY

ATTACHMENTS
S 7421 GENERAL
Any part welded to the inner or outer walls of the components or bevels is called an "attachment".
The permanent attachments* such as supports, brackets, stiffeners, etc., are part of the equipment.
Temporary attachments consist of parts welded to the component, intended to facilitate
manufacturing, handling or erection and subsequently removed.
* Branch pipes, nozzles, opening reinforcements, etc. are not considered as attachments within the meaning of
the chapter
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 13
S 7422 WELDING REQUIREMENTS

a) Welds of permanent and temporary attachments to components shall be made according to the
same requirements (in particular preheating, postheating, etc.) as the main joints of the
component concerned (see S 7430).
b) The welds of permanent or temporary accessories are executed before final stress relieving heat
treatment. If this is not possible, however, welding of accessories made of carbon steel, stainless
steel or high nickel alloy to buttering or cladding of the same grade shall be permitted without
subsequent stress-relieving heat treatment. This is only allowable if there is no risk of a base
metal being heat re-affected and which requires stress-relieving heat treatment under the terms
of S 1340.
c) Welds of permanent attachments on walls of pressure retaining components shall be continuous
and of the full penetration type, unless special requirements are stipulated in the "Design"
chapters of the various subsections of SECTION I. By way of exception, insulation support
plates and other intermediate plates are not included.
d) In the case of weld clad components, attachments may be welded directly to the cladding.
e) In the case of components manufactured from clad plates, the cladding shall be removed at the
location of the attachment, which shall be welded directly to the base metal, or to buttering
deposited on the base metal.
f) In both cases (d) and (e), and for permanent attachments whose welds shall be required to
withstand high stresses, the underbead cladding in the relevant zone (or the buttering) shall
satisfy the requirements of S 3000 for buttering.
S 7423 QUALIFICATION FOR THE WELDING ATTACHMENTS

Welds between permanent or temporary attachments and pressure vessel walls shall satisfy the same
qualification requirements (welding procedure, welders or welding operators, filler materials) as the
other production welds (S 2000, S 3000, S 4000).
However, these requirements are not applicable for the welds of temporary attachments if the weld
metal and all the base metal affected by the weld are subsequently removed. In this case, the
Manufacturer shall draw up a specific report demonstrating that this is in fact so before proceeding
with the weld in question.
S 7424 BRIDGES AND CLAMPS

1) Clamps, bridge-pieces and the welds attaching them to the components shall be of sufficient
dimensions, so that the stresses to which these attachments are subjected cannot cause tearing of
materials or cracking of the component walls.
2) For formed pressure vessels with wall thicknesses in excess of 50 mm, fitting bridges and clamps
are not welded directly to the skin of the pressure vessel but to plates welded to the surface or to
previously executed buttering.
3) The plates, bridge-pieces and clamps used for alignment of austenitic stainless steel components
shall also be of austenitic stainless steel.
S 7000 / 14  n° 137-2012
S 7425 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY ATTACHMENTS

1) In no case shall a temporary attachment be removed by a method liable to cause the tearing of
material from the surface of the wall of the component (e.g. removal with a hammer).
2) No thermal cutting for the removal of a temporary attachment may be carried out within 5 mm of
the surface of the equipment. The remaining material shall be removed mechanically.
3) Temporary attachments shall be removed before the final heat treatment of the component or part
thereof.
If, for technical reasons, they are removed after this treatment, particular care shall be given to
the application of requirements 1) and 2) above.
S 7426 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY ATTACHMENTS

After removal of temporary accessories, their locations on the component shall be subjected to non-
destructive examination methods as specified in S 7710, S 7720 or S 7730* for postweld
examinations. If magnetic particle inspection is required but is difficult to perform, liquid penetrant
examination may be allowed.
Note : In this case of temporary attachments welded to the bevel with filler materials acceptance-tested for
manufacture, only visual examination is required after they have been removed by grinding.
* According to the class of the component concerned.
S 7430 EXECUTION OF WELDS

S 7431 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a) Product welding operations may only be undertaken if the following requirements are met:
1) the workshop and personnel satisfy the requirements of S 6000 and S 4000,
2) the qualification and acceptance-testing of the filler materials have been carried out in
accordance with S 5000 and S 2000,
3) the welding procedures have been qualified in accordance with S 3000.
4) all the necessary documents (manufacturing sequences, Manufacturer's working instructions,

etc.) are available at the place where the welding is to be performed,
5) the welding procedure is in accordance with the welding procedure qualification and the
relevant report, in particular as far as the permitted limits of the variables are concerned.
b) The edges to be welded shall be prepared in accordance with S 7300. The surfaces shall be dry
and it is forbidden to weld on wet surfaces.
c) It is forbidden to weld if the room temperature is below - 10°C. The part must be kept at a
temperature of at least + 5°C and cooling after welding shall be sufficiently slow to avoid
cracking due to internal stress.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 15
d) All welding operations shall be performed under cover from bad weather.
If welding is carried out using a shielding gas, the work area should be draught-free.
Back shielding gas confinement can be performed on pipes using soluble paper or temporary
plugs.
e) During and after welding operations, the filler materials shall be used in accordance with S 7200.
f) The associated heat treatments (pre-heating, post-heating, stress relieving) shall be carried out in
accordance with S 7500.
g) Other operating precautions
During welding, each pass shall be visually examined, after complete removal of the slag, if
necessary.
Any visible defect liable to affect the correct execution of the next pass, shall be removed.
Cracks or cavities visible on the surface shall be removed by chipping and by grinding and/or
milling.
Grinding shall be carried out with care to avoid overheating zones, particularly with austenitic
steels.
For strength welds, stringer beads are recommended (sweeping not more than three times the
diameter of the electrode core).
The surface of the weld beads must be continuous, of uniform thickness and continuously joined
to the adjacent surfaces.
S 7432 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

a) Socket welding of pipes
- A gap of about 1.5 mm is left before welding between the end of the male pipe and the base of
the socket.
- The first pass shall be made using preferably the TIG process (No. 141) with back shielding
protection according to the requirements of S 7436.b).
- The profile of the joint shall satisfy the requirements of figures B, C and D 3661.2.
b) The MIG (131), MAG (135) and flux-cored wire (136, 114) processes can only be performed
manually for the cases described in B, C and D 4000 of SECTION I.
c) Friction welded joints
The parameters defined during qualification (S 3551 5) shall be continuously recorded and each
weld shall be individually marked on the corresponding diagrams. Any weld for which the
parameters do not fall within the specified qualification ranges shall be repeated.
S 7000 / 16  n° 137-2012
S 7433 CHECKING OF INSTRUMENTS USED FOR MEASURING

WELDING PARAMETERS
Checking a measuring instrument consists of comparing readings taken with it, to those obtained
with a calibrated instrument.
a) The verification of the measuring instruments used for setting and checking the electrical
parameters and those used to check temperatures shall be mandatory. This verification shall be
done according to a schedule at no longer than 6 monthly intervals.
b) This verification shall be covered by a report indicating the references of the instrument being
checked and the calibrated one, along with the values recorded on them both.
c) In the special case of instruments for measuring electron beam welding parameters, the
verification interval may be increased to two years, on condition that representative test pieces
taken once every 6 months prove the reliability of the component. These representative test
pieces shall be of identical cross-section to the welding procedure qualification coupon taken in
accordance with S 3560 and be welded using a qualified welding procedure. Macrographs shall
be taken of these test pieces so that the dimensions and shape of the nail may be verified.
S 7434 VERIFICATION OF WELDING PARAMETERS

The energy parameters I, U* and V*, the polarity and the preheating, interpass and postheating
temperatures shall satisfy the requirements of the welding procedure.
- For automatic equipment, the voltage is checked at the arc, or as close as possible to it. In this
case, the difference between the voltage measured and the voltage at the arc shall be evaluated.
- The interpass temperatures are measured using one of the means specified in S 7524.
* U and V in the case of automatic welding. For manual welding, U and V shall be verified when the heat input range
is included the range of approval of the welding procedure qualification concerned.
S 7435 BACKING STRIPS AND CONSUMABLE INSERTS

The use of backing strips and consumable inserts is covered by the welding procedure qualification.
In general, the use of permanent backing strips is forbidden, particularly in the case of welds
subjected to pressure and to temperature gradients and where retention and corrosion risks
are present.
Where, exceptionally, they are left in place after welding, their presence shall not impede the
performance of the non-destructive examinations required. In such cases, they shall be continuous
and any butt joints between them shall be full-penetration-welded.
The backing strip material shall be compatible with that of the joint (chemical composition in
particular).
The non-destructive examinations of the weld shall be performed after complete removal of the
backing strip.
 n° 140-2013 S 7000 / 17
Consumable inserts require special preparation of the weld edges. Their design allows them to be
incorporated in the welded joint without creating an irregular surface finish. Their ends are welded
together to avoid any discontinuity. The material of which they are made shall be acceptance-tested
in accordance with S 2000.
S 7436 WELD POOL PROTECTION

a) Gas shielding
Care shall be taken to ensure observance of the shielding gas flow-rates specified in the welding
procedure.
b) Root protection
If the root passes are made by the TIG process, the back side of the weld is protected from
oxidation by an inner shielding gas which, for austenitic grades, shall be argon or another rare
gas, or a rare gas/neutral gas mixture containing over 50% of rare gas. For carbon steels, the
protection of the back side of the weld with inert or non-oxidant gas is recommended but not
mandatory.
This protection shall be maintained, whatever the welding procedure, until a sufficient thickness
- at least 4 mm - has been deposited to prevent any back side oxidation.
By analogy, when welding on the surface of an austenitic stainless steel part less than 5 mm
thick, the back face shall be protected against oxidation by an inert shielding gas. The thickness
in question may be increased according to the welding process.
c) Solid flux protection

Solid flux is used in accordance with the requirements of S 7222.
S 7437 VARIOUS SURFACE ALTERATIONS OF THE BASE METAL

a) Arc strikes on the surfaces of equipment are forbidden and the Manufacturer shall take all
necessary precautions to avoid them. For this purpose, the equipment (cables, earth connections,
etc.) shall be kept in good condition. The arc welder shall strike the arc in the groove and not on
the adjacent surface.
b) In TIG welding, it is forbidden to strike the arc on copper plates. TIG welding equipment shall
preferably be equipped with remote striking devices (high frequency, etc.).
c) If traces of arc strikes are detected, these shall be removed and their location carefully examined
by liquid penetrant or by magnetic particle examination by the magnetic flow method to ensure
that no cracking has occurred.
S 7000 / 18  n° 140-2013
S 7438 WELDS WITH REMOVAL OF ROOT PASSES AND WELDS

WITH BACKING RUNS
a) Welding procedures with removal of root passes
If the root zone is not taken into account in the welding procedure qualification (in accordance
with S 3000), the root passes and the corresponding heat-affected zones shall be totally removed
by grinding, chipping, machining or thermal gouging followed by grinding.
b) Welding procedures with backing runs
Before making the backing run, all traces of defects such as lack of fusion, incomplete fusion,
slag, etc., shall be removed, if necessary, by grinding, chipping, machining or thermal gouging
followed by grinding.
c) After removal of the root passes or before making the backing run, an examination shall be
performed in accordance with S 7700.
 n° 140-2013 S 7000 / 18 a
S 7000 / 18 b  n° 140-2013
S 7439 CLEANLINESS
During the welding and according to the cleanliness classification of the component or part
concerned (for the production stage on the basis of which this classification is applied), precautions
shall be taken to prevent pollution by arc fumes or slag, in order to satisfy the specifications
of F 6000*.
* The Manufacturer's attention is drawn to the fact that this requirement may influence the choice of the welding
process.
S 7440 PEENING
The peening of welds is generally forbidden. Recourse to this technique may nevertheless be
tolerated under certain special circumstances under which it is difficult to apply other methods of
limiting deformation due to welding.
The Manufacturer shall obtain the prior consent of the Contractor. To support his request, the
Manufacturer shall supply a written report which shall include the following:
- identification of the apparatus and of the welds concerned, as well as the relevant welding
procedures (indicating any thermal treatments) and a description of the non-destructive
examinations planned for these welds,
- the reasons which justify the use of peening,
- the peening procedure.
Under no circumstances shall peening be permitted on a first pass or final weld coating.
S 7450 WELD SURFACE FINISHING

S 7451 STRENGTH WELDS
a) After welding, the surface of the welds shall be finished so that the required non-destructive
examination can be performed. The surface shall display a finish compatible with the non-
destructive examination requirements of SECTION III and of F 4300 for fabrication and of
additional requirements in the equipment specification.
b) Weld reinforcements exceeding the tolerances shown in the drawings shall be ground or
machined within these tolerances. In any case, the reinforcement shall not exceed the values
given in tables S 7461 and S 7462.
c) The weld surfaces and adjacent surfaces shall be cleaned to remove spatter, slag, scaly oxides,
grease, etc., liable to interfere with the inspections and non-destructive examinations.
d) The grinding wheels or belts, tools and products used for finishing welds, particularly austenitic
stainless steel welds, shall satisfy the requirements of F 6000, SECTION V.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 19
e) When finish-grinding carbon steel or low-alloy steel welds, precautions shall be taken to prevent
the contamination of austenitic stainless steel parts or cladding in the vicinity by ejected
particles.
f) For friction welded joints, the weld beads shall be ground flush inside and out.
S 7452 FINISHING WELD CLADDING

Cladding shall be finished in such a way that the surface may be subjected to the non-destructive
examinations required by SECTION I, according to the requirements of SECTION III.
In any case, the surface shall be finished in such a way that the depth of the furrow between
adjacent passes does not exceed the values specified in SECTION I and so as to satisfy the
requirements of Annex ZS where the latter is applicable.
Any trace of slag in this furrow shall be carefully removed by grinding, brushing or other
mechanical means, and the tools used shall satisfy the requirements of F 6000, SECTION V.
S 7460 VISUAL AND DIMENSIONAL EXAMINATIONS

S 7461 CLASS 1 and 2 WELDS
a) Non-destructive examination methods
- Specified by the Manufacturer, for the dimensional examination.
- According to the requirements of MC 7100 and MC 7200, SECTION III, for the visual
examination.
b) Extent
All welds, cladding or buttering.
Before the execution of the other non-destructive examinations required by this code.
d) Acceptance criteria for the appearance and dimensions of welds

The dimensions and surface condition of the front and back surfaces, where the latter is
accessible, shall comply with the requirements indicated on the relevant drawings and, as
regards the weld, with the following criteria, unless otherwise specified in the drawings.
S 7000 / 20  n° 137-2012
MAXIMUM PERMITTED REINFORCEMENTS

For butt welds, these shall not exceed the values given in the following table.
FRONT BACK
WELDS WITH (No 502, Annex S II) (No 504, Annex S II)
BACKING
RUN 1/10 of the bead
MAXIMUM
width + 1 mm
PERMITTED
REINFORCEMENTS 1/10 of the bead width
e
IN mm WELDS + 1 mm with a max of  0.5
WITHOUT 5 mm (see note (1)) 20
BACKING
with a max. of
RUN
1.5 mm (see note (2)
(1) For non-flush welds on pipes, the maximum permitted reinforcements shall not exceed the
following values:
- 1.5 mm for e  5 mm
- 2.0 mm for 5 < e  10 mm
- 2.5 mm for e > 10 mm
where e = nominal thicknesses of the pipe.
(2) For butt welds on pipes, the permitted back reinforcement shall be:
- 1.5 mm for e  5 mm
- 2.5 mm for 5 < e  10 mm
- 3 mm for e > 10 mm
OFFSET
According to the requirements of F 4300.
OVERLAP
No overlap of a weld reinforcement over the edge of a part shall be acceptable.
INCOMPLETELY FILLED GROOVE

Concave form penetration  0.5 mm is acceptable for all overhead position welds. In all other
cases, this type of defect is unacceptable.
LACK OF PENETRATION
Lack of penetration shall not be acceptable.
UNDERCUT
Undercut shall not be acceptable (see defects No. 5011 undercut and No. 5013 shrinkage groove,
in annex S II of the WELDING section).
If such defects exist, they shall be completely removed by grinding and repaired, if necessary,
by welding.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 21
In the case of discontinuities between the weld and the adjacent surfaces in the form of a
smooth-profiled depression along the weld, where it would not be possible to detect undercuts,
as defined above, by visual examination alone, the following steps shall be taken:
- in the case of welds to be trimmed by grinding, these imperfections shall be removed during
the course of these operations,
- in the case of welds which may be left in the as welded condition, only those imperfections
which may lead to unacceptable indications during subsequent liquid penetrant or magnetic
particle examinations shall be removed after trimming.
OTHER DEFECTS
Weld collapse, shrinkage, undercuts, spongy formations and flat defects, blistering and
inclusions appearing on the surface shall not be acceptable.
In the case of friction welding, after elimination of the beads, check the following:
- the complete absence of defects,
- that the alignment of the two parts is within the machining tolerances.
S 7462 CLASS 3 WELDS

As under S 7461, except for:
MAXIMUM PERMITTED REINFORCEMENTS
For butt welds, these must not exceed the following values:
FRONT BACK
WELDS WITH (No 502, Annex S II) (No 504, Annex S II)
BACKING
MAXIMUM RUN 1/10 of the bead
PERMITTED width + 2 mm
1/10 of the bead width
REINFORCEMENTS
WELDS + 2 mm with a max of e
IN mm
WITHOUT 5 mm  1 (see note)
BACKING 10
RUN with a max. of 3 mm
Note: For butt welds on pipes, the permitted back reinforcement shall be:
- 2 mm for e  5 mm
- 2.5 mm for 5 < e  10 mm
- 3 mm for e > 10 mm
S 7463 SPECIAL CASE OF WELDED SOCKET JOINTS

In addition to the visual examination defined in S 7461 and S 7462, depending on the class, all
welded socket joints shall be subject to a dimensional check aimed at ensuring compliance with the
geometrical and dimensional criteria defined in B, C, D 3660.
The examination procedure, defined by the Manufacturer, shall be subject to validation to prove
that the procedures adopted ensure that these criteria are satisfied, for the various configurations
encountered.
Note : In the case of welded socket joints subject to radiographic examination, an evaluation of the throat depth on
the radiograms may take the place of the above-mentioned dimensional check.
S 7000 / 22  n° 137-2012
S 7470 PRODUCTION WELD DATA SHEET

Following the completion of a welding operation (welded joints, weld cladding, repairs), a
production weld data sheet shall be prepared for each operation or group of operations involving the
same welding procedure.
This production weld data sheet shall indicate at least:

- the equipment reference number (or the isometric reference for pipes) to which the joint, the
group of joints, the cladding or the repair belongs,
- the reference number of the joint, the group of joints, the cladding or the repair,
- the reference of the welding procedure used,
- the reference number of the lot or lots of filler materials used,
- for each operation, the name (identifying symbol) of the welding operator(s) responsible,
- for automatic welding, the reference of the machine used.
S 7500 WELD RELATED HEAT TREATMENTS
S 7510 GENERAL
The weld related heat treatments shall be carried out according to the requirements of this
paragraph.
The terms governing their application, such as:

- whether required,
- time of performance,
- temperature, and
- holding time,
are specified in SECTIONS I and V.
S 7520 PREHEATING
S 7521 GENERAL
- Preheating, when required by the welding procedure, shall be performed in such a way that the
properties of the metal in the preheated zones are not affected.
- The welding procedure shall indicate the minimum preheat temperature.
- No contaminating elements (see F 6000) shall be introduced into the groove or on to the surface
of the component.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 23
S 7522 METHODS AND PRECAUTIONS

a) The preheating is carried out using furnaces, electrical devices, rows of gas burners, etc.
- Oxygas may only be used with the following precautions:
1) only rows of burners adapted to the shape of the component shall be used. Manual blow-
torches shall not be used,
2) the flame cone shall not come into contact with the component. Only the flame envelope
may touch this.
- Precaution 2) also applies to other gas heating processes.
b) The preheating zone shall extend over a wide area around the joint to be welded in order to
prevent sharp temperature gradients.
The Manufacturer shall indicate the width of the zone, from the edge of the joint, where the
minimum preheating temperature required by the welding procedure shall be monitored. It shall
not be less than the following values:
0 <e  10 : 15 mm
10 < e  40 : 1.5 e
40 < e  100 : 60 mm e = thickness of the joint in mm
100 < e  200 : 0.6 e
200 < e : 120 mm
c) Prior to commencement of welding operation, condition b) above shall be satisfied.
d) The preheating shall be maintained without interruption and shall be monitored until the end of
the welding operation.
S 7523 TEMPERATURE
a) The preheat temperatures are included in the welding procedure qualification and are indicated
in S 1310.
b) Austenitic stainless steels are not preheated.
S 7524 MEASUREMENT OF PREHEAT TEMPERATURES AND

INTERPASS TEMPERATURES
a) Regular checks shall be made to ensure that the preheat temperature remains within the range
required by the welding procedure.
b) The specified temperature shall be monitored by means of:

- thermocouples (see F 8140),
- pyrometers or contact thermometers,
S 7000 / 24  n° 137-2012
- heat-sensitive pens.
Note : The use of heat-sensitive pens may be forbidden for welding austenitic stainless steels in order to prevent the
introduction of low-melting point products (F 6000).
c) The points of measurement shall be chosen so as to ensure that the specified temperature is
reached throughout the whole thickness and over the whole area to be welded.
S 7530 POSTHEATING
a) Postheat conditions (in particular, holding time and temperature) shall be specified on the
welding procedure data sheet.
b) Postheating shall be performed before the weld has cooled below a minimum temperature
specified on the welding procedure data sheet.
c) The requirements of S 7521, S 7522.a) and b), and S 7524 shall apply.
d) Postheating shall be continuous and shall be monitored throughout the holding time specified on
the welding procedure data sheet.
e) The component shall be protected from draughts so as to avoid harmful temperature gradients.
S 7540 STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENTS

S 7541 GENERAL
a) The welding procedure qualification includes the stress relieving heat treatments.
b) Stress relieving heat treatment shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of
chapter F 8100.
c) A heat treatment may be general or partial, according to whether it is applied to the whole or part
of a component.
S 7542 OPERATING CONDITIONS

a) Personnel and equipment requirements
Personnel and heat treatment equipment requirements shall be as defined in paragraph F 8130.
b) Requirements for components to be treated

1) Heating of the whole component, or part thereof, in a closed furnace is preferable to any other
method, and shall be used whenever practicable.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 25
2) If, because of dimensions or for technical reasons, the component cannot be heat treated all at
one time in a closed furnace, one of the following methods shall be adopted:
- heat treatment in successive sections in a furnace. The overlap of the heated sections shall
be at least 1500 mm. The part outside the furnace shall be insulated in such a way that the
temperature gradient is not damaging for the component.
The double heat treatment of the overlap zone is taken into account in respect of:
. the verification of the mechanical properties of the material and, where applicable, of
its sensitivity to corrosion,
. the welding procedure qualification if one or more welds are involved.
The overlap zone shall contain no nozzle or geometrical discontinuity (as far as possible).
- Local heat treatment of girth welds on cylindrical components.

The girth welds of these units may be heat treated separately, provided that the heated
strip is equal to at least 4 times the metal thickness.
The minimum width of the zone where the temperature required for the treatment shall be
reached on either side of the weld (from the side of the maximum weld width) shall be not
less than the smaller of the following two values:
. the weld thickness,
. 50 mm.
- Local heat treatment of a circumferential strip aroung the component containing nozzles,
branch pipes or other welded parts.
When an area, containing nozzles or other welded parts, has to be locally heat treated, the
heated part of the component shall consist of an annular band of the component lying
between two planes at right angles to its axis, including all the nozzles or welded parts in
the area to be heat treated and extending beyong the welds of these parts for at least twice
the thickness of the material.
This method shall also be used for heat treatment of repairs by welding.
- Internal heating of components.

Where a component is internally heated, it shall be covered with an insulating material,
which may be the final lagging. The internal pressure shall be monitored to ensure that
there is no deformation if the component is sealed.
3) Components shall be located at a sufficient distance from flues. The flame shall not impinge
directly on the component.
S 7000 / 26  n° 137-2012
S 7543 REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS

1) During heat treatment, weld test coupons are placed inside the component. If this is not possible,
they are placed beside the component in such a way that they are subjected to the same
treatment.
One or more thermocouples are attached to the test coupons.
2) Weld test coupons may be treated separately from the component if it is technically impossible
to meet the requirements of 1) above, provided that the heat treatment conditions for the test
coupons are the same as for the component (same heating rate, same maximum temperature,
same holding time and same cooling rate as for the component).
S 7544 TEMPERATURE AND HOLDING TIMES

a) Recommended stress relieving temperatures and holding times for each grade and thickness are
indicated in S 1300.
b) In general, when two materials of different grades are joined, the required heat treatment
temperature is that of the material requiring the higher temperature.
However, the effect of this temperature on the other material shall be assessed and may lead to
this rule being ignored.
c) The thickness to be taken into account in calculating the holding time is:
- butt welds: thickness at cross section of the joint,
- fillet welds: throat depth of the weld,
- branch pipes: the greatest depth of the weld between the branch pipe and the component.
When a component containing several of these types of weld is subjected to stress-relieving heat
treatment, the thickness taken into account shall be the greatest of these.
d) Heating and cooling rates

1) The temperature at which an apparatus is inserted in a furnace shall be determined on the
basis of its design and in particular, on the risks of the deformation due to thermal stresses.
It shall not exceed 400°C or a lower value according to the component.
2) The heating rate (and cooling) shall be sufficiently low to prevent deformation or hamful
stresses.
In any case, for components of simple shape, this heating rate (and cooling) shall not exceed
the following values in the range above 350°C:
- for a maximum thickness not exceeding 25 mm: 220°C/h,
- for a thickness exceeding 25 mm: the greater of the following two values:
. 220°C/h divided by the maximum thickness expressed in multiples of 25 mm
. 55°C/h.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 27
3) During heating, the temperature difference between two points on the same component not more
than 4.50 m apart shall not exceed 150°C.
This requirement does not apply to local heat treatment or heat treatment in successive sections.
S 7545 TEMPERATURE MONITORING AND RECORDING

Recording and monitoring of temperatures shall be in accordance with the requirements of F 8140.
S 7600 REPAIR BY WELDING
S 7610 GENERAL
All repair welding operations:
- on welds,
- on parts or products,
shall meet the same requirements as those applied to production welds.
Two welding repairs may be performed at the same point. The Manufacturer may not make further
welds until he has prepared a report analyzing the cause of these successive repairs and submitted it
to the Contractor's approval. The same applies to repairs which occur too regularly or to the
detection of defects which might invalidate the conditions of application of the procedure, or the
qualification itself of the welding procedure.
If the repairs made on a weld by an automatic process are likely to exceed one fifth of its length
over at least one half of its thickness, the weld must be repeated and then rechecked. However, for
joints welded on one side only and subject to compliance with the applicable regulatory
requirements, if the root of the weld is in compliance and is of sufficient thickness to allow repair,
then the joint may be rewelded from the outside onto the same root.
For Main Primary System* and Main Secondary System* pipes, if a defect in the root area of a joint
welded on one side only using an automatic process cannot be repaired from the inside then the
weld shall be cut and re-done.
* : See A 4220
Note : During machining, should the Manufacturer discover defects needing excavation of only the base metal
followed by weld repairs, this should be carried out in accordance with the provisions of the procurement
technical specification in SECTION II.
S 7620 SPECIAL CASE OF REPAIRS BY WELDING EXEMPTED

FROM SUBSEQUENT HEAT TREATMENT
a) In general, repair by welding after final heat treatment is forbidden. However, repairs may be
carried out, subject to the approval of the Contractor and provided that the welding procedure
has been covered by a special qualification test and satisfies all the requirements of paragraph b).
S 7000 / 28  n° 140-2013
b) Operating procedure requirements

1) The welding procedure defines the minimum dimensions of the repair. The repair procedure
shall indicate the number, size and relative location of the excavations.
2) The steel shall be one of the grades specified in SECTION II.
3) The repair shall be carried out to a qualified arc welding procedure whereby a low hydrogen
weld metal is deposited in stringer beads.
4) The base metal and the weld metal used for the qualification test shall be taken from
materials purchased for manufacture.
5) The covered electrodes used shall be of the low-hydrogen type (basic covering). They shall
be dried before use according to the process defined by the Manufacturer and in accordance
with the requirements of S 7200, and shall be transferred just before use to portable ovens
where they shall be held at a temperature of between 100 and 150°C.
6) The metal shall be removed by mechanical means.
7) The preheat temperature of the area to be repaired by welding shall not be less than that of the
qualification test.
8) The energy parameters prescribed in the weld procedure shall be continuously monitored
during the entire welding operation.
9) The second layer of weld metal shall be deposited in order to ensure tempering of the heat
affected zone in the base metal caused by the first bead . Similarly, after filling, additional
beads shall be deposited on top of the last layer without overlapping the base metal in order
to ensure tempering of the heat affected zone in the base metal caused by the last layer to be
deposited (see figures S 7620.1 and S 7620.2).
10) The repair shall be followed by post-heating at a temperature in excess of 200°C with a
minimum holding time of 2 hours.
c) Non-destructive examinations of the repaired zone

1) The repaired zones shall be examined at least 48 hours after cooling.
2) The following are performed:
2.1 the examinations specified in tables S 7710 or 7720, according to the class of the
equipment concerned.
2.2 additional examinations comprising:
- the examination which revealed the original defects,
- any additional examinations need to check the quality of the repaired zone.
d) Supporting calculations
The Contractor may require a stress analysis of the equipment in service; this shall take account
of the effect of the repairs; the methods used for these analyses shall be agreed between the
parties concerned.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 29
FIGURE S 7620.1
Step 1 : Deposition of first layer
Step 2 : Minimum ground flushing of the first layer

to remove any surface irregularities
Step 3 : Deposition of second layer and filling until

reinforcement obtained
FIGURE S 7620.2 REPAIRS BY WELDING EXEMPTED

FROM SUBSEQUENT HEAT TREATMENT
(Temper bead repairs)
S 7000 / 30  n° 137-2012
S 7630 SPECIAL CASE OF TUBE SEALING BY WELDING HOLLOW

PLUGS AT THE JUNCTION OF HEAT EXCHANGER TUBES
AND TUBE PLATES
a) Repairs by welding hollow plugs at the junction of tubes and tube plates may be proposed
subject to the approval of the Contractor and provided that the welding procedure has been
covered by special qualification tests and satisfies all the requirements of paragraphs b) and c).
b) Qualification of welding procedure and of welders or operators

This type of plug shall be considered as a tube. The area of validity of qualifications, workshop
conditions and checks on qualification test coupons shall be the same as those defined for tube to
tube plate welds (S 3810 - S 3820 - S 3830 - S 4320) with the following remarks:
- Base metal: grade
The "base metals" in question are those in the vicinity of the plug welds, i.e.
. of the plugs
. of the tubes and of the part of the plate or cladding concerned by the plug weld.
- Qualification test coupon welding

A minimum of six plugs shall be welded in accordance with the requirements of S 3823.
- Metallographic examinations: results

. In the absence of any mechanical joint, the depth throat shall not be less than 1.5 e (where
"e" is the nominal thickness of the tubes).
. Cracks are unacceptable. Porosity or inclusions shall be acceptable if the minimum leak
path distance remains locally greater than or equal to the required depth of the throat.
. Discontinuities at the root measuring not more than 0.24 e and at most 0.30 mm shall not
be regarded as disqualifying defects, provided the minimum leak path remains greater than
or equal to the required throat dimension.
c) Execution - Inspection
Conditions governing execution and inspection are identical to those defined in S 7000 for heat
exchanger tube plate welds, especially for examinations defined in table S 7710.1 or S 7720.1
and S 7714.5 b) 2) or S 7724.5 b) 2).
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 31
S 7700 NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION OF

PRODUCTION WELDS

Tables S 7710.1 to S 7710.2 below, cover the non-destructive examinations to be carried out on
welds, cladding and buttering.
Tables S 7710.1 contain general requirements while tables S 7710.2 only concern pipes and their
permanent and temporary attachments.
In the tables, "austenitic" covers austenitic and austeno-ferritic stainless steels, as well as nickel
base alloy (except in the special case of buttering and cladding, dealt with case per case). Titles
against "austenitic" and "ferritic" entries refer to:
- base metals, for surfaces to be welded,
- deposited metal, in other cases (for welds without filler metal, the nature of the melted zone
should be considered).
The symbols contained in the tables have the following meanings:

- RES : liquid penetrant examination,
- MAG : magnetic particle examination,
- RAD : radiographic examination,
- US : ultrasonic examination.
References Nos. (1), (2), (3), (4), (5) and (6) have the following meanings:
(1) The magnetic particle examination may be performed at welding temperature.
(2) The ultrasonic examination shall be performed on edges or surfaces to be welded, unless a
100% examination has already been performed at the material procurement stage. This
examination is not required for castings.
(3) The US and RAD examinations shall be performed after intermediate machining if the final
state is incompatible with the examination technique.
(4) In the special case of the welding of reactor vessel lugs, the magnetic particle examination shall
be performed every 12 mm during the filling of the groove. US examination not required.
(5) Longitudinal US examination test to be performed according to the method and criteria applied
to procurement of the plates in order to ensure the absence of lamellar tearing; only applicable
when weld A/B is highly stressed.
(6) In the case of safe end welding, the radiographic examination shall be performed after welding.
S 7711 METHOD
a) Surface examination
- By magnetic particle examination for carbon or low alloy steels.
Where it is difficult to perform magnetic particle examination, the Manufacturer may ask the
Contractor to replace magnetic particle examination by liquid penetrant examination
providing justification for his request.
S 7000 / 32  n° 137-2012
- By liquid penetrant examination for austenitic stainless steels and nickel-base alloys.
magnetic particle examination and MC 4000 for liquid penetrant examination.
b) Volumetric examination
Welds, cladding and buttering shall be subjected to volumetric examination using the
radiographic and/or ultrasonic method.
The examination shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of MC 3300 for
radiographic examination, and MC 2600 and MC 2700 for ultrasonic examination.
Tables S 7710.1 and 2 specify the special provisions adopted for certain types of welds for
which volumetric examination is not required or cannot be performed, i.e.
- fillet welds for permanent or temporary attachments,
- fillet welds for flanges or branch pipes with an inside diameter not greater than 60 mm for
vessels,
- fillet welds of branch pipes with an outside diameter not greater than 114 mm for pipes,
- partial penetration welds,
- seal welds and tube to heat exchanger tube plate welds.
S 7712 EXTENT OF THE EXAMINATION

a) Butt welds
These welds shall be examined over their entire length.
The areas of completed welds subjected to examination are as follows:

1) For surface examinations, the weld metal and adjacent base metal on either side of the joint
over a width of at least 15 mm.
This examination is performed on the outer face of the weld and on the inner face when
accessible.
2) For volumetric examination, the weld metal and the adjacent base metal, over a distance of:
- at least 10 mm in relation to the actual groove, or excavation cavity in the case of repair,
where e > 30 mm,
- at least 5 mm in relation to the actual groove or excavation cavity in the case of repair,
where e  30 mm.
For radiographic examination, film viewing shall be in accordance with the requirements of
MC 3312.5.2.a).
For pipes with an outside diameter of less than 90 mm, where exposures are performed in
accordance with MC 3312.5.1.1.a, double film reading may be completed by single film
reading in accordance with MC 3312.5.2.b.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 33
b) Fillet welds
These welds shall be examined over their entire length. The areas of completed welds subjected
to examination are as follows:
1) For surface examinations, the weld metal and the adjacent base metal of parts A and B over a
width of at least 15 mm. The examination shall be performed on the outer face of the weld
and, if necessary, on the inner face when accessible.
2) For volumetric examination, the weld metal and the adjacent base metal of part A for set-on
branches, and of part B for set-in branches, over a distance of:
where e > 30 mm (e = thickness of wearing part),
where e  30 mm (e = thickness of wearing part).
MC 3312.5.2.b).
Note: The application of these general rules (S 7712 a) and b) implies that the Contractor should make
provisions with respect to the shape and position of the groove allowing him to ensure that the weld
metal is examined in its entirety in accordance with SECTIONS III and IV.
The 10 mm and 5 mm are measured from the actual groove on the surface of the part.
c) Cladding and buttering

The entire surface of cladding and buttering shall be examined. The adherence of the weld metal
and the base metal is checked by volumetric examination, performed in accordance with
MC 2700.
Moreover, buttering carried out for the execution of heterogeneous welds under pressure shall be
subjected to radiographic examination according to the requirements stipulated in paragraph
S 7712 a) 2 and MC 3312.7.b).
d) General remark
The criteria defined in S 7714 apply to the zones subjected to examination defined above. If
during these examinations, indications are detected outside these zones, the criteria
corresponding to those adopted for part procurement shall be applied.
This final requirement shall also apply to the area adjacent to welded joint on castings on
condition that the incriminated indications are identified as casting defects present before
welding.
Such indications shall be mentioned in the radiographic examination report.
S 7713 TIME OF EXAMINATION

S 7713.1 During welding operation
For welds at the intermediate stage, the examinations, when required, shall be performed after
preparation of the surface bead, as required in SECTION III.
S 7000 / 34  n° 140-2013
For these internal procedures, the Manufacturer is recommended to carry out a surface examination
by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination after the preparation for the backing run. This
examination is mandatory in the following cases:
- for welds on backing strips when the removal of the backing strip is followed by a backing run.
After preparation of the back of the weld, an examination shall be carried out by magnetic
particle examination on ferritic steels and by liquid penetration examination on austenitic steels
and alloys,
- when no final examination of the weld by radiographic or ultrasonic methods is specified. This
examination is performed in accordance with paragraph S 7711 for the method to be used and
paragraphs S 7363 and S 7714 for the acceptance criteria.
S 7713.2 After completion of the weld

For completed welds, the examinations shall be performed after finishing and preparation as
required by the examination methods of SECTION III.
In general, when more than one examination are required, they shall be carried out in the following
chronological order: liquid penetrant, magnetic particle and ultrasonic examinations.
a) Volumetric examinations
1) Full-penetration welds and homogenous low alloy steel buttering, except for special cases
described in B 4460.
The final volumetric examination shall be carried out after final heat treatment; it may
however be carried out after intermediate heat treatment if this is performed at a temperature
at least equal to the minimum specified for final heat treatment.
If both radiographic and ultrasonic examinations are required, the final volumetric
examination after stress relieving heat treatment shall be an ultrasonic examination performed
in accordance with MC 2600. However, the latter may be performed before heat treatment in
accordance with MC 2600. In this case, after stress relieving heat treatment, a second
ultrasonic examination shall be performed using transverse wave beams only and with a
single refraction angle.
2) Claddings
Parts subject to one or more intermediate stress relieving heat treatments:
Ultrasonic examination shall be carried out after intermediate heat treatment if this is
performed at a temperature within the limits specified for the final stress relieving heat
treatment.
Parts subject to a single final stress relieving heat treatment:
The ultrasonic examination may be carried out before this treatment, provided that the liquid
penetrant examination is performed after this treatment.
In the case of parts subject to high stresses (e.g. the area of connection on the plane of
installation of internal fixtures, key housings, the area of connection of H-pipe nozzles on the
nozzle shell course of vessels), the ultrasonic examination shall be performed after final stress
relieving heat treatment.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 35
3) Bimetallic buttering
The final volumetric examination shall be performed after the final stress relieving heat
treatment or after an intermediate heat treatment if this is performed at a temperature within
the limits specified for the final stress relieving heat treatment.
For bimetallic joints, with safe ends, the final volumetric examination shall be the
radiographic examination. If the buttering is subjected to intermediate stress relieving heat
treatment before welding of the safe-ends, the ultrasonic examination shall be performed after
this treatment. When the supply boundary is the buttering for the execution of the bimetallic
joint, the final volumetric examination of this buttering shall be the ultrasonic examination.
b) Surface examinations
The time of inspection is left to the Manufacturer's discretion.
It shall be carried out after the final heat treatment, if the thicknesses involved, the processes
used or the nature of the materials give grounds for fears that defects may occur or may be
aggravated during the heat treatments. This does not apply to components assembled from parts
or products in appliance with the procurement specified contained in SECTION II.
However, the surface examination shall be carried out after the final stress relieving heat
treatment or after an intermediate heat treatment if this is performed at a temperature within the
limits specified for the final stress relieving heat treatment in the following cases:
- welds, made from backing strips when these have been removed,
- if the volumetric examination of the weld is not practicable.
c) Examinations to be performed on strength welds cladded with austenitic stainless steel

The radiographic examination shall be performed after cladding in the case of welds subject to
radiographic examination during in-service inspections. The Contractor is required to include a
list of the welds concerned with the equipment specification.
S 7714 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

Subject to the special requirements set out in S 7714.5, the acceptance criteria shall be as follows.
S 7714.1 Liquid penetrant examination

- Only indications > 2 mm are considered recordable conditions.
Note: However, any alignment in excess of 20 mm of indications which are close together, even if the latter are
of a size less than the recording threshold, shall be the subject of further analysis in order to determine the
nature of such indications.
- The following are unacceptable:

. linear indications,
. rounded indications whose greatest dimension is > 4 mm,
S 7000 / 36  n° 137-2012
. 3 or more indications in a line, less than 3 mm apart edge to edge,

. groups of 5 or more indications in a rectangular area of 100 cm2 chosen in the most
unfavourable manner in relation to the indications and whose largest dimension shall not
exceed 20 cm.
S 7714.2 Magnetic particle examination

Note: However, any alignment in excess of 20 mm of indications which are close together, even if the latter are

. non-linear indications > 4 mm,
. 3 or more indications in a line, less than 3 mm apart edge to edge or extending for more than
20 mm, if this distance is between 3 and 6 mm.
Two indications are considered as one if the distance separating them is less than twice the length
of the shorter.
S 7714.3 Radiographic examination

The following criteria apply to buttering and to strength welds with the limits defined in S 7712.
In the cases covered by S 7713.2 c), the following criteria also apply to the cladding as defects
located within the cladding may conceal defects in the weld during in-service inspection.
a) any fissure, crack, lack of fusion (incomplete fusion), lack of penetration, undercut,
b) any gas cavity if its largest dimension () is greater than the value given below:
WALL THICKNESS ()

(e) IN mm IN mm
e  4.5 e/3
4.5 < e  6 1.5
6 <e  10 2
10 < e  25 2.5
25 < e  50 3
50 < e 4
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 37
c) any linear (or clustered) gas cavities whose combined diameters total more than e over a length
of the lesser of the values 12e or 150 mm.
Two gas cavities are deemed to belong to the same line (or cluster) if the distance between them
is less than 6 times the diameter of the larger one,
d) any isolated inclusion if its largest dimension () is greater than the value given below:

(e) IN mm IN mm
e  6 1.5
6 < e  10 3
10 < e  60 e/3
60 <e 20
Two defects are considered as a single defect if the distance between them is less than 6 times
the length of the shorter one.
e) any set of inclusions whose combined lengths total more than e over a length of 12e.
Two inclusions are deemed to belong to the same set if the distance between them is less than 6
times the length of the longer one.
S 7714.4 Ultrasonic examination

1) On weld
- Any indications with an echo amplitude more than or equal to 50% of the reference echo
amplitude (Hd/Hr  1/2) shall be recorded.
. any non volumetric indications as specified in MC 2637 d),
. any volumetric indications whose length exceeds that specified in tables S 7714.4.1 and 2
in relation to the Hd/Hr ratio.
2) On buttering
Any indication shall be unacceptable whose length exceeds that specified in tables S 7714.4.1
and 2 in relation to the Hd/Hr ratio for welded joints.
3) On cladding
a) Volumetric indications
- any volumetric indication as specified in MC 2740 whose Hd > Hr/2 and whose length is
equal to or greater than 100 mm.
For the cladding of steam generator tube plates, this length is reduced to 50 mm.
S 7000 / 38  n° 137-2012
b) Continuous lack of fusion

- any indication of continuous lack of fusion, as defined in MC 2740, with an area equal to
or greater than that of the reference reflector.
If the total area of the zones showing a continuous lack of fusion with the base metal, as
defined in MC 2740 and according to the criteria mentioned above, is equal to or greater than
3% of the total area of the cladding, the latter shall be removed.
TABLE S 7714.4.1
Thickness  50 mm :
VALUE OF THE MAXIMUM AMPLITUDE Hd MAXIMUM PERMITTED LENGTH

of the defect echo compared with the amplitude Hr of indication corresponding to a defect
of the echo at the hole in the reference block or a group of defects
2 Hr <Hd unacceptable
3
Hr  Hd  2 Hr 20 mm
2
3
Hr  Hd  Hr 30 mm
2
1
Hr  Hd  Hr 60 mm
2
TABLE S 7714.4.2
Thickness < 50 mm :

of the defect echo compared with the amplitude Hr of indication corresponding to a defect
of the echo at the hole in the reference block or a group of defects
3 unacceptable
Hr  Hd
2
3 20 mm
Hr  Hd  Hr
2
3 30 mm
Hr  Hd  Hr
4
1 3
2 4
Note concerning the 2 tables above:
Individual indications of an amplitude below the specified threshold are not considered as defects needing repair.
However, if they are continuous for a length of more than 200 mm, they shall be further analyzed to determine
their nature.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 39
S 7714.5 Special requirements: liquid penetrant examination of seal welds and

of tube to heat exchanger tube plate welds
a) Seal weld
1) Before welding
Edges to be welded: no indication is allowed.
Adjacent zone to the edge to be welded with a width equal to the theoretical weld throat and
not exceeding 5 mm: firstly any indication greater than 1.5 mm and secondly any indication
of less than 1.5 mm if they are less than 3 mm apart shall be unacceptable.
2) After completion of the first pass, if this is executed without filler metal.
No indication is allowed in the weld metal.
3) On the completed weld

Weld metal: no indication is allowed.
Adjacent zone to the weld metal with a width equal to the theoretical weld throat and not
exceeding 5 mm; firstly any indication greater than 1.5 mm and secondly any indication less
than 1.5 mm if they are less than 3 mm apart shall be unacceptable.
b) Tube to heat exchanger tube plate welds

1) Before welding
The liquid penetrant examination shall be carried out on the plate or after final machining of
the cladding before drilling.
In the drilling area, any indication greater than 1.5 mm and any indications less than 1.5 mm
if they are less than 3 mm apart shall be unacceptable.

Adjacent zone to the weld metal with a width equal to the theoretical weld throat and not
exceeding 5 mm: firstly any indication greater than 1.5 mm and secondly any indications of
less than 1.5 mm if they are less than 3 mm apart shall be unacceptable.
S 7715 REPAIRS
When a non-destructive examination of a weld, cladding or buttering reveals a defect in excess of
the acceptable criteria, the defect shall be repaired by a procedure meeting the requirements of
S 7600. In the case of friction welding, no repairs shall be authorized.
POST EXCAVATION EXAMINATIONS

METHOD:
- by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination.
S 7000 / 40  n° 137-2012
EXTENT OF THE EXAMINATION

The whole area of the cavity.
In the special case of an excavation which generates an interstice allowing inspection product rise
by capillary action, it shall be permissible for this test to be waived.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
If the cavity is entirely contained within the weld metal, any indication > 1 mm is unacceptable.
If a part of the adjacent base metal is affected, the criteria applicable to this part are those defined in
S 7363.1 and 2, for the groove criteria, for welded joints and buttering, and criteria for surface to be
clad in the case of cladding.
EXAMINATION AFTER REPAIR BY WELDING

The methods used, the criteria applicable and the documents to be prepared are the same as those
required before repair to the type of joint concerned (tables S 7710.1 to 4).
S 7716 REPORT
a) Liquid penetrant examination
Indicated on the routine sheet in accordance with the requirements of A 3000. A report is
prepared only in case of non-conformance.
b) Magnetic particle examination

c) Radiographic examination
A report is always required.
d) US examination
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 41
TABLE S 7710.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
S 7000 / 42  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 7710.1
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 43
TABLE S 7710.1
S 7000 / 44  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 7710.1 (cont. 1)

 n° 140-2013 S 7000 / 45
S 7000 / 46  n° 137-2012

 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 47

S 7000 / 48  n° 140-2013

 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 49

S 7000 / 50  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 7710.2
REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPES
EXAMINATION ON SURFACES TO BE WELDED

TYPE AUSTENITIC x Non
Destructive
Criteria
FERRITIC x examination
1 : BUTT WELD ROLLED, FORGED x RES S 7363

(e  30 mm) x RES or MAG S 7363
e : thickness
CASTING x RES S 7363
(All thicknesses) x RES or MAG S 7363
2 : FULL PENETRATION
FILLET WELD ROLLED, FORGED x RES S 7363
(eA or eB  30 mm) x RES or MAG S 7363
2.1 Set on branch connection

ROLLED, FORGED
See
Additional where x x US (2)
Section II
eB  12 mm
Set on branch connection
according to figure B 3661 C
2.2 Set in branch connection

ROLLED, FORGED x RES S 7363
(eA or eB  30 mm) x RES or MAG S 7363

Set in branch connection according

to figure B 3661 C
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 51
TABLE S 7710.2
EXAMINATION ON SURFACES TO BE WELDED

Destructive Criteria
3 : PERMANENT ROLLED, FORGED

ATTACHMENTS TO PIPE
x RES or MAG
S 7363
(eA ou eB  30 min) x RES
S 7363
CASTING x RES or MAG S 7363

(All thicknesses) x RES S 7363
ROLLED, FORGED
See
Additional where x x US (2)
Section II
eB  12 mm
4 : TEMPORARY
ATTACHMENTS
none
5 : SEAL WELD
x x RES
S 7714.5
6 : SOCKET WELDS
none
S 7000 / 52  n° 137-2012

EXAMINATION DURING WELD OPERATION

1 : BUTT WELD x RES S 7363

Backing run
(see S 7713.1)
e : thickness x RES or MAG S 7363
2 : FULL PENETRATION
FILLET WELD
x RES S 7714.1
2.1 Set on branch connection Outside dia A  114 mm
Root or support
x RES or MAG S 7714.1
S 7714.2
Outside dia A > 114 mm None

2.2 Set in branch connection
x RES S 7714.1
Outside dia A  114 mm
Root or support
S 7714.2
Outside dia A > 114 mm None
Set in branch connection

 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 53

EXAMINATION DURING WELD OPERATION

3 : PERMANENT
ATTACHMENTS TO PIPE
x RES S 7714.1
Root pass or
backing run
S 7714.2
4 : TEMPORARY
ATTACHMENTS
None
5 : SEAL WELD
After the first pass, if this
is made without filler x x RES S 7714.5
metal
6 : SOCKET WELDS If RAD cannot be

performed on the
completed weld. After
execution of the first pass
x x RES S 7714.1
and every 3 filling layers
of the weld
S 7000 / 54  n° 137-2012

EXAMINATION AFTER WELD OPERATION

1 : BUTT WELD x RES S 7714.1

All thicknesses
x RAD S 7714.3
e : thickness All thicknesses x RES or S 7714.1
MAG S 7714.2
x RAD S 7714.3
Additional if x US S 7714.4
e > 20 mm
2 : FULL PENETRATION x RES or S 7714.1

FILLET WELD Inside dia A  60 mm MAG S 7714.2
x RES S 7714.1
2.1 Set on branch connection
x RES or S 7714.1
MAG S 7714.2
Inside dia A > 60 mm et x RAD* S 7714.3
Outside dia A  114 mm x RES S 7714.1
x RAD* S 7714.3
Outside dia A > 114 mm

(All thicknesses)
according to figure B 3661 C x RES or S 7714.1
MAG S 7714.2
AND x RAD 100% S 7714.3
** 2.2 Set in branch connection x RES S 7714.1
x RAD 100% S 7714.3
Additional for eA (set on

branch connection) x US S 7714.4
or eB (set in branch
Set in branch connection connection) greater than
according to figure B 3661 C 20 mm
* 1 film per branch connection, if this film shows an unacceptable defect, carry out a 100% radiographic
examination of the branch connection weld
** See special requirements in MC 3312
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 55

EXAMINATION AFTER WELD OPERATION

3 : PERMANENT
ATTACHMENTS TO PIPE
All thicknesses x RES S 7714.1

S 7714.2
Additional for
eA > 20 mm x US S 7714.4
4 : TEMPORARY
ATTACHMENTS On part B after elimination
and
reworking of surface
condition x RES S 7714.1

S 7714.2
5 : SEAL WELD
x x RES S 7714.5
6 : SOCKET WELDS
x x RES S 7714.1
RAD (*) S 7741
(S 7740)
* If RAD cannot be performed, see "examination during weld operation".
S 7000 / 56  n° 137-2012

Tables S 7720.1 and 2, below, cover the non-destructive examinations to be carried out on welds,
cladding and buttering.
Tables S 7720.1 contain general requirements while tables S 7720.2 only concern pipes and their
permanent and temporary attachments.
In the tables, "austenitic" covers austenitic and austeno-ferritic stainless steels, as well as nickel
base alloy (except in the special case of buttering and cladding, dealt with case per case). Titles
against "austenitic" and "ferritic" entries refer to:
- base metals, for surfaces to be welded
- deposited metal, in other cases (for welds without filler metal, the nature of the melted zone
should be considered).
The symbols contained in the tables have the following meanings:

- RES : liquid penetrant examination,
- MAG : magnetic particle examination,
- RAD : radiographic examination,
- US : ultrasonic examination.
References Nos. (1), (2), (3) and (4) have the following meanings:
(1) The magnetic particle examination can be performed at welding temperature.
(2) The US examination shall be performed on edges or surfaces to be welded, unless a 100%
examination has already been performed at the material procurement stage. This examination is
not required for castings or centrifuged castings.
(3) The US examination shall be performed after intermediate machining if the final stage is
incompatible with examination.
(4) Longitudinal US examination to be performed according to the method and criteria applied to
procurement of the plates in order to ensure the absence of lamellar tearing; only applicable
when weld A/B is subjected to high stress.
SPECIAL CASE OF WELD INTERSECTIONS AND OF SLIGHTLY OFFSET

LONGITUDINAL WELDS.
If the requirements of chapter C 3252.1 and C 3352.2 for tanks or C 3661.1 for piping cannot be
met, the following additional examination shall be performed.
1) Weld intersection
Ultrasonic examination (where e > 10 mm) of each run over a distance of at least 3 e from the
theoretical point of intersection (e is the greater of the thicknesses of the parts to be assembled).
2) For longitudinal welds offset at a distance less than the smaller of the two values 2 e or 40 mm
for the butt welds (girth welds) of shells or pipes.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 57
Ultrasonic examination (where e > 10 mm) of the zone defined below:

- on the girth weld:
. a length of the weld lying between the external edges of the longitudinal welds plus 2 e at
each end,
- on the longitudinal welds:

. 2 e from the girth weld.
S 7721 METHOD
- By magnetic particle examination (carbon and low-alloy steels) for welds joints of thickness
> 50 mm and for welds made with backing strips when these have been removed.
Where difficulties arise in performing magnetic particle examination, the Manufacturer may
request the Contractor's permission to substitute a liquid penetrant examination, stating the
reasons for this request.
- By magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination in other cases.

These examinations shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of chapters
MC 5000 for magnetic particle examination and MC 4000 for liquid penetrant examination.
Welds shall be subjected to volumetric examination, using the radiographic technique. In
addition, ferritic welds shall be subjected to a supplementary ultrasonic examination when the
thickness of the weld is greater than 50 mm.
Where there is difficulty in performing the radiographic examination, it may be replaced by
ultrasonic examination (for austenitic welds, see the stipulations in the note under heading
MC 2610).
Cladding and buttering shall be subjected to ultrasonic examination. Buttering carried out for the
execution of mixed butt welds shall be subjected to radiographic examination.
radiographic examination and MC 2600 and MC 2700 for ultrasonic examination.
Tables S 7720.1 and 2 specify the special provisions adopted for certain types of welds for
which volumetric examination is not required or cannot be performed, i.e.:
- fillet welds for permanent or temporary attachments,
- fillet welds for flanges or branch pipes with an inside diameter not greater than 60 mm for
vessels,
- fillet welds of branch pipes with an outside diameter not greater than 114 mm for pipes,
- partial penetration welds,
- seal welds and tube to heat exchanger tube plate welds.
S 7000 / 58  n° 137-2012
S 7722 EXTENT OF THE EXAMINATION

a) Butt welds (type 1)
to examination are as follows:
1) For surface examinations, the weld metal and adjacent base metal on either side of the joint
over a width of at least 15 mm.
This examination is performed on the outer face of the weld and on the inner face when
accessible.
2) for volumetric examination, the weld metal and the adjacent base metal, over a distance of:
where e > 30 mm,
where e  30 mm.
MC 3312.5.2.b).
b) Fillet welds
These welds shall be examined over their entire length. The areas of complete welds subjected to
examination are as follows:
1) For surface examinations, the weld metal and the adjacent base metal of parts A and B over a
width of at least 15 mm. The examination shall be performed on the outer face of the weld
and, where applicable, on the inner face when accessible.
2) For volumetric examination, the weld metal and the adjacent base metal of part A for set-on
branches, and of part B for set-in branches, over a distance of:
where e > 30 mm (e = thickness of wearing part),
where e  30 mm (e = thickness of wearing part).
MC 3312.5.2.b).
Note: The application of these general rules (S 7722 a) and b) implies that the Contractor should make
provisions with respect to the shape and position of the groove allowing him to ensure that the weld
metal is examined in its entirety in accordance with SECTIONS III and IV.
The 10 mm and 5 mm are measured from the actual groove on the surface of the part.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 59
c) Cladding and buttering

The entire surface of cladding and buttering shall be examined. The weld metal and base metal
are subjected to volumetric examination, performed in accordance with MC 2700, to check
adherence.
Buttering carried out for the execution of heterogeneous butt welds shall be subjected to either
radiographic examination, under the conditions stipulated in S 7722.a) 2), or ultrasonic
examination in accordance with the second paragraph of MC 2735.2.b where radiographic
examination is not possible due to the geometrical configuration of the part after buttering.
d) General remark
The criteria defined in S 7724 apply to the zones subjected to examination defined above. If,
during these examinations, localized indications are detected outside these zones, the criteria
corresponding to those adopted for part procurement shall be applied.
This final requirement shall also apply to the area adjacent to welded joint on castings on
condition that the incriminated indications are identified as casting defects present before
welding. Such indications shall be mentioned in the radiographic examination report.

S 7723.1 During execution of the weld
- For welds at the intermediate stage, the examination when required, shall be performed after
preparation of the surface, as required in SECTION III.
- For his internal procedures, the Manufacturer is recommended to carry out a surface
examination by magnetic particle examination, or liquid penetrant examination, after the
preparation for the backing run. This examination is mandatory in following cases:
. for welds made with backing strips when the removal of the backing strip is followed by a
backing run. After preparation of the back of the weld, an examination shall be carried out by
magnetic particle examination on ferritic steels and by liquid penetrant examination on
austenitic stainless steels,
. when no final examination of the weld by radiographic or ultrasonic examination method is
required. This examination shall be performed in accordance with paragraphs S 7721 for the
method to be used and S 7363 and S 7724 for the acceptance criteria.
S 7723.2 After completion of the weld

- For completed welds, the examination shall be performed after finishing and preparation, as
In general, when more than one examination is required, they shall be carried out in the following
chronological order: liquid penetrant examination, magnetic particle examination, ultrasonic
examination.
S 7000 / 60  n° 137-2012
a) Volumetric examination
1) Full penetration welds and buttering
The final volumetric examination shall be carried out after final heat treatment; it may
however be carried out after intermediate heat treatment if this is performed at a temperature
at least equal to the minimum specified for final heat treatment.
When radiographic ultrasonic examinations are required, the final volumetric examination
after stress relieving heat treatment shall be an ultrasonic examination performed in
accordance with the requirements of MC 2600. However, this examination may be performed
prior to heat treatment, in accordance with MC 2600. In this case, after stress relieving heat
treatment, a second ultrasonic examination shall be carried out with the aid of shear waves
and one angle of refraction only.
2) Cladding
The ultrasonic examination shall be carried out after intermediate heat treatment, if this is
performed at a temperature within the limits specified for the final stress relieving heat
treatment. If the clad component is subjected to one final stress relieving heat treatment, the
ultrasonic examination may be carried out before this treatment, provided that the liquid
penetrant examination is carried out subsequently.
b) Surface examinations
The time of examination is left to the Manufacturer's discretion.
It shall be carried out after the final heat treatment if the thickness involved, the processes used
or the type of the materials give grounds for fears that defects may occur or may be aggravated
during the heat treatments. This does not apply to components assembled from parts or products
in compliance with procurement specifications contained in SECTION II.
However, the surface examination shall be carried out after the final stress relieving heat
treatment or after an intermediate heat treatment, if this is performed at a temperature within the
limits specified for the final stress relieving heat treatment in the following cases:
- welds made with backing strips when these have been removed,
- if volumetric examination of the weld is not practicable.
c) Examination to be performed on strength welds cladded with austenitic stainless steel
The radiographic examination may be carried out before cladding.

Subject to the special requirements of S 7724.5, the acceptance criteria are as follows:
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 61

Note : However, any alignment in excess of 20 mm of indications which are close together, even if the latter are

. rounded indications whose greatest dimension is > 4 mm,
. groups of 8 or more indications in a rectangular area of 100 cm2 chosen in the most
exceed 20 cm.

Note : However, any alignment in excess of 20 mm of indications which are close together, even if the latter are

. non-linear indications > 4 mm,
of the shorter.

The following criteria apply to buttering and to strength welds within the limits defined in S 7722.
The following are unacceptable
a) any fissure, cracks, lack of fusion (incomplete fusion), lack of penetration or undercut. Any
continuous undercut detected on the films shall be examined visually. The acceptance criteria
are those defined in S 7461.
b) any gas cavity with diameter greater than the smaller of the values 6 mm or e/3,
of the lesser of the values 12e or 150 mm,
S 7000 / 62  n° 137-2012
d) any isolated slag inclusion if its largest dimension (ℓ) is equal to or greater than the value given
below:
(e) IN mm IN mm
e  18 6
18 < e  60 e/3
60 < e 20
e) sets of inclusions whose combined lengths total more than e over a length of 12e.
Two inclusions are deemed to belong to the same set if the distance between them is less than 6
times the length of the larger one.
S 7724.4 Ultrasonic examination

ON WELD AND BUTTERING
- All indications with an echo amplitude greater than or equal to 50% the reference echo
amplitude (Hd/Hr  1/2) shall be recorded.
. any non-volumetric indication as defined in MC 2637 d),
. any volumetric indication whose length exceeds that specified in the following tables in
relation the Hd/Hr ratio:
ON CLADDINGS
a) Volumetric indications
. any volumetric indication or group of indications, as defined in MC 2740, where
HD > Hr/2 and whose length is equal to or greater than 100 mm.
b) Continuous lack of fusion

. one or more indications of continuous lack of fusion as defined in MC 2740, with an area
equal to or greater than that of the reference reflector,
. if the total area of the zones showing a continuous lack of fusion with the base metal as
defined in MC 2740 and according to the criteria given above, is equal to or greater than
5% of the total area of the cladding, the latter shall be removed.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 63
TABLE S 7724.4.1
Thickness  50mm :

of the defect echo compared with the amplitude Hr of indication corresponding to a
of the echo at the hole in the reference block defect or a group of defects
2 Hr <Hd unacceptable
3
Hr  Hd  2 Hr
20 mm
2
3
2
1
2
TABLE S 7724.4.2
Thickness < 50 mm :

of the defect echo compared with the amplitude Hr of indication corresponding to a
of the echo at the hole in the reference block defect or a group of defects
3
Hr  Hd unacceptable
2
3
2
3
4
1 3
2 4
Note concerning the 2 tables above:
Individual indications of an amplitude below the specified threshold are not considered as defects
needing repair. However, if they are continuous for a length of more than 200 mm, they shall be further
analyzed to determine their nature.
S 7724.5 Special requirements: liquid penetrant examination of seal welds and of

tube to heat-exchanger tube plate welds
a) Seal weld
1) Before weldings
Edges to be welded: no indication is allowed.
Zone adjoining the edges to be welded with a width equal to the theoretical weld throat and
not exceeding 5 mm: firstly any indication greater than 1.5 mm and secondly any indications
of less than 1.5 mm if they are less than 3 mm apart are unacceptable.
S 7000 / 64  n° 137-2012
2) After the first pass, if this is executed without filler metal

No indication is allowed in the weld metal.

Zone adjoining the edges to be welded with a width equal to the theoretical weld throat and
not exceeding 5 mm: firstly any indication greater than 1.5 mm and secondly any indications
of less than 1.5 mm if they are less than 3 mm apart are unacceptable.
b) Tube to heat exchanger tube plate welds

1) Before welding
The liquid penetrant examination shall be carried out on the plate or after final machining of
the cladding, before drilling: firstly any indication greater than 1.5 mm and secondly any
indications of less than 1.5 mm if they are less than 3 mm apart are unacceptable in the
drilling area.

Weld metal: no indication is allowed:
Zone adjoining the weld metal over a width equal to the theoretical weld throat and not
exceeding 5 mm: firstly any indication greater than 1.5 mm and secondly any indications of
less than 1.5 mm if they are less than 3 mm apart are unacceptable.
S 7725 REPAIRS
If an unacceptable defect is revealed in the course of non-destructive examination of a welded joint,
cladding or buttering, a repair shall be carried out in accordance with a procedure meeting the
requirements of S 7600.
EXAMINATION AFTER EXCAVATION

METHOD
- magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination.
EXTENT OF EXAMINATION
- the entire surface of the cavity.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
If the cavity is entirely contained within the area of the weld metal any indication greater than 2 mm
is unacceptable.
If a part of the adjacent base metal is affected, the criteria applicable to this part shall be those
defined in S 7363, taking account for the groove criteria for the welded joints and buttering, and
criteria for surface to be clad in the case of cladding.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 65
EXAMINATION AFTER REPAIR BY WELDING

The methods used, the criteria applicable and the documents to be prepared are the same as those
required before repair to the type of joint concerned (tables S 7720. 1 and 2).
S 7726 REPORT
a) Liquid penetrant examination
b) Magnetic particle examination

Indicated on the routing sheet in accordance with the requirements of A 3000. A report is
c) Radiographic examination
d) US examination
S 7000 / 66  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 7720.1
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 67
TABLE S 7720.1
S 7000 / 68  n° 137-2012
TABLEAU S 7720.1
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 69
TABLEAU S 7720.1 (cont. 1)

S 7000 / 70  n° 137-2012

 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 71

S 7000 / 72  n° 137-2012

 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 73

S 7000 / 74  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 7720.1 (suite 2)

 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 75
TABLE S 7720.2
S 7000 / 76  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 7720.2
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 77

S 7000 / 78  n° 137-2012

 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 79
TABLE S 7720.2 (suite 2)

S 7000 / 80  n° 137-2012

 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 81

S 7731 METHOD
By liquid penetrant or magnetic particle examination in accordance with the requirements of
chapters MC 4000 and MC 5000 respectively.
For socket welded joints, refer to the requirements stipulated in table S 7720.2.
By radiographic examination in accordance with the requirements of chapter MC 3300.
If radiographic examination cannot be performed, special provisions shall be stipulated in this
corresponding equipment specification.
S 7732 EXTENT
to examination are the weld metal and the adjacent base metal on either side of the weld over a
length of at least 15 mm.
The examination shall be performed on the outer face of the weld and, where applicable, on the
inner face when accessible.
This examination shall consist of systematic examination of weld nodes and examination by
sampling of standard lengths, in accordance with the following conditions:
- the length of the joints to be examined (except for pipes) having been divided into
homogeneous lots (same procedure, same thickness, same operator), a minimum of 10% of
the length of the welded joints shall be examined on each lot, the joint sections checked
during node inspection are not included in the standard lengths checks.
In the case of piping, the homogenous lots are composed on a procedure and operator basis
and for each lot, a 100% check of 1 in 10 welds will be carried out. The systematic
examination of the weld nodes is not necessary for welds meeting at least one of the
conditions defined in table S 7732.
- the existence in the sample of defects exceeding the acceptance criteria shall require a full
examination of the corresponding lot. However, for manual welding processes, when an
unacceptable defect is found, the check shall also be performed on two other welds of the
same lot. The existence of one or more unacceptable defects in these welds shall entail
examination of the entire lot.
S 7000 / 82  n° 137-2012
TABLE S 7732
CONDITIONS MAXIMUM SERVICE MAXIMUM SERVICE INTERNAL

FLUIDS TEMPERATURE PRESSURE DIAMETER
CARRIED (°C) (bar) PMS (mm)
Superheated water
 120  30  110
Steam
Fluid with either a chemically
or radioactively harmful  120  30  80
biological effect
The areas of completed welds subjected to examination are defined in S 7722.a)2) for butt welds
and S 7722.b)2) for fillet welds.
It should be noted that the Surveillance agent or Inspector may specify the areas to be checked
during the 10% sampling.
c) General remark
The criteria defined in S 7734 shall apply to areas subjected to the examinations defined above.
If, during these examinations, localized indications outside these areas are discovered, the criteria
applicable to part procurement shall be applied to such indications.
This requirement shall also apply to the area adjacent to welded joint on castings on condition
that the incriminated indications are identified as casting defects present before welding.
Such indications shall be mentioned in the radiographic examination report.

a) During execution of the weld
For his internal purposes, the Manufacturer is recommended to carry out a surface examination
by magnetic particle examination or liquid penetrant examination after preparation of the
backing run.
b) After execution of the weld

For completed welds, the examinations shall be performed after finishing and preparation as
SURFACE EXAMINATION
The examination stage is left to the Manufacturer's discretion.
The examination shall be carried out after final heat treatment, if the thicknesses involved, the
processes used or the type of the materials give grounds for fears that defects may occur or may
be aggravated during the heat treatments. This does not apply to equipment built with parts or
products to the reference technical specifications contained in SECTION II.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 83
VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
The final volumetric examination shall be carried out after final heat treatment; it may however,
be carried out after intermediate heat treatment if this is performed at a temperature at least equal
to the minimum specified for final heat treatment.

- Only indications greater than 2 mm are considered.
Note : However, any alignment in excess of 20 mm of indications which are close together, even if the latter are of
a size less than the recording threshold, shall be the subject of further analysis in order to determine the

. rounded indications whose largest dimension is greater than 4 mm,
. groups of 12 or more indications in a rectangular area of 100 cm2, chosen in the most
exceed 20 cm.

- Only indications greater than 2 mm are considered.
Note : However, any alignment in excess of 20 mm of indications which are close together, even if the latter are of
a size less than the recording threshold, shall be the subject of further analysis in order to determine the

. non-linear indications greater than 4 mm,
of the shorter.

The following criteria apply to buttering welds and to strength joints within the limits defined
in S 7732.
S 7000 / 84  n° 137-2012

a) any fissure, crack, lack of fusion (incomplete fusion), lack of penetration or undercut. Any
continuous undercut detected on the films shall be examined visually. The acceptance criteria are
those defined in S 7462.
b) any gas cavity whose diameter exceeds the lesser of the values 6 mm or e/3,
of the lesser of the values 12e or 150 mm,
d) any inclusion whose length () is greater than the value given below:

(e) IN mm IN mm
e  9 6
9 < e  30 2e/3
30 < e 20
e) sets of inclusions whose combined lengths total more than 2e over a length of 12e.
Two inclusions are deemed to belong to the same set if the distance between them is less than
6 times the length of the larger one,
Note:
For corner welds and flat head/shell assemblies subjected to a maximum in-service pressure of more than 20 bar or
such that shell thickness exceeds 10 mm:
1) the requirements stipulated in S 7724 b, c, e, replace those given in S 7734 b, c, e,
2) table S 7724 d replaces table S 7734d.
S 7740 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION

SOCKET WELDED JOINTS
Radiographic examination, if required, shall be performed in accordance with MC 3312.7.d.
S 7741 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION CRITERIA

The interpretable zone shall comprise the melted metal and its connecting zone in accordance with
figure MC 3312.7.d). Acceptance criteria are as follows:
a) carbon monoxide porosities: unacceptable,
b) inclusions which invalidate the minimum throat value, or which are greater than or equal to
1.5 mm in size on the film, are unacceptable,
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 85
c) throat thickness shall be measured (it should be noted that the dimensional check with a gauge
and reference marking is however preferable in establishing that the requirements of chapters B,
C and D 3000 have been complied with),
d) defects duly characterized as such and without any doubt be interpreted as lacks of fusion,
cracks, or lack of penetration, are unacceptable.
S 7742 DEGREE OF EXAMINATION

1) Class 1 welds:
Welds shall be examined in accordance with MC 3312.7.d) the criteria of S 7741 being applied.
2) Class 2 and 3 welds:

a) The total number of welds performed during a given period (minimum 1 week, maximum one
month) shall be divided into homogeneous lots (same welder or welding operator, same
process, same base metal, same class - level 2 and 3 can be grouped together).
One examination by sampling shall be performed on each lot. The number of welds in each lot
shall constitute a significant sample.
The Surveillance Agent or Inspector may stipulate the selection of welds to be radiographed
during the examination by sampling (taking into account weld dimensions and positions),
within the limits of the lot defined above.
NOTE : All welds which cannot be radiographically examined shall be subjected to a 100% check in
accordance with tables S 7720.2 (continuation sheets 1 and 2) and shall be excluded from
lots subjected to radiographic examination by sampling.
b) Each designated weld shall be radiographed in accordance with MC 3312.7 d), the criteria of
S 7741 being applied.
If one of the films reveals an unacceptable defect, welds performed before and after the
concerned weld shall be radiographed.
If these films reveal one or more unacceptable defects, four other welds in the same lot shall
then be radiographed.
If the corresponding films again reveal an unacceptable defect, the entire lot shall be
radiographed.
S7800 DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF PRODUCTION WELDS

PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS
S 7810 PRINCIPLES
The Manufacturer shall prepare production weld test coupons during manufacture as evidence of the
consistency and quality of the production welds and to ensure conformity with the operation
requirements determined by the welding procedure qualification test.
S 7000 / 86  n° 137-2012
The production weld test coupons shall be representative * of the production welds to which they
refer. The base and filler metals shall be in accordance with the requirements of special procurement
and acceptance specifications.
The base metal or similar (in the case of buttering, cladding, etc.) shall, in order of preference:
- be taken from the materials supplied for the component,
- be taken from the heat from which any products used in this manufacturing process are derived.
If both the above requirements are technically impossible, the Manufacturer shall define the
methods used to ensure that the metal is properly representative.
The direction of primary extension of the base metal test coupon shall be identified, where
applicable, and shall correspond to the conditions of the welding procedure qualifications. However,
for class 2 and 3 equipment, the orientation of the base metal test coupons may differ from the
qualification test. The filler materials shall be taken from lots used for the production welds.
The production weld test coupon shall be executed by the welders and/or welding operators who
executed the production welds concerned by the execution of this test coupon.
The same or similar tools or welding equipment as those used for production welds shall be used for
the execution of this production weld test coupon.
* When the welding procedure has been qualified by extension or by combination of other qualification, the
production weld test coupon(s) to be produced shall preferably be chosen to be representative of the production
joints on which this extension is based.
S 7820 NUMBER OF PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS

S 7821 GENERAL
As a general rule, and subject to the special requirements below, the following shall be executed:
- for the main joints of class 1, 2 and 3 equipments (vessels, piping, valves, etc.) excluding welds
on branch pipes, nozzles, access openings and flanges, and socket welds, 1 production weld test
coupon:
. per welding procedure qualification,
. per workshop (unless welding procedure qualification has been transferred in accordance with
S 6500),
. per pressure retaining equipment.
On the other hand, under the requirements of this Code for class 2 and 3 components other than
piping, production weld test coupons are not required for girth welds.
S 7822 SPECIAL CASES

With reference to the general requirements of S 7821, the following additional requirements
are applicable:
 n° 144-2014 S 7000 / 87
a) Tube to heat-exchanger tube plates welds (including steam generators)

The following shall be prepared:
- 1 test weld when each operator starts work,
- 1 test weld for at least every 100 welds by automatic welding equipment: this test weld shall
be made by the welding operator who made one of the first of these 100 welds.
For each change the welding equipment setting, defined as essential by the workshop control
section and specified in the relevant technical documents, 1 test weld shall be made before this
welding equipment is used and thereafter for every 100 welds.
The production weld test coupon shall include areas welded with the different heat exchanger
tube plate cladding procedures (where applicable). For each of these areas, a minimum of 10 tube
welds shall be made, with the exception of heat exchangers comprising less than 1000 tubes for
which the minimum shall be 3 tubes.
All the tube-to-plate welding procedures used during manufacture qualification (including during
repair) must be used when making the test coupon.
b) Class 1, 2 and 3 pipe welds

Each year, starting form the start of manufacture, at least one and at most two production weld
test coupons shall be taken per workshop welding procedure qualification (except where there is
a qualification transfer in accordance with S 6000), and per site, in accordance with the following
conditions:
- one test coupon after completion of the first two months of production,
- a second test coupon in either of the following cases:
. if the combine length of welds performed according to the same welding procedure
qualification exceeds 30 m,
. if the number of welds performed according to the same welding procedure qualification
exceeds 100,
this second test coupon shall be produced as soon as one of these quotas is reached in
production.
Note : In the case of class 3 pipes, it shall be acceptable to limit the rate of production of test coupons to three per
consecutive two year period irrespective of the number or length of welds produced according to the same
c) Class 1 and 2 claddings

In this particular case, no production weld test coupon is required, but samples shall be taken
from the cladding for chemical analysis in accordance with S 7860.
S 7000 / 88  n° 137-2012
d) Class 2 and 3 grouped components

For identical components, fabricated in series, the number of production weld test coupons may
be determine by reference to the cumulated length of joints relating to the same welding
procedure qualification, and performed on these components during 30 consecutive days
maximum. One production weld test coupon shall be executed per lot or fraction of the last lot
fabricated, the successive lots forming a geometrical progression of 5 based on an initial length
of 60 m.
Note : Other special cases are dealt with in B, C and D 4000.
S 7830 WELDING OF PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS

Test coupons shall be welded in accordance with the corresponding production welds and whenever
possible in the extension of a longitudinal weld.
The welding of the test coupon shall be carried out under the supervision of the workshop inspection
section by welders or welding operators carrying out the corresponding production welds, using the
same welding parameters and the same type of welding equipment. Readings (or recordings) shall
be taken in the same way as in welding procedure qualification tests.
It is forbidden to repair defects detected during the final non-destructive examination except in the
case of tube to tube plate welds (see S 7822.a)). The size and cause of these defects shall be stated in
the report.
Where weld test coupons produce unacceptable results, welding procedure qualification shall be
suspended unless the Manufacturer can demonstrate that the procedure is not at fault.
The heat treatments applied to these test coupons shall be carried out according to the requirements
of S 7543.
The dimensions of the production weld test coupons shall be sufficient for the non-destruction
examinations required by S 7850 and shall meet the following requirements:
- for coupons whose thickness does not exceed 100 mm, the width of each part (or of each section
of tube) to be welded must not be less than 150 mm and 2 e (where e is the thickness of the test
coupon),
- for coupons whose thickness exceeds 100 mm, the width of each part to be welded must be
greater than 200 mm and e (where e is the thickness of the test coupon),
- coupons shall be long enough for all the tests, retests and simulated repairs (specified in S 3120)
required for qualification to be performed.
S 7840 EXAMINATION
The production weld test coupons shall be examined as quickly as possible after completion of the
welding and heat treatment operations. Under all circumstances, destructive tests shall be
performed, within two months of the non destructive examination of the production welds
corresponding to this test coupon.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 89
In the case of tube to heat exchanger or steam generator tube plate welds, the examination methods
for the test welds (each of which shall be considered as representative of the corresponding, duly
identified production welds), shall be specified by the Manufacturer in accordance with his technical
expertise in order to be able to:
- guarantee the required quality of the welds (see S 7850) and
- detect and correct any deterioration in quality.
S 7850 TEST
The production weld test coupon is divided into two parts (if the test coupon is subjected to post
weld heat treatment):
- the first (considered to be the actual test coupon) is subjected to the same heat treatments as the
production weld and is heat treated at the same time as the latter, unless this is technically
impossible. It shall be sufficiently long so that the specified tests and retests can be performed,
- the second part, non-heat treated part (or subjected to simulated stress relieving heat treatment) is
used to detect and correct any deterioration in quality or is retained for retests or simulated
repairs if any (see S 3120). According to circumstances and his experience, the Manufacturer
shall specify the length of this part, which, in the case of pipes, may consist of off-cuts not used
for the tests. This part shall be retained pending acceptance of the production weld test coupon.
The production weld test coupon shall be subjected to the same non-destructive tests as the
production welds and the acceptance criteria corresponding to the most stringent quality
requirements for the welds concerned shall be applied (1).
The test specimens shall be taken from positions outside areas containing defects unacceptable
according to the criteria of the non-destructive examination.
The series of tests to be performed on the weld test coupons and the results to be obtained are the
same as for the welding procedure qualification test coupons (see S 3000). Account shall be taken of
the following:
a) additional impact tests are not required,
b) chemical analysis. This should be performed outside the dilution zone. If this is not possible, the
results of chemical analysis (and, in the case of austenitic-ferritic stainless steels, the delta ferrite
content analysis) of the deposited weld metal that were obtained during acceptance of the lot(s)
of filler metal used to produce the test coupon, shall be recorded in the production weld test
coupon report, with a reference to the original report.
c) for class 2 and 3 components:
- the longitudinal weld metal tensile tests are not required,
- the impact tests on the heat-affected zone of the base metal are generally only required to the
depth used for acceptance testing of the base metal. However, in the special case of non
stress-relieved heat treated carbon and low-alloy steels, these tests shall be performed at the
surface.
_____________________________________
(1) The leak test is not required for tube to heat exchanger or steam generator plate test welds.
S 7000 / 90  n° 137-2012
d) For the KV impact tests defined in S 3200 Para 7.4.5 c), a mean value at room temperature
(measured on three test specimens) of at least 50 J and a minimum individual value of 35 J (only
one result may be below the guaranteed mean value) shall be applied.
e) if the results of the series of tests and retests are not in accordance with the requirements of
subparagraph d), in order that the component may be considered as complying with the
requirements of RCC-M, the Manufacturer shall carry out an investigation and prepare a report.
The investigation shall include at least:
- an inquiry into the reasons for these results,
- an analysis of their consequences,
- additional findings obtained by studies or direct examinations for the equipment itself
demonstrating that its usefulness is not affected.
If, exceptionally, a mistake in the preparation or analysis of a subsequently identified production
weld test coupon makes the latter partially or totally unrepresentative, the Manufacturer shall
investigate the data which has been lost and their potential consequences, and shall specify
measures by which the situation can be remedied.
f) tube to heat exchanger tube plate weld test coupon tests.

The Manufacturer shall:
- identify any quality deficiency and take the relevant corrective action where the following
limits are not complied with:
. mean throat thickness value on 10 consecutive welded tube:  0.8 e.
. root discontinuity ≤ 0.24 e with 0.30 mm maximum,
- obtain the following results:
. individual throat thickness  0.66 e,
g) for class 2 and 3 pipe welds of thickness  30 mm, it shall be acceptable to produce only a single
test coupon.
If all the prescribed test specimens cannot be taken from this single test coupon for reasons of
geometry, the tests should preferably be performed in the following order:
- one tensile test across the weld metal
- metallographic and, if required, hardness tests
- chemical analysis.
- root bend test
- energy absorbed by breakage in the heat-affected zone, if required
- energy absorbed by breakage in the deposited metal at the root, if required
- energy absorbed by breakage in the deposited metal at the skin, if required.
- face or side bend test
- tensile test across the weld metal
- root bend test
- face or side bend test.
 n° 137-2012 S 7000 / 91
S 7860 SPECIAL CASES OF CHEMICAL ANALYSES OF

DISSIMILAR-METAL JOINTS
S 7861 STAINLESS STEEL CLADDING ON CARBON OR
LOW-ALLOY STEELS
1) Alloy elements to be checked
In accordance with the requirements of chapter S 3000.
2) Sampling
Metal chips shall be taken from the final layer of the cladding to a depth of 2 mm below the
surface.
3) Number of samples
a) Cladding by submerged arc welding with strip electrode
1 sample from the first run then 1 every n runs at 600 mm intervals.
Special cases:
- small workpieces: 1 sample from the first run, then 1 every n runs at 300 mm intervals,
- cladding deposited on a zone including a weld between two clad parts: 1 sample only.
Note : When new lots of filler materials are used, samples shall be taken starting with the first run deposited after the
change of lot.
b) Cladding by the shielded metal arc process

Class 1 component cladding:
One sample per component, per part and per cladding on a zone including a weld between two
clad parts.
Class 2 component cladding.
Two samples per component. One perpendicular to the cladding of a welded joint, the other
perpendicular to a base metal area, chosen, if necessary, from the grade with the highest
specified carbon content. It should be noted that the Surveillance Agent or Inspector may
stipulate the sample location within the limits defined above.
c) in the case of cladding by other methods (MIG, MAG, TIG, hot wire TIG, etc.) the number of
samples shall be:
- as given in paragraph a) applicable to strip electrodes if the bead width exceeds 20 mm,
- as given in paragraph a) if the bead width is less than or equal to 20 mm,
4) Time of sampling
Before stress relieving heat treatment.
S 7000 / 92  n° 140-2013
5) Acceptance criteria
Reference text S 3634 b). Where the carbon content is between 0.035% and 0.040% note (1)
shall not apply; two additional samples shall be taken from the same zone and their carbon
content shall be less than 0.040%.
S 7862 NICKEL BASE ALLOY CLADDING ON CARBON OR

LOW-ALLOY STEELS
S 7862.1 Layers in contact with the fluid
1) Alloy elements to be checked
In accordance with the requirements of S 3000.
2) Sampling
Metal chips shall be taken from the final layer of the cladding to a depth of 2 mm below the
surface.
3) Number of samples
a) Strip cladding
1 sample on the first run then 1 sample every n runs at 300 mm intervals.
b) Cladding by the covered electrode metal arc process

1 sample only per equipment, per part and per cladding weld crotch area.
c) in the case of cladding by other methods (MIG, MAG, TIG, hot wire TIG, etc.) the number of
samples shall be:
- as given in paragraph a) applicable to strip electrodes if the bead width exceeds 20 mm
- as given in paragraph a) if the bead width is less than or equal to 20 mm,
4) Time of sampling
Before stress relieving heat treatment
5) Acceptance criteria
Reference chapter: S 3000.
S 7862.2 Layers not in contact with the fluid

A check of the content of iron, silicon and niobium plus tantalum alloying elements shall be made
on the layers affected by the welding of tubes on the tube plate and for which the maximum
specified iron content exceeds 15%.
One test specimen only need be taken, and it may be taken from the test coupon for tube welding on
the plate. Acceptance criteria shall be those of S 3000.
 n° 140-2013 S 7000 / 93
S 7863 STAINLESS STEEL TO CARBON OR LOW ALLOY STEEL

BUTTERING PERFORMED BY MANUAL, SEMI-AUTOMATIC
OR AUTOMATIC WELDING
A sample for chemical analysis shall be taken from the first layer of each joint in a standard zone of
the deposited metal. Carbon, chromium and nickel contents shall meet the required values stipulated
in S 3512 for qualification.
S 7870 PRODUCTIONS WELD TEST COUPON REPORTS

The report shall be prepared by the Manufacture and shall cover:
- the conditions (required and as recorded) for operation on the test coupon, and in particular the
welding sequences, the names of the welders and the lots of filler materials used etc.,
- the non-destructive examination performed and the results obtained,
- the destructive examinations performed together with the required values and the results
obtained.
S 7000 / 94  n° 140-2013
S 8000
WELD-DEPOSITED HARDFACING ON CARBON,

LOW-ALLOY OR ALLOY STEELS
S 8100 GENERAL
This chapter covers all types hardfacing of including:
- cobalt-base alloys,
- iron-base alloys,
- nickel-base alloys.
S 8110 HARDFACING PROCEDURES

A hardfacing procedure is a series of operations (preparation, preheating, overlaying, post-heating
and heat treatment) applied to a material of known composition, shape and dimensions, in order to
obtain a deposit which meets specific quality.
The qualification of a hardfacing method involves firstly the determination of the characteristics of
the base metals and filler metals, as well as the operating conditions (and in particular the main
variables which define the area of validity) and, secondly, verification that the hardfacing obtained
satisfies the required quality.
S 8120 PROCESSES
This document applies to the welding processes listed below. These processes may be manual or
automatic according to the circumstances.
COBALT- IRON- NICKEL-

WELDING PROCESS BASE BASE BASE
ALLOYS ALLOYS ALLOYS
Oxyacetylene welding (311) x

Powder oxyacetylene welding (spraying-remelting) x
Shielded metal-arc welding (111) x
Gas tungsten arc welding TIG (141) x x x
Plasma arc welding (15) x x x
NOTE: the number of the process in brackets comes from the standard NF EN ISO 4063
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 1
S 8130 DESIGN DRAWINGS

For the preparation of drawings of parts to be hardfaced attention is drawn to the proper definition
of the following parameters:
- minimum and maximum thicknesses of the hardfacing in the finished condition (after
machining),
- choice of hardness and roughness adapted to the purpose of the hardfacing,
- position and dimension of the active leaktight zone,
- shape of bed or geometry of the area to be overlaid (simple shapes are best),
- final dimensional tolerances,
- surface finish before hardfacing,
- number of layers.
The above parameters will be defined in liaison with the Manufacturer and/or Subcontractors.
Note :
- It is pointed out that during the hardfacing operation and particularly following the required pre-heating considerable
shrinkage is liable to occur. Precautions therefore need to be taken, and a number of preliminary tests should be
carried out in the case of unknown dimensions and shapes.
- For some hardfacing of ferritic steels which are critical with regard to the stresses resulting from the hardfacing
operations or service conditions, a sub-layer of austenitic steel or alloy may be desirable.
S 8140 DOCUMENTS TO BE PREPARED

The Manufacturer must prepare at least the following duly identified documents:
– documents relating to the filler materials :
. the acceptance specification of the filler materials,
– documents relating to the qualification of the welding procedures and welders or welding
operators:
. the welding procedure data sheet which will be included in the welding data package and from
which the qualification area of validity will be deduced,
. the examinations to be performed and the associated criteria,
– documents relating to the performance of the production operations :
. a welding data package that shall comprise, at least :
- an overall or outline drawing of the component, marking the position of all hardfacings,
- for each hardfacing, the following shall be provided:
. the welding procedure or procedures used and the relevant welding procedure data sheets
including: - dimensional sketch of the preparation,
- sketch of the arrangement of the different hardfacing layers
. heat treatment if necessary,
S 8000 / 2  n° 137-2012
. referenced qualification test coupons that validate the hardfacing procedure with, for each
test coupon, the hardfacing procedure data sheet from which the area of validity of the
qualification is,
. instructions regarding the inspections to be performed and the associated criteria.
S 8200 ACCEPTANCE OF FILLER MATERIALS
S 8210 GENERAL
Acceptance tests are mainly intended to ensure that the lots of filler materials used in manufacture
are of a constant quality and similar to that of the lots used for the qualification tests. The
Manufacturer must prepare a filler materials acceptance specification.
The acceptance tests must be performed per lot in reproducible conditions. They shall be performed
in the presence of the Supplier's and/or Manufacturer's quality control staff.
The acceptance tests of filler materials for the sub-layers shall be performed according to the
provisions of chapter S 2000 which apply to cladding.
S 8220 DEFINITION OF FILLER MATERIALS

The Supplier of the filler materials must specify the following in the product data sheet :
- the name of the Supplier and the factory,
- the nature, the commercial and the standardized designation of the product,
- the geometrical, physical and guaranteed chemical characteristics of the product,
- where applicable, guaranteed chemical and mechanical characteristics of the metal deposited in
the horizontal position and outside diffusion for a defined process and hardfacing parameters,
- definition of the lot and variables involved in the manufacture of the product, any change in
which would result in a change in the lot reference,
- operating limits (in particular, conservation of the material).
This data sheet must be sent either to the Manufacturer or to the Contractor with a confidentiality
clause.
S 8230 LOT OF FILLER MATERIAL

The lot definition must respect the following conditions.
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 3
S 8231 RODS
Rods from the same heat of steel or from a metal of known homogeneous quality and originating
from the same manufacturing cycle, constitute a lot.

A lot of electrodes consists of units of the same diameter, with a core from the same batch and a
covering made from the same mix of powder and originating from the same manufacturing cycle.
S 8233 METAL POWDER

A lot of metal powder comprises a single homogeneous mix of grains of alloys of the same grade.
The granulometry of the mixture must be defined in the acceptance specification.
S 8240 TESTS PER LOT

S 8241 TESTS ON FILLER MATERIALS
The rods and metal powders shall be subjected to a product analysis or ladle analysis.
The elements to be analyzed and the values to be met are specified in :
- table I for cobalt-base alloys,
- table II for iron-base alloys,
- table III for nickel-base alloys,
completed, when necessary, with alloy components specific to a Supplier.
The acceptance specification may reduce the limits proposed in tables I, II, III depending on the
alloy type and the used hardfacing procedure.
Metal powders will be subjected to a granulometric analysis using sieves in accordance with
standard EN 24497.
S 8242 TESTS ON THE DEPOSITED METAL

For covered electrodes, a chemical analysis and a hardness test of the deposited metal outside the
dilution zone shall be performed in the following conditions.
a) Drying
Prior to use, the electrodes shall be dried under the conditions recommended by the Suppliers, as
indicated on the packaging or on the data sheet.
b) Parameters
The deposits shall be applied to a test coupon of weldable carbon or stainless steel at least
25 mm thick.
S 8000 / 4  n° 137-2012
The thickness of the deposit, and thus the number of layers, shall be sufficient to avoid dilution
of the last layer deposited with the base metal, that is, at least 4 layers will be applied. The width
and the length of the deposit after machining shall be sufficient to allow the tests below
(about 25 mm x 100 mm). The exact dimensions of the coupon and the deposit will be specified
in the acceptance.
The preheating and interpass temperatures, the energy variables and any heat treatment
conditions shall be stated in the acceptance specifications.
c) Inspection of the deposit

Each pass shall be visibly inspected and brushed if necessary. Any slag shall be completely
removed by grinding if necessary.
d) Taking of samples for chemical analysis

The analysis shall be carried out in the undiluted zone.
The chemical analysis shall comply with that of table 1 for the grade in question.
e) Hardness test
A minimum of ten Rockwell C hardness measurements shall be made on the polished surface of
the hardfacing in accordance with standard EN ISO 6508-1. The values obtained shall be within
the range of values given in table 1 for the grades in question.
S 8250 ACCEPTANCE REPORT

The full trade designation and the standard designation of the product used during acceptance, the
specified values and the results of each test, are entered on the acceptance report. This document
clearly indicates the specification used for acceptance.
For covered electrodes, the validity period for this report is limited to 5 years from its signature.
S 8300 HARDFACING PROCEDURE

QUALIFICATION
The preparation, the performance and the inspection of the qualification test coupons must take
account of the conditions accepted for preparation, performance and inspection of production
hardfacing.
S 8310 AREA OF VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION

S 8311 WORKSHOP
The qualification tests shall be performed in the same workshop as the production hardfacing.
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 5

Materials shall be chosen with reference to the following remarks.
Equivalence is allowed between products of the same grade manufactured or worked in different
ways (forged, rolled or cast). However, for cast products, qualification shall wherever possible be
conducted on the cast product.
- Stainless steels
All unstabilized austenitic stainless steels (bearing in mind that these steels may contain
controlled ferrite content, for example, of up to 25%, in the case of castings), shall be considered
as equivalent.
- Carbon steels
The welding procedure shall be automatically qualified for all steels having a minimum specified
ultimate tensile strength Rm equal to or less than that of the steel used for the qualification.
- Low-alloy steels, other high-alloy steels and other alloys
The test coupon shall be of the grade actually used in production.

The shape and dimensions of the qualification test coupon shall be representative of the production
parts from the point of view of geometry, rigidity, accessibility and heat cycles. In the case of series
manufactured parts of comparable shape but with a varying range of sizes, test coupons (or parts)
representing the size limits shall be used.

A change of welding process or a change of execution of welding process shall require a new
S 8315 FILLER MATERIALS

The grade used shall be that of the commercial brand chosen for manufacture and accepted in
accordance with S 8200. However, qualification may be extended from one brand to another for the
same grade on the basis of test results already obtained elsewhere or on standard parts and subject to
the approval of the Contractor.
In the case of hardfacing with sub-layers, the qualification is limited to the same grade of these
sub-layers.
S 8316 NUMBER OF LAYERS

Hardfacing comprising one and more layers shall be qualified separately. The area of validity (N) of
the qualification in relation to the number of layers (n) is as follows:
- n=1 N=1
- n=2 2N4
- n>2 nNn+4
S 8000 / 6  n° 137-2012
with :
n number of performed layers,
N area of validity.
The aforementioned range of approval is applicable in both the as-welded and machined condition.
In particular in the case of hardfacing in several layers, any reduction in the minimum thickness of
the deposit after final machining requires a new qualification.
Moreover, hardfacings with sub-layers shall be qualified by a hardfacing procedure with sub-layers.

The welding procedure is qualified only for the welding position corresponding to the qualification
test coupon.
S 8318 WELDING TECHNIQUES AND PARAMETERS

The qualification of the welding procedure is invalidated when one of the following changes occurs:
a) In the case of oxyacetylene welding :

- change in the nature of one of the combustion gases,
- change in the type of torch or the nozzle size,
- change in the gas pressure or flowrate so that it falls outside of the specified range,
- change in the adjustment of the flame.
b) In the case of covered electrode electric arc welding :

- change in the type of current (d.c. or a.c.) or the polarity in the d.c. current,
- change in the nominal diameter of the electrode used for the first layer,
- change in the specified ranges of amperage,
- change from a narrow pass deposit to a wide pass deposit (oscillation, more than 3 times the
diameter of the electrode core).
c) In the case of manual TIG welding :

- change in the type of current or the polarity in the d.c. current,
- change in the nominal chemical composition of the protective gas,
- reduction by more than 10 % of the gas flowrate in relation to the minimum specified value,
- introduction or cancellation of oscillation,
- change in the specified amperages.
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 7
d) In the case of PLASMA and automatic TIG welding :

- change in the type or model of the machine,
- change in the type of arc (transferred or semi-transferred) or of current (pulsed or otherwise),
- change in the diameter of the torch orifices,
- change in the specified amperages and voltages,
- change in the chemical composition of the plasma gases or the protective gases and powder
supply,
- change in the flowrate of the plasma gas,
- change in the flowrate of the powder or in the feed rate of the rod,
- reduction of the protective gas flowrate by more than 10 % in relation to the minimum
specified value,
- introduction or cancellation of oscillation,
- change in the rhythm and amplitude of the oscillation,
- change in the deposit feed rate.
e) In the case of spraying-remelting :

a. spraying :
- change in the nature of one of the combustion gases,
- change in the flowrate of the powder,
- change in the deposit feed rate,
b. remelting :
- change in the specified amperages and voltages, where applicable,
c. and in both cases :
- change in the nozzle size,
- change in the gas pressure or flowrate so that it falls outside of the specified range,
- change in the length between nozzle and piece.

The welding procedure qualification is invalidated if any of the following changes is made in
relation to the requirements set out in the document defining the qualification :
- decrease of the minimum specified pre-heating temperature as defined in S 1320,
- increase of the maximum specified interpass temperature as defined in S 1320,
- alteration of the specified temperature ranges of the heat treatments after hardfacing
(postheating, stabilization or stress relieving heat treatment or heat treatment for mechanical
properties),
- reduction of the postheating period,
- increase of more than 20% in the total heat treatment time after hardfacing compared with the
heat treatment time used for the qualification test coupon.
S 8000 / 8  n° 137-2012

The preparation, execution and control of qualification test coupon shall take into account the retain
conditions for the preparation, execution and controls of production hardfacings.
S 8321 BASE METAL AND FILLER MATERIAL

The base metals and filler materials shall be those used in manufacture or shall be representative of
the latter, within the defined ranges of equivalence.
The area to be overlaid shall be prepared and inspected as in manufacture.
S 8322 HARDFACING OF THE TEST PIECE

In general, the current generators used shall be of the same type (d.c. or a.c.) and have similar static
characteristics (drooping, vertical, horizontal ...) to those used in production. The preheating
temperature used shall be at the lower end of the specified range.
During the qualification tests, the parameters U (voltage), I (amperage) and V (travel speed) shall be
periodically noted for electric arc process :
- U, I and V for automatic process,
- I for manual process.
If these recordings are not possible, the adjustment conditions concerning these parameters shall be
noted with reference to the tests by means of which they were established.
If dimensional stabilization heat treatment, stress-relieving heat treatment or heat treatment for
mechanical properties is scheduled, the heat cycles undergone by the qualification coupon shall
be recorded.
S 8323 REPAIR SIMULATION

When local repairs are authorized in manufacture (see S 8540) and if these repairs are carried out
using a different welding procedure from the one used for hardfacing, the repair simulation shall be
carried out in the conditions representative of those envisaged during fabrication, in particular
choosing maximum specified excavation dimensions. The checks to be performed are those of the
qualification procedure (S 8330) except for the chemical analysis.
S 8330 EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS ON THE TEST PIECE

The qualification test coupon shall be subjected to all the non-destructive examinations specified in
manufacture for the hardfacings qualified and shall satisfy the highest-level quality requirements
applicable to these hardfacings. Its surface finish shall be comparable to the most unfavourable
production hardfacing, taking care to minimize surface cold working.
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 9

a) Chemical analysis
Sampling of metal chips for wet chemical analysis shall be performed at a depth corresponding
to the specified minimum final thickness of the hardfacing after elimination of at least 0.5 mm
thickness from the as-welded surface of the hardfacing (see Figure S 8332.a). The chemical
analysis shall cover the following elements for the grade considered :
- C, Cr, W, Ni, Mo, Mn, Si and Fe for cobalt-base alloys,
- Ni, Cr, C, Si, Mn and Mo for iron-base alloys,
- Fe, Cr, C and Si for nickel-base alloys.
The values to be met shall be entered in the qualification welding specification, within the
following limits :
- cobalt-base alloys
. carbon content  1.8% for grade 6 and 2.2% for grade 12 for hardfacing on austenitic
stainless steel parts,
. iron content  6% in the general case; hardfacing carried out by the electric process :
. for parts whose main function is guiding with friction, this limit is increased up to 9%,
. for parts whose function is sealing and support, the value of 6% is considered as a
maximum preferred value, though this value may reach up to 9%.
Where the geometry of parts to be hard-faced is such that the required values cannot be
obtained (e.g. small diameter or thickness), the criteria shall be defined by the Manufacturer
on a case by case basis in agreement with the Contractor.
- iron-base alloys
. nickel content :
.  1.2 % for everit 50,
.  4.8 % for norem 02 and norem 02A,
.  2.2 % for delchrome 910.
- nickel-base alloys
. carbon content  1.0 % for grade 4 and 1.2% for grade 5 for hardfacing on austenitic
stainless steel parts,
. iron content  6% though this value may reach up to 9%.
If the geometry of the test coupons does not allow sampling of the sufficient quantity of chips for
complete analysis of the hardfacing, the elements which must be analyzed imperatively are :
- Fe and C for cobalt-base alloys and nickel-base alloys,

- C, Cr and Ni for iron-base alloys.
If necessary, the number of test coupons will be doubled so that these elements can be analyzed.
The other elements to be analyzed, if possible, are in order of priority, the alloying elements.
NOTE : Analyses by spectrometer shall be performed on the surface of the hardfacing, machined to specified
minimum thickness.
S 8000 / 10  n° 137-2012
b) Metallographic examinations
A cross-section of the deposit machined to the minimum dimensions and perpendicular to the
beads shall be prepared for macrographic examination in accordance with NF A 05-152
standard. This examination with a 5 x magnification is intended to detect cracks in the base
metal or heat affected zone, lack of fusion or other linear defects. In addition, macrographic
examination is a way of checking the number of layers in order to judge the application of the
limits of the qualification area.
In addition, a micrographic examination shall be performed to check the microstructure and the
absence of cracking.
In case of hardfacings with sub-layers, a supplementary section will be performed in the same
conditions as the one previously planned.
c) Line of hardness measurement

A line of hardness measurement HV5 will be performed on a line perpendicular to the skins (see
fig. S 8332 b).
In the case of base materials of austenitic stainless steels and nickel based alloys, the line of
hardness measurement will only be made in the hardfacing deposit.
In the case of base materials of ferritic steels, the hardness in the HAZ shall not exceed the
following values :
- 350 Hv for carbon steel whose Rm  450MPa,
- 380 Hv for carbon steel or non-alloy steel whose Rm > 450 MPa.
The hardness measurements made in the hardfacing deposit allow the dilution of the various
layers to be evaluated.
A line of hardness measurement may be made in the hardfacing deposit along a line parallel to
the skins, in order to evaluate the uniformity of the hardfacing.
d) Surface hardness measurements

A minimum of ten Rockwell C hardness measurements in accordance with standard
EN ISO 6508-1 shall be taken on the surface machined to the minimum dimension of the
hardfacing deposit. The average value of these ten measurements is determined. Of these ten
measurements, the deviation between the maximum value and the minimum value shall
no exceed :
- 6 points for grade 21 of cobalt-base alloys,
- 5 points for grade 6 of cobalt-base alloys and the nickel-base alloys,
- 4 points for grades 12 and SF1 of cobalt-base alloys and the iron-base alloys.
The average values to be respected shall be entered in the welding process qualification
procedure. The ranges chosen for these average values according to the function and hardfacing
procedure must remain within the hardness range given in table I, II and III for each grade.
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 11
S 8340 VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION

The welding procedure qualification is valid for an unlimited time.
Nevertheless, in case of repairs which occur too regularly according to S8540 or in case of
detection of defects which might invalidate the conditions of application of the procedure, or the
qualification itself of the hardfacing procedure, a report analyzing the cause of these repairs shall be
made by the Manufacturer and submitted to the Contractor's approval.
S 8400 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS

AND WELDING OPERATORS
S 8410 AREA OF VALIDITY
A welder or a welding operator who has carried out the welding procedure qualification is himself
automatically qualified. This paragraph therefore refers to the qualification of additional welders or
welding operators.
S 8411 WORKSHOP
The qualification performed in a workshop is valid regardless of the intervention site of the welders
or welding operators.

The same range of approval as in EN 287-1 table 2 of paragraph 5.5.2 shall apply.

See S 8313.

See S 8314.
S 8415 FILLER MATERIALS AND SHIELDING GASES

See S 8315.
S 8416 NUMBER OF LAYERS

See S 8316.

The welder (or welding operator) is qualified only for the position corresponding to the
S 8000 / 12  n° 137-2012
S 8418 WELDING TECHNIQUES AND PARAMETERS

For automatic processes, the paragraph S 8318d) shall apply.

S 8421 BASE METAL AND FILLER MATERIAL
See S 8321.
S 8422 HARDFACING OF THE QUALIFICATION TEST COUPON

See S 8322.
S 8430 EXAMINATIONS AND TESTS ON

THE QUALIFICATION TEST COUPON
See S 8331.

Only the metallographic and surface hardness tests in the final stage (S 8332 b) and d)) shall be
performed.
S 8440 VALIDITY OF QUALIFICATION -

QUALIFICATION RENEWAL
The welder qualification remains valid for 2 years, if the welder performs regularly hardfacings in
the area of validity of his qualification. No interruption more than 6 months is authorized.
Successive prolongations of two years are allowed if :
- hardfacings performed by the welder are in conformity with required criteria,
- is added, to the qualification certificate of the welder, a file composed of control report, required
for the manufacturing, dated less than six months.
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 13
S 8500 MANUFACTURE
S 8510 STORAGE AND UTILIZATION OF FILLER MATERIALS

a) Storage conditions
The storage conditions must allow the filler materials to retain their properties. The materials are
thus stored in a closed, dry and if necessary heated area. The Manufacturer is responsible for
defining the minimum temperature and the maximum RH level admissible.
b) Stores entry
The accepted materials entering the stores are marked by a suitable means (with a stamp for
example) on each packaging unit. A packaging unit is understood to mean: a packet of
electrodes (or packaging containing several packets) of rods or of powder. Materials accepted
after stores entry are marked after the acceptance.
c) Time spent in the warehouse

Should the same area be used to store accepted products, products awaiting acceptance or others,
there must be a physical separation between these materials. Sufficient space would constitute a
separation. During storage, materials remain in their original intact packaging (subject to the
requirements of S 8511.f). Any damaged material, or for which the identification has been lost,
is downgraded. Particular care should be taken when handling the electrodes to avoid any impact
likely to damage the coating.
d) Stock control
Incoming goods monitoring must mean that the following are known for each lot of materials :
- designations,
- dimensions,
- quantity received in the warehouse,
- date of acceptance,
- where applicable, the expiry date (see S 8250),
- exit date,
- quantity taken out,
- removal document reference or rejection indication.
e) Removal from stores

Products are only removed from stores against delivery of a document, which must contain at
least the following information to the person in charge of stores or his representative :
- a designation,
- dimensions,
- quantity,
- number of lots or lot (or Manufacturer's code number provided that the code number means
that the lot number can be found without ambiguity),
- product allocation to a given piece of equipment or hardfacing .
Note : If the documents do not meet these requirements, the Quality Assurance procedure relating to removal of
products from stores must enable all this information to be found.
S 8000 / 14  n° 137-2012
S 8511 USE OF MATERIALS

a) The Manufacturer's attention is drawn onto the fact that he must have specified the maximum
quantity of materials which can be removed from the warehouse and according to the utilization,
conservation and distribution conditions such that the material retains its full properties.
b) The drying conditions are specified by the Supplier (temperature and holding time) on the
material data sheet.
c) When specified (cf. S 8511.b), the user has them dried in ovens reserved for the accepted
materials. The electrodes are dried out of their packaging or placed in metal boxes allowing air
circulation through both ends. Each oven has a table on which the grade, lot number and drying
conditions for the material contained are marked. An oven only contains the products of a single
grade at any one time. However, several grades may be placed in the same oven provided that :
- their drying conditions are identical,
- there is a physical separation between them (a space is not considered as a physical
separation).
d) After drying, the electrodes are stored in containers or heating cabinets until they are used.
Electrodes being used or which have spent more than 4 hours at ambient temperature, are redried.
This operation can only take place the number of times specified in the material data sheet.
e) Each welder has portable equipment, which allows him to keep his electrodes dry.
f) Unpackaged and unused electrodes can only be reintroduced into the warehouse provided the
requirements of the previous points are respected, in particular S 8510 b, and according to a
procedure defining identification and new packing.
g) Only ends of rods belonging to the same lot can be joined together. The oxyacetylene joining
procedure is only authorized for rods intended for hardfacing using the same process.
S 8512 IDENTIFICATION OF PRODUCTS DURING HARDFACING

All products must be identified at all moments during their use.
S 8520 PREPARATION OF THE SURFACE TO BE HARDFACED

The geometrical shape of support material must be free of sharp angles and have a surface condition
free of porosities or other defects likely to affect the texture of the deposit, must be free of grease,
oil or other foreign bodies and must be deburred. A liquid penetrant examination must be performed
and no indications are tolerated.
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 15
In the case of forged or die-cast parts, intended for series production of valves with a nominal
diameter of less than or equal to 80 mm, this liquid penetrant examination may be carried out on a
sample of at least 3% of the parts of the same procurement lot. This check will be performed on the
first parts of the lot produced and will validate the entire lot. If one or more liquid penetrant
indications are detected, the check will be extended to the entire lot.
S 8530 HARDFACING TECHNIQUES

S 8531 WELDING POSITIONS
The hardfacing operations will be preferably carried out in the flat or flat rotating position, using a
manipulator.
S 8532 CLEANLINESS
The zones hardfaced will be neither pickled chemically nor passivated.
S 8540 REPAIRS TO WELD DEPOSIT

If the hardfacing contains unaccepted defects, the Manufacturer may carry out :
- a local elimination of unaccepted defects,
- a removal of the last layer,
- a removal of the entire deposit before to apply a new hardfacing.
In all cases, the repairs must satisfy the same requirements as production hardfacing.In addition,
repairs in the deposit or in the base metal shall be performed after defective areas have been
completely removed by machining or grinding.
If the welding procedure used for repairs is different from that used to deposit the original
hardfacing, the repair welding procedure shall be qualified by a simulated repair (see S 8323).
S 8550 HEAT CYCLES

If the heat cycles (temperature ≥ 650°C) are likely to alter the properties of the base metal, a check
should be made to ensure that the mechanical characteristics of the base metal remain within the
specified values after application of a simulated treatment (preheating, postheating, stress relieving)
representative of that undergone during manufacture.
S 8551 PREHEATING, POSTHEATING

The preheating temperature shall be specified in the hardfacing procedure. The parts shall be
uniformly preheated to a temperature chosen, in particular, according to the process used, the
material and the thickness of the product to be hardfaced. The temperature will not fall below the
preheating temperature throughout the welding period. If the welding process is interrupted, the
preheating shall be maintained until it resumes.
S 8000 / 16  n° 137-2012
After hardfacing, it is recommended that the entire part be maintained at a temperature at least
equal to that of preheating for at least 15 minutes, this time depending on the dimensions of
the part.
Cooling will be slow, for example in an oven or insulating Vermiculite type powder.

In certain cases, a heat treatment (dimensional stabilization or stress relieving heat treatment or heat
treatment for mechanical properties) may be necessary after hardfacing, considering the hardfacing
type, the utilization conditions or manufacturing conditions, in which case this must be specified.
A stabilisation heat treatment is required for hardfacings type NOREM 02 and 02A
It is recalled that for hardfacing of ferritic steels, a sub-layer may be preferable (see para. S 8130).
S 8560 HARDFACING TESTS, BEFORE

AND AFTER MACHINING
S 8561 SURFACE ASPECT EXAMINATION
This will be carried out in all cases :
- before machining of the hardfacing deposit, and it is intended to ensure a high quality of deposit,
a regular shape and adherence to the support,
- after machining of the deposit, it is recalled that a perfectly ground surface increases corrosion
and erosion resistance.
The roughness shall correspond to the values specified in the drawings and adopted according to
hardfacing practice (for example, N3 or better in accordance with standard NF E 05-051 for active
zones of sealing joints of gate valves).
S 8562 LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION - VISUAL EXAMINATION

These checks are carried out, in accordance with NF EN ISO 3452-1 standard, in all cases with the
following criteria :
- no splits, cracks, lack of adhesion, tungsten or slag inclusions are acceptable,
- no elongated liquid penetrant indication (three times the width) is admissible, be it on the deposit
or in the bonding zone,
- with regard to rounded liquid penetrant indications, there are two separate classes depending on
the function of the hardfaced area :
a. Guiding parts and other hardfaced areas including edges :

. Rounded indications with one dimension greater than 1.5 mm are unacceptable. If the
minimum thickness required after final machining is less than 1.5 mm, the maximum
acceptable dimension of the indications is limited to this thickness. Indications with
smaller dimensions will be accepted in so far as :
 n° 144-2014 S 8000 / 17
. the density of the liquid penetrant indications is a maximum of one per 25 cm² of
hardfaced area (one indication of 0 to 25 cm², two of 25 to 50 cm², three of 50 to
75 cm², etc..),
. any two liquid penetrant indications are at least 20 mm apart.
b. Leaktightness
. No indication shall be acceptable in the active areas,
. In the other areas, the criteria of paragraph a) above shall apply.
c. Hardfacing of a large surface area ( 500 cm²)

The criteria are defined by the Manufacturer on a case by case basis with the agreement of the
Contractor .
S 8563 DIMENSIONAL CHECK

The Manufacturer will prepare recordings of the dimensional checks carried out at the various
manufacturing stages :
- after machining of the part (or parts) before hardfacing,
- after hardfacing and final machining.
S 8570 OTHER PRODUCTION EXAMINATIONS

Other examinations may be scheduled during production by the Manufacturer himself or by the
Contractor in the equipment specification according to the functional importance of the hardfacing,
the difficulty of performing hardfacing and the nature of the production (unit, series).
S 8571 ANALYSIS OF MACHINING CHIPS

This examination not only allows the production to be situated in relation to the qualification
criteria, but also allows an evaluation to be made of any deviation with regard to dilution or
supercarburizing, or linked to the filler material.
S 8572 SURFACE HARDNESS

Same remarks as S 8571, however, the indentations should be ground or machined in the final
condition, in order to avoid break initiations.
S 8573 ULTRASONIC OR RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATIONS

These examinations can check the absence of internal defects, and in particular the lack of bonding
in the case of processes which are difficult to use.
S 8000 / 18  n° 137-2012
S 8574 FERROMAGNETIC EXAMINATION

In the case of cobalt alloy deposited by oxyacetylene hardfacing on austenitic stainless steel used in
a corrosive environment, a special ferromagnetic check of the deposit or its bonding with the base
metal may be envisaged to evaluate the extent of dechromisation.
S 8575 PRODUCTION WELD TEST COUPONS

For certain series of production, production weld test coupons can be requested in the equipment
specification which must then specify the frequency of sampling. The checks to be carried out and
the criteria to be observed are those mentioned in S 8330 regarding qualification coupons.
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 19
TABLE I: COBALT BASE ALLOYS
1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE MAIN GRADES USED

1.1 CASE OF RODS AND METAL POWDERS (analysis on the product or metal
deposited out of dilution zone)
ELEMENTS
C Cr W Ni Mo Mn Si Fe** Co
%
0.18 25. 0 1.75 4.8
Grade 21 to to  0.5 to to  1.0  2.0  3.0 balance
0.32 29.0 3.75 6.1
0.9* 26.0 3.0
Grade 6 to to to  3.0  1.0  1.0  2.0  3.0 balance
1.4 32.0 6.0
1.2 26.0 7.0
1.7 32.0 9.5
Note :
* an extension of the range to 0.8 % minimum is tolerated for rods intended for oxyacetylene
process hardfacing.
** attention is attracted on the difficulties to measure iron concentration in cobalt base alloy; in case
of contesting between the product Supplier and the Manufacturer, a laboratory will be designated
by both, in accordance with the Constructor.
1.2 CASE OF RODS AND METAL POWDERS FOR REFUSION SPRAYING

(product analysis)
ELEMENTS
C Cr W Ni Cu Mn Si Fe B Co
%
17.5 11.5 12.0 1.0

Grade SF1  1.50 to to to  1.0  1.0  4.0  4.5 à balance
20.5 14.0 15.0 3.0
S 8000 / 20  n° 137-2012
TABLE I: COBALT BASE ALLOYS (continuation)
1.3 CASE OF COVERED ELECTRODES

(analysis on metal deposited out of dilution zone)
ELEMENTS
C Cr W Ni Mo Mn Si Fe Co
%
0.20 25.0 1.75 4.8
Grade 21 to to  0.5 to to  1.2  2.0  5.0 balance
0.30 29.0 3.75 6.1
0.7 25.0 3.0
1.4 32.0 6.0
1.0 25.0 7.0
1.7 32.0 9.5
2 HRC HARDNESS VALUES
Grade 21 28 - 35
Grade 6 39 - 47
Grade 12 47 - 53
Grade SF1 54 - 65
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 21
TABLE II: IRON BASE ALLOYS
1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE GRADES USED

1.1 CASE OF RODS
(analysis on the product or metal deposited out of dilution zone)
ELEMENTS
Ni Fe Co Cr C B Si Mn Mo N
%
23.0 2.0
Type 
 1.0 balance  0.1 to to  1.0  1.2  3.5
Everit 50 0.15
27.0 2.5
3.7 23.0 1.10 3.10 4.0 1.8

Type   
to balance to to to to to
Norem 02A 0.05 0.02 0.06
4.4 26.0 1.35 3.50 5.0 2.2
1.2 CASE OF METAL POWDER

(analysis on the product or metal deposited out of dilution zone)
ELEMENTS
Ni Fe Co Cr C B Si Mn Mo N
%
Type 23.0 2.8

Delchrome  2.0 balance  0.1 to to  1.0  1.0  3.5
0.06
910 27.0 3.5
3.7 23.0 1.10 3.10 4.0 1.8 0.14
Type  
to balance to to to to to to
Norem 02 0.05 0.02
4.4 26.0 1.35 3.50 5.0 2.2 0.18
Type Everit 50 43 - 52
Type Delchrome 910 50 – 60 (aimed  55)
Type Norem 02 36 - 44
Type Norem 02A 34 - 44
S 8000 / 22  n° 137-2012
TABLE III: NICKEL BASE ALLOYS
1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE GRADES USED

1.1 CASE OF RODS AND METAL POWDER
(analysis on the product or metal deposited out of dilution)
ELEMENTS
Ni Fe Co Cr C B Si
%
0.20 1.5
1.0 to 6.5 to 1.2 to
grade 4 balance  1.5 to to
3.5 14.0 4.0
0.60 3,0
0.30
2.0 to 9.5 to 2,0 3.0 to
grade 5 balance  1.5 to
5.0 16.0 to 4.0 5.0
0.80
grade 4 36 - 45
grade 5 46 - 54
 n° 137-2012 S 8000 / 23
Figure S8332 a : Sampling of chips (example )
Figure S8332 b : HV 5 hardness measurement (example)
S 8000 / 24  n° 137-2012
ANNEX S I
MECHANICAL TESTS
This annex defines the following for all the destructive examinations which may be specified: the
types of test specimens to be used, the general sampling conditions and the test procedure.
S I 100 TENSILE TESTS
A distinction is to be made between transverse weld tensile tests designed to determine the tensile
strength of the welded joint, and all weld metal tensile tests on the deposited metal to determine the
mechanical properties of the weld metal.
S I 110 TRANSVERSE WELD TENSILE TESTS

S I 111 TYPES OF TEST SPECIMENS AND SAMPLING METHOD
The types of test specimens, the sampling method and the test procedure are defined in MC 1211B.
The test specimens shall be taken through the whole thickness of the welded joint after grinding of
the weld.
If the thickness of the plate or pipe joint exceeds 30 mm and the capacity of the test machine is such
that a test on the whole thickness cannot be performed, a number of test specimens with a unit
thickness of at least 15 mm may be taken in such a way as to cover the whole thickness of the joint.
S I 112 TEST PROCEDURE

The tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1211B.
S I 120 TENSILE TESTS OF THE DEPOSITED METAL

The tensile properties of the deposited metal shall be determined at room temperature and
temperature verified for class 1 equipment and for class 2 equipment where this verification is
performed on the base metal (see C 2200).
Test conditions are identical to those defined in the corresponding part or product procurement
specifications.
 n° 137-2012 Annex SI / 1

These are cylindrical test specimens taken from the deposited metal outside the dilution zone along
the axis of the weld.
The specimens shall be in accordance with one of the following paragraphs, according to the
application considered.
- MC 1211 A
- MC 1212
The field of application of these standards shall include nickel-base alloys.
S I 122 TEST PROCEDURES

The test shall be conducted at room temperature according to the procedure defined in the
paragraphs indicated in S I 121.
Tensile tests at high temperature are conducted according to the procedure defined in MC 1212.
S I 200 BEND TESTS

A distinction is to be made between three types of test specimens:
- transverse bend test specimens (face and root bend),
- longitudinal bend test specimens (face and root bend through thickness),
- side bend test specimens.
The test specimens shall be taken at right angles to the weld axis and shall be prepared in
accordance with MC 1261 subject to the following additional requirements.
S I 211 TRANSVERSE FACE AND ROOT BEND TEST SPECIMENS

The dimensions and preparation of the test specimens shall be in accordance with MC 1263.
One test specimen shall be taken from the top surface of the coupon and a second specimen from the
bottom surface.
The side of specimen which will be under tension shall be prepared by grinding down excess weld
thickness and then dressing the surface to remove any irregularity or transverse ripples (if there is an
offset between the two parts of the coupon, the higher part shall be levelled off).
The other face and the sides shall be machined to the dimensions required. The corners are rounded-
off to a radius not exceeding one tenth of thickness of the test specimen.
Specimens taken from tubular welds shall not be machined when the thickness of the weld is less
than or equal to 7 mm.
Annex SI / 2  n° 137-2012
S I 212 LONGITUDINAL BEND TEST SPECIMENS

The dimensions and preparation of the test specimens shall be in accordance with MC 1263.
For test specimens taken from the skin, the provisions of paragraph S I 211 relating to the
preparation of test specimens shall apply.
S I 213 SIDE BEND TEST SPECIMENS

When a side bend test is performed, and if sampling of several test specimens is necessary to cover
the entire thickness of the weld, the width of each test specimen shall be 20 mm or more.
The test specimen dimensions shall be in accordance with MC 1263.
S I 220 TEST PROCEDURE

The test procedure shall be in accordance with MC 1263 D.
S I 230 BEND TESTS ON CLADDINGS

Side bend tests shall be performed in accordance with the above requirements except with regard to
the following points:
- the test shall be carried out whatever the thickness of the cladding,
- the test specimen dimensions shall be in accordance with MC 1264.
S I 300 IMPACT TESTS
A distinction is to be made between the different types of impact tests which may be specified.
S I 310 TESTING OF DEPOSITED METAL

S I 311 KU IMPACT TESTS
a) Types of test specimens and sampling methods
The test specimens shall be in accordance with MC 1221 A.
The test specimens shall be taken at right angles to the weld axis.
The bottom of the notch shall be perpendicular to the surfaces of the test coupon and located in
the median axis of the weld. However, for the vertical electroslag welding process (72), the test
specimens taken at mid-thickness shall have the bottom of their notch parallel to the surfaces.
 n° 137-2012 Annex SI / 3
b) Test procedure
A test consists of three test specimens fractured in accordance with MC 1221 A, generally at
room temperature.
S I 312 KV IMPACT TESTS

They shall be taken at right angles to the weld axis.
The bottom of the notch shall be perpendicular to the surfaces of the test coupon and located in
the median axis of the weld. However, for the vertical electroslag welding process (72), the test
specimens taken at mid-thickness shall have the bottom of their notch parallel to the surfaces.
b) Test procedure
A test consists of three test specimens fractured at the specified test temperatures, in accordance
with MC 1221 A.
S I 320 TESTS ON THE HEAT AFFECTED ZONE (HAZ)

These tests shall be conducted using KV (and/or KU) impact test specimens when required. The
notch position is determined by macrographic examination.
S I 321 KU IMPACT TESTS

They shall be taken at right angles to the weld axis. The bottom of the notch shall be
perpendicular to the surfaces of the test coupon. In all cases, the bottom of the notch shall lie on
the fusion line.
b) Test procedure
A test consists of three test specimens fractured at room temperature and in accordance with
MC 1221 A.
S I 322 KV IMPACT TESTS

They shall be taken at right angles to the weld axis. The bottom of the notch shall be
perpendicular to the surfaces of the test coupon and located 1mm from the fusion line for
austenitic stainless steels and nickel-base alloys. For other steels, the bottom of the notch shall be
located at a distance of 1 mm and 4 mm from the fusion line.
Annex SI / 4  n° 137-2012
b) Test procedure
A test consists of three test specimens broken at the specified test temperatures, in accordance
with MC 1221 A.
S I 330 ADDITIONAL IMPACT TESTS

(For analysis of fast fracture behaviour)
These tests are only performed if explicitly required by the equipment specification. As regards both
the deposited metal and the heat affected zones (HAZ), they apply only to carbon or low-alloy
steels.
S I 331 KV TRANSITION CURVES

The test specimens shall be in accordance with MC 1221 A and shall be taken at right angles to
the weld axis.
1) Test specimens for test of the deposited metal
Their orientation shall be such that the bottom of the notch is perpendicular to the surfaces of
the test joint and located approximately on the median axis of the weld.
The longitudinal axis of the test specimens shall be located at a distance from the two surfaces
equal to at least one quarter of the thickness of the test joint.
This condition shall be complied with whenever it is compatible with the thickness of the test
coupon. For bars of lesser thickness, the distance from the axis to the surface shall not be less
than 10 mm.
2) Test specimens for test on the heat affected zone (HAZ)
Their orientation shall be such that they satisfy all the following conditions:
- orientation of the test specimens shall be perpendicular to the direction of maximum
extension for base metals taken from plates or forgings,
- test specimens shall be located within a zone corresponding as closely as possible to one
quarter of the thickness of the test joint,
- the notch shall be approximately perpendicular to the surfaces of the test coupon and shall
include the maximum volume possible amount of the HAZ in the rupture plane of the test
specimen. For this purpose, where the thickness of the test allows, the orientation shall be
as far as possible parallel to the line of fusion,
- the bottom of the notch shall be located at 0.8 mm from the line of fusion.
b) Test procedure
The tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1221 A.
Sets of 3 test specimens shall be fractured for each test temperature.
The shape of the curve shall be in accordance with MC 1222.
 n° 137-2012 Annex SI / 5
These criteria are indicated in the equipment specification.
FIGURE S I 331
S I 332 DETERMINATION OF THE RTNDT TEMPERATURE OF

THE DEPOSITED METAL
The tests performed for this determination include both PELLINI drop-weight tests and KV
impact tests.
1) PELLINI drop-weight test specimens
Test specimens shall be of type P3 in compliance with ASTM E 208.
The orientation of test specimens shall be such that the notch lying parallel to the surfaces of
the test joint is located approximately on the weld axis.
The longitudinal axis of these test specimens shall be located at a distance from the surface of
at least one quarter of the thickness of the test joint.
This condition shall be complied with whenever it is compatible with the thickness of the test
bar. For lesser thicknesses, the distance from the axis to the surfaces shall not be less than
10 mm.
2) KV impact test specimens
The KV impact test specimens shall be in accordance with MC 1221 A and shall be taken in
accordance with the requirements of S I 331.a) 1) relating to all weld metal test specimens.
b) Test procedure
1) PELLINI drop-weight tests
These tests shall be performed (using, as a rule, 8 test-specimens) in accordance with
MC 1230.
The nil ductility transition temperature (TNDT) shall be determined to within 5°C.
Annex SI / 6  n° 137-2012
2) KV impact tests
The KV impact tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1221 A on sets of 3 test
specimens for each test temperature.
The test temperature shall be defined by reference to the TNDT temperature defined in 1)
above.
The tests shall be performed in accordance with MC 1240.
These criteria shall be indicated in the equipment specification.
S I 333 IMPACT TESTS ON THE HEAT AFFECTED ZONE (HAZ)

From the point of view of impact strength, the purpose of these tests is to evaluate the impact
strength of this zone in relation to the base metal.
They shall be performed for welding procedure qualifications if the thickness of the test joints
exceeds 16 mm and in the case of electroslag (72), electrogas (73) and thermite welding (71)
processes.

1) PELLINI drop-weight test specimens
Test specimens shall be of type P3 and shall comply with the requirements of MC 1230.
They shall be taken from the base metal outside the heat affected zone and from an area
corresponding as far as possible to one quarter of the thickness of the test coupon.
2) KV impact test specimens
The KV impact test specimens shall comply with MC 1221 A and shall be taken both from the
base metal outside and inside the heat affected zone (HAZ).
Sampling methods for tests on the HAZ shall be indicated in S I 331.a)2).
In addition, in the case of electroslag and electrogas processes involving no treatment liable to
cause grain refinement, the notch shall be located in the coarse-grained zone.
For test specimens taken from the base steel outside the HAZ the sampling conditions are
identical to those defined above (test specimens for tests on the HAZ) in respect of their
orientation in relation to the direction of maximum extension, their location in the test coupon
and the notch orientation in relation to the surfaces.
b) Test procedure
1) PELLINI drop-weight tests
These tests on the base metal shall be conducted in accordance with MC 1230.
 n° 137-2012 Annex SI / 7
2) Impact tests
These tests shall be conducted in accordance with MC 1252.
- Test on the base metal
These tests shall be performed on a set of 3 test specimens broken at a temperature
corresponding to the TNDT determined in accordance with 1) above plus 33°C.
These fractured test specimens are used to determine the mean lateral expansion value EL
which is used as a basis of comparison for the tests performed on the HAZ.
- Tests on the HAZ
These tests are performed on sets of 3 test specimens for each test temperature, and are
performed as follows:
• the first set of test specimens is fractured at temperature TNDT + 33°C.
If the mean lateral expansion value obtained is equal to or greater than EL as
determined for the base metal, the welding procedure qualification test is considered
valid,
• otherwise, tests are performed at increasing temperature until a mean lateral expansion
value greater than EL is obtained. The difference between the temperature at which this
condition is fulfilled and TNDT + 33°C is noted in the welding procedure qualification
test report.
c) Application of the results

Only those cases are considered where there is a positive difference between TNDT + 33°C and
the temperature at which the mean lateral expansion value is equal to or greater than EL.
This difference is taken into account when fixing the temperature RTNDT of the base metal
welded by the procedure in question (in the case of pressure vessels), and is determining the
minimum operating temperature (of pumps, piping and valves) or the hydrostatic test
temperature, where applicable.
S I 400 METALLOGRAPHIC EXAMINATIONS
The following are performed on a cross-section of the weld:

- a macrographic examination (prepared in accordance with AFNOR standard NF A 05-152 and
MC 1320) to detect any lack of cracking, any lack of penetration or bonding with the base metal
or between passes, any incomplete fusion and any porosity of unacceptable size by the criteria
prescribed for radiographic examination.
In addition, the macrographic examination provides reference values for the number and
distribution of the passes so that compliance with the area of validity of the qualification can be
assessed.
Annex SI / 8  n° 144-2014
- a micrographic examination (in accordance with standard NF A 05-150 and MC 1320) at 200 x
magnification for the purpose of:
• in austenitic stainless steels and nickel-base alloys, checking the absence of microcracks and
precipitates which could prejudice the behaviour of the test coupon,
• in other steels, checking the absence of microcracks and structural anomalies due to
quenching.
Additional hardness tests, for example, may be required as a result of the findings.
- The results of the metallographic examinations shall be accompanied by the relevant photographs
and, for each of these, the etching agent and the magnification shall be stated. These documents
shall be included in the report.
It should be noted, however, in the case of partial penetration fillet welds, that the root zones require
special examination and that root defects not exceeding 0.8 mm are acceptable, except otherwise
stipulated.
In the vertical electroslag welding process (72), the solidification dendrites shall, in longitudinal
section, display an angle of less than 90° at the centre of the joint.
FIGURE S I 400
S I 500 HARDNESS MEASUREMENTS
For the welding procedure qualifications of piping socket welds and of weld overlay cladding of
austenitic ferritic stainless steel or nickel base alloy on non alloy or low alloy steels, hardness
measurements shall be made in the case of welding with steels liable to undergo hardening due to
martensitic or bainitic transformation.
These measurements are made particularly in the case of welds with carbon or low-alloy steels.
They are not, however, performed when welding austenitic stainless steels and nickel-base alloys.
 n° 144-2014 Annex SI / 9
The hardness measurements shall be made by the VICKERS method using a load of 10 kgf (98 N)
on a cross-section of the weld.
The test methods are specified in MC 1280.
1) Weld overlays cladding of austenitic-ferritic stainless steel or nickel-base alloy on non alloy or
low alloy steels
Three rows of hardness indentation perpendicular to the skins:
- 2 rows of indentation along the axis of two weld beads of the first layer (lines 1 and 3)
- 1 row of indentation in an overlap zone between two first layer passes (line 2)
One spot shall be carried out every 1mm for all 3 lines:
- across the full width of the HAZ (from the fusion line)
- along approximately 10mm of the unaffected base metal.
FIGURE S I 500 a)
Annex SI / 10  n° 144-2014
2) Piping socket welds

Hardness measurements are only required in the heat affected zone. Five indentations shall be
made in each base metal (see Figure SI 500 b))
The surface of the indentation in the heat affected zone

shall be contained within a strip formed by the line of
fusion and a line running parallel to it at a distance of
0.5 mm.
FIGURE S I 500 b)
S I 600 ACCELERATED INTERGRANULAR

CORROSION TEST
S I 610 TEST METHOD

The intergranular corrosion test shall be performed in accordance with MC 1310.
S I 620 NUMBER OF TEST SPECIMENS

AND SAMPLING METHODS
The following specimens shall be taken:
- 1 reference specimen,
- 1 test specimen which shall be subjected to a heat treatment representing all the production heat
treatments (this test specimen shall not be taken if no production heat treatment is performed),
- 1 test specimen which shall be subjected to the sensitizing treatment.
The specimens needed for the tests shall be taken in such a way that their longitudinal dimension is
parallel to the direction of welding.
 n° 144-2014 Annex SI / 11
TAKING SPECIMENS FROM TEST PLATE USED FOR ACCEPTANCE-TESTING

Where samples are taken from a test plate used for the acceptance-testing of electrodes or flux-wire
combinations the samples shall be taken from outside the dilution zone as shown below:
TAKING SPECIMENS FROM WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION TEST

COUPON
The samples shall be taken along the axis of the deposited metal, as close as possible to the surface,
removing the minimum amount of metal from the surface of the deposit.
The test specimen sampling diagrams shall be included in the documents defining the welding
procedure qualification.
TAKING SPECIMENS FROM CLADDING

When taking test specimens, the minimum amount of metal shall be removed from the surface of the
deposit. Not more than one test specimen may be taken through the thickness of the deposit.
S I 630 DIMENSIONS OF TEST SPECIMENS

The dimensions of the test specimens shall be as follows:
- length 70 mm,
- width 10 mm,
- thickness 4 mm.
For claddings of insufficient thickness, the thickness of the test specimens may be reduced to 3 mm.
The faces and sides shall be polished using an iron-free abrasive with a grain size of 50 to 120.
Before testing, the test specimens shall be carefully degreased with acetone or alcohol.
Annex SI / 12  n° 137-2012
ANNEX S II
CLASSIFICATION OF DEFECTS IN METALLIC FUSION

WELDS WITH EXPLANATIONS
______________________________
CLASSIFICATION DES DEFAUTS DANS LES SOUDURES

PAR FUSION DES METAUX, AVEC COMMENTAIRES
EXPLICATIFS
______________________________
NF EN ISO 6520-1
Classification of defects in metallic fusion welds is performed in accordance with

NF EN ISO 6520-1.
 n° 137-2012 Annex S II / 1
Annex S II / 2  n° 137-2012
ANNEX S III
TYPES OF BRANCHES
RECOMMENDED WELDED ASSEMBLIES

FOR PIPES
(DOS IIS/IIW 146-64 - SECTION 2)
 n° 137-2012 Annex S III / 1

SET-ON BRANCH WITH BEVEL
Note : When the hole in the header is gas cut, the ledge illustrated should be obtained and may be removed by
grinding if required. Alternatively, if the hole in the header is prepared by machining this ledge will not be
obtained (see section at W).
Annex S III / 2  n° 137-2012

SMALL SET-ON BRANCH WITH BEVEL
Note: These preparations are generally used for welding small bore branches such as bosses or couplings.
 n° 137-2012 Annex S III / 3

SET-ON BRANCH WITHOUT BEVEL
Note : Fillet welded joints should only be used for appropriate duties. Limitations in their use are normally specified
in National Codes and Standards to which reference should be made.
Annex S III / 4  n° 137-2012

SET-ON SLOPING BRANCH WITH BEVEL
 n° 137-2012 Annex S III / 5

SET-IN BRANCH
Annex S III / 6  n° 137-2012

SET-ON SLOPING BRANCH
 n° 137-2012 Annex S III / 7

SET-ON BRANCH WITH BACKING RING
For guidance on appropriate values for  and g which vary according to whether the single or double root run
techniques are employed see pages SIII/5 and SIII/6.
Annex S III / 8  n° 137-2012

SET-ON BRANCH WITH BACKING RING
For guidance on appropriate values for  and g which vary according to whether the single or double root run
techniques are employed see pages SIII/5 and SIII/6.
 n° 137-2012 Annex S III / 9

SMALL BRANCH
Annex S III / 10  n° 137-2012

UNREINFORCED BRANCHES WITH FORGED OPENINGS IN MAIN PIPES
 n° 137-2012 Annex S III / 11

REINFORCED BRANCH
Annex S III / 12  n° 137-2012

REINFORCED BRANCH CONNECTIONS
 n° 137-2012 Annex S III / 13

TRIFORM REINFORCEMENT
Annex S III / 14  n° 137-2012

Section Iv

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Section Iv

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Section Iv

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Translated from the French.

2012 Edition afcen

S 1000 GENERAL............................................................................................................ S1000/1

S 1100 GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................... /1

S 1110 PRELIMINARY VERIFICATIONS, QUALIFICATIONS AND ACCEPTANCES........ /1

S 1120 WELDING DATA PACKAGE .................................................................................... /2

S 1121 Welding procedure data sheets

S 1200 WELDABILITY OF MATERIALS .................................................................... /3

S 1300 GENERAL REMARKS ON HEAT TREATMENTS ................................... /4

S 1310 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................... /4

S 1320 PREHEAT AND INTERPASS TEMPERATURE........................................................ /5

S 1321 Carbon steels

S 1330 POSTHEATING .......................................................................................................... /6

S 1340 STRESS RELIEVING HEAT TREATMENT ............................................................... /6

S 1341 Carbon steels

S 1400 CONSERVATION OF TEST SPECIMENS, QUALIFICATION

S 1500 DEFINITION OF WELDING PROCEDURE OPERATIONS ................... /8

S 1600 TO S1800 (NOT USED) ................................................................................. /8

S 1900 CONTINUED VALIDITY OF QUALIFICATIONS

S 2000 ACCEPTANCE OF FILLER MATERIALS ....................................... S2000/1

S 2100 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... /1

S 2110 PRINCIPLES .............................................................................................................. /1

S 2120 ACCEPTANCE SPECIFICATION .............................................................................. /1

S 2200 DESIGNATION ..................................................................................................... /2

S 2300 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS............................................................ /2

S 2310 TIG WIRES.................................................................................................................. /2

S 2320 MIG OR MAG WIRES ................................................................................................. /2

S 2330 COVERED ELECTRODES ........................................................................................ /2

S 2340 OTHER PRODUCTS................................................................................................... /2

S 2400 DEFINITION OF LOTS ....................................................................................... /2

S 2410 SOLID WIRES AND STRIP ELECTRODES ............................................................. /2

S 2420 FLUX CORED WIRES ............................................................................................... /3

S 2430 COVERED ELECTRODES ......................................................................................... /3

S 2440 SOLID FLUXES ......................................................................................................... /3

S 2500 LOT TESTS ............................................................................................................ /3

S 2510 TESTS ON FILLER MATERIALS .............................................................................. /4

S 2511 Cobalt content of filler materials

S 2520 TESTS PERFORMED ON DEPOSITED METAL OF PRODUCTS

S 2521 Covered electrodes and gas shielded wires

S 2531 Dimensions of test plates

S 2541 Results of tests

S 2550 ACCEPTANCE VALIDITY PERIOD, REPORT ......................................................... /9

S 2600 LABELLING ........................................................................................................... /14

S 2700 TECHNICAL REFERENCE DATA SHEETS .............................................. /14

S 2800 DATA SHEETS FOR CARBON AND LOW-ALLOY STEEL

S 2900 DATA SHEETS FOR STAINLESS STEEL AND

S 3000 WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION.................................. S3000/1

S 3100 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. /1

S 3120 REPAIR BY WELDING OF

S 3130 DOCUMENTS TO BE ESTABLISHED ..................................................................... /2

S 3140 QUALIFICATION TESTS ........................................................................................... /2

S 3141 Number and type of test pieces

S 3160 VALIDITY OF THE QUALIFICATION ....................................................................... /3

S 3200 GENERAL CASES .............................................................................................. /4

S 3300 SIMULATED REPAIRS BY WELDING ........................................................ /18

S 3400 STEEL CAST PARTS REPAIRS

S 3410 RANGE OF QUALIFICATION ................................................................................... /18